Operator - Programmer - S Manual

Operator & Programmer's Manual
机床产品/Machine Tool Products
Exported on 08/15/2018

机床产品/Machine Tool Products – Operator & Programmer's Manual
Table of Contents
1 EndUser_Lathe............................................................................................ 22
1.1 6D-H/7/21/21-H/22/220 Seies_Serial Bus Lathe Operation Manual..............................22
1.1.1 Function Key and System configuration......................................................................................................22
1.1.1.1 Main Screen Sections ...................................................................................................................................22
1.1.1.2 CNC System Configuration ...........................................................................................................................23
1.1.1.3 Coordinate....................................................................................................................................................24
1.1.1.4 Program ........................................................................................................................................................26
1.1.1.5 Offset/Setting ...............................................................................................................................................40
1.1.1.6 Monitor ..........................................................................................................................................................48
1.1.1.7 Maintain.........................................................................................................................................................52
1.1.2 Series No Setting...........................................................................................................................................62
1.1.3 Use Time Setting ...........................................................................................................................................62
1.1.4 Option Setting ...............................................................................................................................................62
1.1.5 Op. Info Restore ............................................................................................................................................62
1.1.5.1 User Login......................................................................................................................................................62
1.1.5.2 User Logout ...................................................................................................................................................63
1.1.5.3 Forget Password ...........................................................................................................................................63
1.1.5.4 Authority Management.................................................................................................................................63
1.1.6 Change Password..........................................................................................................................................63
1.1.7 Set Authority of Default ................................................................................................................................63
1.1.8 Set Authority of Other Users.........................................................................................................................63
1.1.8.1 Reset Password .............................................................................................................................................64
1.1.8.2 About.............................................................................................................................................................64
1.1.9 Machine Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................64
1.1.9.1 Operation Panel ...........................................................................................................................................64
1.1.9.2 Keyboard Description ...................................................................................................................................67
1.1.10 How to Operate 21 Series Controller ...........................................................................................................69
1.1.10.1 System Status................................................................................................................................................69
1.1.10.2 Machine Preparation....................................................................................................................................70
1.1.10.3 Tool Preparation ...........................................................................................................................................72
1.1.10.4 Program Preparation and Execute Machining ............................................................................................80
1.1.10.5 Alarm Processing ..........................................................................................................................................83
1.1.11 Pending Alarm...............................................................................................................................................84
– 2
1.1.12 History Alarm.................................................................................................................................................84

1.1.12.1 Save Alarm.....................................................................................................................................................84
1.1.12.2 Network Setting ............................................................................................................................................85
1.1.12.3 PC Setting ......................................................................................................................................................87
1.1.12.4 File Transfer...................................................................................................................................................98
1.1.13 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................100
1.1.13.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................100
1.2 Lathe Operation Manual................................................................................................104
1.2.1 Lathe Controller Interface ..........................................................................................................................104
1.2.1.1 SNC System Configuration .........................................................................................................................104
1.2.1.2 Screen Sections...........................................................................................................................................106
1.2.1.3 Main Menu Selections ................................................................................................................................107
1.2.2 Machine Operation Panel ...........................................................................................................................130
1.2.2.1 2nd Machine Operation Panel....................................................................................................................130
1.2.3 How to Operate SYNTEC 900TE..................................................................................................................139
1.2.3.1 Manual Function (JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG).....................................................................................................139
1.2.3.2 HOME ...........................................................................................................................................................140
1.2.3.3 Open a File (EDIT / FLOPPY /RS232)...........................................................................................................141
1.2.3.4 Tool Setting .................................................................................................................................................141
1.2.3.5 Tool Length Measurement..........................................................................................................................142
1.2.3.6 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (G54…G59) ............................................................................145
1.2.3.7 Manual Data Input (MDI).............................................................................................................................145
1.2.3.8 Assigned an Executing NC File (AUTO).......................................................................................................146
1.2.3.9 Graphic Simulation .....................................................................................................................................147
1.2.3.10 How to Check NC File in SYNTEC Controller ..............................................................................................148
1.2.3.11 Dos Ftp Server .............................................................................................................................................154
1.2.3.12 Usage Description of Radial Cutting Facer Mechanism Selecting............................................................158
1.2.3.13 Bit Function Operations in PLC Parameters..............................................................................................159
1.2.4 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................160
1.2.4.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................160
1.3 Lathe Machine Program Manual ...................................................................................162
1.3.1 G Code Comparison Table ..........................................................................................................................162
1.3.2 Positioning (G00).........................................................................................................................................165
1.3.2.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................165
1.3.2.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................166
– 3
1.3.2.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................166

1.3.3 Linear Interpolation (G01) ..........................................................................................................................167
1.3.3.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................167
1.3.3.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................167
1.3.3.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................167
1.3.3.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................168
1.3.4 Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)................................................................................................................169
1.3.4.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................169
1.3.4.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................169
1.3.4.3 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................173
1.3.5 Dwell (G04) ..................................................................................................................................................174
1.3.5.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................175
1.3.5.2 Referenced Formula ...................................................................................................................................175
1.3.6 Cylinder Interpolation (G07.1)....................................................................................................................176
1.3.6.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................176
1.3.6.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................176
1.3.7 Exact Stop (G09) ..........................................................................................................................................178
1.3.7.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................178
1.3.7.2 Pic ................................................................................................................................................................178
1.3.8 Programmable Data Input (G10)................................................................................................................179
1.3.8.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................179
1.3.8.2 Imaginary tool nose setting........................................................................................................................179
1.3.9 Polar coordinates interpolation (G12.1/G13.1) .........................................................................................180
1.3.9.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................180
1.3.9.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................181
1.3.9.3 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................................182
1.3.10 Plane Selection (G17/G18/G19) ..................................................................................................................183
1.3.10.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................183
1.3.10.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................183
1.3.10.3 Pic ................................................................................................................................................................184
1.3.11 Outer(Internal) Diameter Cutting Cycle (G20) ...........................................................................................184
1.3.11.1 Linear cutting cycle.....................................................................................................................................185
1.3.11.2 Action description.......................................................................................................................................186
1.3.11.3 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................187
1.3.11.4 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................188
– 4
1.3.12 Thread Cutting Cycle (G21).........................................................................................................................189

1.3.12.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................189
1.3.12.2 PIC................................................................................................................................................................189
1.3.12.4 NOTE ............................................................................................................................................................191
1.3.12.5 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................192
1.3.12.6 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................193
1.3.13 End Face Turning Cycle (G24).....................................................................................................................195
1.3.13.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................195
1.3.13.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................195
1.3.13.3 PIC................................................................................................................................................................195
1.3.13.5 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................197
1.3.13.6 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................198
1.3.14 Reference point return (G28)......................................................................................................................199
1.3.14.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................199
1.3.14.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................199
1.3.14.3 PIC................................................................................................................................................................200
1.3.14.4 Additional remark .......................................................................................................................................200
1.3.15 Return from reference point (G29) .............................................................................................................200
1.3.15.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................200
1.3.15.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................201
1.3.16 Any reference point return (G30)................................................................................................................201
1.3.16.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................202
1.3.16.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................202
1.3.17 Skip Function (G31).....................................................................................................................................203
1.3.17.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................203
1.3.17.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................203
1.3.17.3 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................203
1.3.17.4 Example 3 ....................................................................................................................................................205
1.3.17.5 Additional Remark ......................................................................................................................................205
1.3.18 Thread cutting (G33) ...................................................................................................................................206
1.3.18.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................206
1.3.18.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................206
1.3.18.3 Pic ................................................................................................................................................................207
– 5
1.3.18.4 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................207
1.3.18.5 Note .............................................................................................................................................................208
1.3.18.6 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................210
1.3.18.7 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................212
1.3.19 Variable lead threading cutting (G34)........................................................................................................214
1.3.19.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................214
1.3.19.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................214
1.3.19.3 Pic ................................................................................................................................................................215
1.3.19.4 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................215
1.3.19.5 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................215
1.3.19.6 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................216
1.3.20 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42/G40) .....................................................................................216
1.3.20.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................216
1.3.20.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................217
1.3.20.3 Pic ................................................................................................................................................................217
1.3.20.4 Tool Radius (R) compensation ...................................................................................................................220
1.3.20.5 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................227
1.3.20.6 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................228
1.3.21 Polygon cutting (G51.2) ..............................................................................................................................229
1.3.21.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................229
1.3.21.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................229
1.3.21.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................230
1.3.21.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................232
1.3.21.5 Polygon machining PIC...............................................................................................................................233
1.3.21.6 Reference.....................................................................................................................................................235
1.3.22 Local Coordinate System Setting (G52) .....................................................................................................236
1.3.22.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................236
1.3.23 Machine Coordinate System (G53).............................................................................................................237
1.3.23.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................237
1.3.24 Workpiece Coordinate System (G54…G59.9)............................................................................................238
1.3.24.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................239
1.3.24.2 How to set G54……G59.9...........................................................................................................................239
1.3.24.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................240
1.3.25 Simple Marco Call (G65)..............................................................................................................................240
1.3.25.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................240
– 6
1.3.25.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................241

1.3.25.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................241
1.3.26 Modal Marco Mode (G66/G67) ....................................................................................................................241
1.3.26.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................241
1.3.26.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................241
1.3.27 English/Metric Unit Setting (G70/G71) .......................................................................................................242
1.3.28 Finishing Cycle (G72)...................................................................................................................................243
1.3.28.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................243
1.3.28.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................243
1.3.28.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................243
1.3.28.4 Example 1 ...................................................................................................................................................244
1.3.28.5 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................245
1.3.28.6 Example 3 ....................................................................................................................................................247
1.3.29 Stock Removal in Turning (G73).................................................................................................................248
1.3.29.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................249
1.3.29.2 PIC................................................................................................................................................................249
1.3.29.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................251
1.3.29.4 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................253
1.3.29.5 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................254
1.3.30 Stock Removal in Facing (G74)...................................................................................................................255
1.3.30.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................255
1.3.30.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................256
1.3.30.3 PIC................................................................................................................................................................256
1.3.30.5 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................259
1.3.30.6 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................260
1.3.30.7 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................262
1.3.31 Pattern Repeating Cycle (G75) ...................................................................................................................263
1.3.31.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................263
1.3.31.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................263
1.3.31.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................264
1.3.32 End Face (Z axis) Peck Drilling Cycle (G76) ................................................................................................265
1.3.32.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................266
1.3.32.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................266
– 7

1.3.32.4 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................267
1.3.32.5 Example .......................................................................................................................................................267
1.3.33 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle (G77) ............................................................................268
1.3.33.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................268
1.3.33.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................268
1.3.33.4 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................269
1.3.33.5 Example .......................................................................................................................................................270
1.3.34 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G78) ..........................................................................................................271
1.3.34.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................271
1.3.34.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................271
1.3.34.3 Ways of thread cutting................................................................................................................................272
1.3.34.5 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................273
1.3.34.6 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................273
1.3.34.7 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................274
1.3.35 Canned Cycle For Drilling (G80～G89) .......................................................................................................275
1.3.35.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................275
1.3.35.2 Drilling cycle figure .....................................................................................................................................276
1.3.36 Front/Side Drilling Cycle (G83/G87) ...........................................................................................................278
1.3.36.1 Note .............................................................................................................................................................279
1.3.36.2 PIC................................................................................................................................................................279
1.3.36.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................281
1.3.37 Front/Side Tapping Cycle (G84/G88)..........................................................................................................282
1.3.37.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................282
1.3.37.2 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................282
1.3.37.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................285
1.3.37.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................285
1.3.38 Front/Side Boring Cycle (G85/G89) ............................................................................................................286
1.3.38.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................286
1.3.38.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................286
1.3.38.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................287
1.3.38.4 PIC................................................................................................................................................................287
1.3.38.5 Example .......................................................................................................................................................287
– 8
1.3.39 Coordinate System Setting/Max. Spindle Speed Setting (G92)................................................................288

1.3.39.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................288
1.3.39.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................288
1.3.39.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................288
1.3.40 Unit Setting of Feed Amount (G94/G95) ....................................................................................................289
1.3.40.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................289
1.3.40.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................289
1.3.40.3 PIC................................................................................................................................................................289
1.3.41 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96/G97) ..............................................................................................290
1.3.41.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................290
1.3.41.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................290
1.3.42 Chamfer,Corner Round ,Angle Command .................................................................................................291
1.3.42.1 Chamfer .......................................................................................................................................................291
1.3.42.2 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................291
1.3.42.3 Description ..................................................................................................................................................291
1.3.42.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................292
1.3.42.5 Corner Round R( ,R_) ..................................................................................................................................293
1.3.42.6 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................293
1.3.42.7 Description ..................................................................................................................................................293
1.3.42.8 Example .......................................................................................................................................................293
1.3.42.9 Angle Command ( , A_)................................................................................................................................294
1.3.42.10 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................294
1.3.42.11 Example .......................................................................................................................................................294
1.3.42.12 Geometric Function Command..................................................................................................................294
1.3.42.13 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................294
1.3.42.14 Example .......................................................................................................................................................295
1.3.42.15 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................295
1.3.42.16 Relative usage .............................................................................................................................................295
1.3.42.17 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................297
1.3.42.18 Example .......................................................................................................................................................302
1.3.43 Tool Compensation Function (T Function)................................................................................................303
1.3.43.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................303
1.3.43.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................303
1.3.43.3 Principle of Tool Length Compensation ....................................................................................................304
1.3.43.4 Tool Nose Wear Compensation..................................................................................................................306
– 9
1.3.44 Spindle Rotate Speed Function : S code command..................................................................................307

1.3.44.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................307
1.3.44.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................307
1.3.44.3 Notes............................................................................................................................................................307
1.3.45 Feed Function: F code command...............................................................................................................307
1.3.45.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................307
1.3.45.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................307
1.3.45.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................308
1.3.46 Programmable Mirror Image (G68) ............................................................................................................308
1.3.46.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................308
1.3.46.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................308
1.3.46.3 Attention......................................................................................................................................................308
1.3.46.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................309
1.3.47 Decimal Point Input ....................................................................................................................................310
1.3.47.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................310
1.3.47.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................310
1.3.48 Spindle Synchronization ............................................................................................................................310
1.3.48.1 Description ..................................................................................................................................................310
1.3.48.2 NOTE ............................................................................................................................................................311
1.3.48.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................311
1.3.48.4 Reference.....................................................................................................................................................313
1.3.49 M Code Command Description...................................................................................................................313
1.3.49.1 Dwell (M00) ..................................................................................................................................................314
1.3.49.2 Optional dwell (M01)...................................................................................................................................314
1.3.49.3 End of program (M02) .................................................................................................................................314
1.3.49.4 Spindle rotates CW (M03) ...........................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.5 Spindle rotates CCW (M04) .........................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.6 Spindle stops (M05).....................................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.7 Tool exchange (M06) ...................................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.8 Cutting liquid ON/OFF (M08/M09) ..............................................................................................................315
1.3.49.9 Spindle locates and stops (M19) ................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.10 Program ends (M30)....................................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.11 Subprogram Control (M98/M99) ................................................................................................................315
1.3.49.12 Making and Executing of Subprogram.......................................................................................................316
1.3.50 Postscript ....................................................................................................................................................321
– 10
1.3.50.1 Description of lathe double program.........................................................................................................321

1.3.50.2 Description of Lathe graph assist G code ..................................................................................................324
1.3.50.3 Description of lathe parameter ..................................................................................................................331
1.4 200 Series Lathe Operation Manual ..............................................................................333
1.4.1 Lathe Controller Interface ..........................................................................................................................333
1.4.1.1 CNC System Configuration .........................................................................................................................333
1.4.1.2 Screen Sections...........................................................................................................................................334
1.4.1.3 Main Menu Selections ................................................................................................................................335
1.4.2.1 Operation Panel ..........................................................................................................................................354
1.4.3 How to Operate SYNTEC 200TB..................................................................................................................358
1.4.3.1 Manual Function (JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG).....................................................................................................358
1.4.3.2 HOME ...........................................................................................................................................................359
1.4.3.3 Open a File (Program / USB / Network) ....................................................................................................359
1.4.3.4 Tool Setting .................................................................................................................................................360
1.4.3.5 Tool Length Measurement..........................................................................................................................361
1.4.3.6 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (G54…G59) ............................................................................364
1.4.3.8 Assign an Executing NC File (AUTO) ...........................................................................................................365
1.4.3.10 To Check NC File on Controller...................................................................................................................367
1.4.3.11 Network Setting ..........................................................................................................................................369
1.4.4 Use of Multi-Path Interface.........................................................................................................................389
1.4.4.1 Summary .....................................................................................................................................................389
1.4.4.2 Screen Layout..............................................................................................................................................389
1.4.4.3 Main Screen .................................................................................................................................................390
1.4.5 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................398
1.4.5.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................398
2 EndUser_Mill ............................................................................................. 399

2.1 6D/6D-H/21/21-H/22/220 Seies_Serial Bus Mill Operation Manual.............................399
2.1.1 Function Key and System Configuration ...................................................................................................399
2.1.1.1 Main Screen Sections..................................................................................................................................399
2.1.1.3 Coordinate...................................................................................................................................................401
2.1.1.4 Program.......................................................................................................................................................403
– 11
2.1.1.5 Offset/Setting ..............................................................................................................................................418

2.1.1.6 Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................425
2.1.1.7 Maintain.......................................................................................................................................................429
2.1.2.1 Operation Panel ..........................................................................................................................................438
2.1.2.2 Keyboard Description .................................................................................................................................442
2.1.3 How to Operate 21 Series Controller .........................................................................................................444
2.1.3.1 System Status..............................................................................................................................................444
2.1.3.2 Machine Preparation ..................................................................................................................................445
2.1.3.3 Workpiece Preparation...............................................................................................................................448
2.1.3.4 Program Preparation and Execute Machining ..........................................................................................460
2.1.3.5 File Transfer.................................................................................................................................................481
2.1.4 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................482
2.1.4.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................482
2.2 Mill Operation Manual ...................................................................................................486
2.2.1 CNC Milling Controller Interface.................................................................................................................486
2.2.1.2 Screen Sections ..........................................................................................................................................487
2.2.1.3 Main Menu Selections .................................................................................................................................488
2.2.2 Machine operation panel............................................................................................................................520
2.2.2.1 2nd machine operation panel ....................................................................................................................520
2.2.2.2 Text key description:...................................................................................................................................524
2.2.3 How to operate SYNTEC 900ME..................................................................................................................526
2.2.3.1 Manual function (JOG, INC_JOG, MPG) .....................................................................................................526
2.2.3.2 HOME ...........................................................................................................................................................527
2.2.3.3 New/ Import /out port Files........................................................................................................................528
2.2.3.4 Tool setting (G40/G41/G42, G43/G44/G49) ................................................................................................530
2.2.3.5 Tool Length measurement (G43/G44/G49)................................................................................................530
2.2.3.6 Setting the Work piece origin offset value (G54...G59)..............................................................................531
2.2.3.8 Assigned an executing NC file (AUTO)........................................................................................................532
2.2.3.10 How to check NC file in SYNTEC controller................................................................................................534
2.2.3.11 Auto Center..................................................................................................................................................535
2.2.3.12 Z-axis Auto Tool...........................................................................................................................................538
– 12
2.2.3.13 Broken tool Return Function......................................................................................................................548

2.2.3.14 Bit Function Operations in PLC Paremeters..............................................................................................550
2.2.4 Dos System ..................................................................................................................................................555
2.2.4.1 F8：About....................................................................................................................................................555
2.2.4.2 RS232 Import/Export ..................................................................................................................................555
2.2.4.3 RS232 FUNCTION ........................................................................................................................................558
2.2.4.4 Dos Ftp Server .............................................................................................................................................565
2.3 CAD/CAM Operating Manual..........................................................................................571
2.3.1 CAD/CAM Panel Operation instructions.....................................................................................................573
2.3.2 Controller Operation Panel (CNC Monitor)................................................................................................573
2.3.2.1 CAD/CAM Function tree diagram ...............................................................................................................574
2.3.2.2 CAD/CAM Home Screen ..............................................................................................................................574
2.3.2.3 CAD/CAM Function panel ...........................................................................................................................575
2.3.3 CAD Edit function operation description ..................................................................................................583
2.3.3.1 Teach Mode ................................................................................................................................................583
2.3.3.2 Delete graphic function ..............................................................................................................................604
2.3.3.3 Edit graphic function ..................................................................................................................................605
2.3.3.4 Processing program setup .........................................................................................................................606
2.3.3.5 Process program storage location .............................................................................................................608
2.3.4 CAD/CAM application description .............................................................................................................608
2.3.4.1 CAD/CAM MACRO Post-processing description.........................................................................................608
2.3.4.2 CAD/CAM Post-processing application parameter description................................................................609
2.3.4.3 CAD/CAM Post processing parameters XML setup ....................................................................................614
2.3.4.4 CAD/CAM Post processing MACRO Example..............................................................................................617
2.4 Mill Machine Program Manual.......................................................................................621
2.4.1 Cycle perform function: ..............................................................................................................................621
2.4.1.1 Fixed cycle address and meaning: .............................................................................................................622
2.4.1.2 G17, G18, and G19 can set axis of drilling, list as below:...........................................................................622
2.4.2 G00: POSITIONING ......................................................................................................................................623
2.4.2.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................623
2.4.2.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................623
2.4.2.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................624
2.4.2.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................624
2.4.3 G01 LINEAR INTERPOLATION .....................................................................................................................624
2.4.3.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................624
– 13
2.4.3.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................625

2.4.3.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................625
2.4.3.4 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................625
2.4.3.5 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................626
2.4.4 G02/G03: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION........................................................................................................627
2.4.4.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................627
2.4.4.2 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................628
2.4.4.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................629
2.4.5 G02/G03: HELICAL INTERPOLATION...........................................................................................................630
2.4.5.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................630
2.4.5.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................631
2.4.5.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................631
2.4.5.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................631
2.4.6 G04: Dwell....................................................................................................................................................632
2.4.6.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................632
2.4.6.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................632
2.4.6.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................633
2.4.7 G05: High Speed & High Precision Interpolation.......................................................................................633
2.4.7.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................633
2.4.7.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................633
2.4.7.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................634
2.4.7.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................634
2.4.8 G05.1 Path Smoothing ................................................................................................................................635
2.4.8.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................635
2.4.8.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................635
2.4.8.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................635
2.4.9 G06.2 NURBS Curve Interpolation..............................................................................................................638
2.4.9.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................638
2.4.9.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................638
2.4.9.3 Condition.....................................................................................................................................................639
2.4.9.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................639
2.4.10 G09/G61: EXACT STOP ................................................................................................................................640
2.4.10.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................640
2.4.10.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................640
2.4.10.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................640
– 14
2.4.10.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................640

2.4.11 G10: PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT ...........................................................................................................641
2.4.11.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................641
2.4.11.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................641
2.4.11.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................642
2.4.12 G15/G16 POLAR COORDICATES COMMAND MODE....................................................................................642
2.4.12.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................642
2.4.12.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................643
2.4.12.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................643
2.4.12.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................643
2.4.13 G17/G18/G19: PLANE SELECTION ..............................................................................................................645
2.4.13.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................645
2.4.13.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................645
2.4.13.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................645
2.4.14 G28: RETURN TO REFERENCE POSITION ...................................................................................................646
2.4.14.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................646
2.4.14.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................646
2.4.15 G29: RETURN FROM REFERENCE POSITION ..............................................................................................647
2.4.15.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................647
2.4.15.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................647
2.4.16 G30: 2nd, 3rd and 4th REFERENCE POSTION RETURN..............................................................................648
2.4.16.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................648
2.4.16.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................649
2.4.16.3 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................649
2.4.16.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................649
2.4.17 G31: SKIP FUNCTION...................................................................................................................................650
2.4.17.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................650
2.4.17.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................650
2.4.17.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................650
2.4.18 G33: THREAD INTERPOLATION...................................................................................................................652
2.4.18.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................652
2.4.18.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................652
2.4.18.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................653
2.4.18.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................653
2.4.19 G37: AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT - I .................................................................................653
– 15
2.4.19.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................653

2.4.19.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................654
2.4.19.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................654
2.4.20 G37.1: AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT - II .............................................................................655
2.4.20.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................655
2.4.20.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................656
2.4.20.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................656
2.4.21 G40/G41/G42: CUTTER COMPENSTAION ...................................................................................................657
2.4.21.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................657
2.4.21.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................657
2.4.21.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................658
2.4.21.4 Note .............................................................................................................................................................661
2.4.22 G43/G44/G49: TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION.........................................................................................664
2.4.22.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................664
2.4.22.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................664
2.4.22.3 Compensation Value Setting .....................................................................................................................664
2.4.22.4 Notice...........................................................................................................................................................665
2.4.23 G51/G50: SCALING.......................................................................................................................................667
2.4.23.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................667
2.4.23.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................667
2.4.23.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................667
2.4.24 G51.1/G50.1: PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE.........................................................................................668
2.4.24.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................668
2.4.24.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................669
2.4.24.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................669
2.4.24.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................669
2.4.25 G52: LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM.............................................................................................................672
2.4.25.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................672
2.4.25.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................672
2.4.25.3 Coordinate System :....................................................................................................................................672
2.4.25.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................672
2.4.26 G53: MACHINE COORDICATE SYSTEM SELECTION ....................................................................................674
2.4.26.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................674
2.4.26.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................674
2.4.26.3 Note .............................................................................................................................................................674
– 16
2.4.26.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................675

2.4.27 G54...G59.9: WORKPIECE COORDICATE SELECTION .................................................................................675
2.4.27.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................675
2.4.27.2 Description: .................................................................................................................................................676
2.4.27.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................676
2.4.28 G64: CUTTING MODE ...................................................................................................................................677
2.4.28.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................677
2.4.28.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................677
2.4.29 G65: SIMPLE CALL........................................................................................................................................678
2.4.29.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................678
2.4.29.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................678
2.4.30 G66/G67: MACRO CALL................................................................................................................................678
2.4.30.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................678
2.4.30.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................678
2.4.31 G68/G69: COORDINATE ROTATION ............................................................................................................679
2.4.31.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................679
2.4.31.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................679
2.4.31.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................679
2.4.32 G70/G71: UNIT SETTING OF INCH/METRIC SYSTEM ..................................................................................682
2.4.32.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................682
2.4.32.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................682
2.4.33 G73: HIGH SPEED PECK DRILL CYCLE.........................................................................................................683
2.4.33.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................683
2.4.33.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................684
2.4.33.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................685
2.4.34 G74: LEFT HAND TAPPING CYCLE ...............................................................................................................685
2.4.34.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................685
2.4.34.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................686
2.4.34.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................687
2.4.35 G76: FINE BORING CYCLE............................................................................................................................687
2.4.35.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................687
2.4.35.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................688
2.4.35.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................689
2.4.36 G81: DRILLING CYCLE ..................................................................................................................................690
2.4.36.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................690
– 17
2.4.36.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................691

2.4.36.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................691
2.4.37 G82: DRILLING CYCLE OF DWELL ON THE HOLE BOTTOM ........................................................................691
2.4.37.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................691
2.4.37.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................692
2.4.37.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................693
2.4.38 G83: PECK DRILL CYCLE ..............................................................................................................................693
2.4.38.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................693
2.4.38.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................694
2.4.38.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................695
2.4.39 G84: TAPPING DRILLING CYCLE ..................................................................................................................695
2.4.39.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................695
2.4.39.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................698
2.4.40 G85: DRILLING CYCLE ..................................................................................................................................698
2.4.40.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................698
2.4.40.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................699
2.4.40.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................700
2.4.41 G86: HIGH SPEED DRILLING CYCLE ............................................................................................................700
2.4.41.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................700
2.4.41.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................701
2.4.41.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................701
2.4.42 G87: FINE BORING CYCLE OF BACK SIDE....................................................................................................702
2.4.42.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................702
2.4.42.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................703
2.4.42.3 ※Alarm:.......................................................................................................................................................703
2.4.42.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................704
2.4.43 G88: FINE BORING CYCLE OF HALF AUTOMATION.....................................................................................705
2.4.43.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................705
2.4.43.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................705
2.4.43.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................706
2.4.44 G89: BORING CYCLE OF DWELL ON THE HOLE BOTTOM...........................................................................707
2.4.44.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................707
2.4.44.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................707
2.4.44.3 Notes:...........................................................................................................................................................708
2.4.44.4 Condition:....................................................................................................................................................708
– 18
2.4.44.5 Example .......................................................................................................................................................708

2.4.45 G90/G91: ABSOLUTE/INCREMENT COMMEND...........................................................................................708
2.4.45.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................708
2.4.45.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................709
2.4.46 G92: SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM ........................................................................................709
2.4.46.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................709
2.4.46.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................709
2.4.47 G94/G95: FEED UNIT SETTING ....................................................................................................................710
2.4.47.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................710
2.4.47.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................710
2.4.48 G96/G97: CONSTANT LINEAR VELOCITY CONTROL ON SURFACE ............................................................711
2.4.48.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................711
2.4.48.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................711
2.4.48.3 Example 1 ....................................................................................................................................................711
2.4.48.4 Example 2 ....................................................................................................................................................712
2.4.49 G134: CIRCUMFERENCE HOLE CYCLE.........................................................................................................712
2.4.49.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................712
2.4.49.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................712
2.4.49.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................712
2.4.50 G135: ANGULAR STRAIGHT HOLE CYCLE ...................................................................................................713
2.4.50.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................713
2.4.50.2 Example .......................................................................................................................................................713
2.4.51 G136: ARC TYPE HOLE CYCLE......................................................................................................................714
2.4.51.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................714
2.4.51.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................714
2.4.51.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................714
2.4.52 G137.1: CHESS TYPE HOLE CYCLE ..............................................................................................................715
2.4.52.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................715
2.4.52.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................715
2.4.52.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................716
2.5 6 Series Mill Operation Manual......................................................................................717
2.5.1.3 Coordinate...................................................................................................................................................718
– 19
2.5.1.4 Program.......................................................................................................................................................721
2.5.1.5 Offset/Setting ..............................................................................................................................................734
2.5.1.6 Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................741
2.5.1.7 Maintain.......................................................................................................................................................745
2.5.2.1 Operation Panel ..........................................................................................................................................754
2.5.2.2 Text Key Description ...................................................................................................................................755
2.5.3 How to Operate 6 Series Controller ...........................................................................................................755
2.5.3.1 System Status..............................................................................................................................................755
2.5.3.3 Workpiece Preparation ..............................................................................................................................756
2.5.3.5 File Transfer.................................................................................................................................................762
2.5.4 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................762
2.5.4.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................762
2.6 11 Series Mill Operation Manual....................................................................................766
2.6.1.3 Coordinate...................................................................................................................................................768
2.6.1.4 Program.......................................................................................................................................................770
2.6.1.5 Offset/Setting ..............................................................................................................................................784
2.6.1.6 Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................791
2.6.1.7 Maintain.......................................................................................................................................................795
2.6.2.1 Operation Panel ..........................................................................................................................................804
2.6.2.2 Text Key Description ..................................................................................................................................805
2.6.3.1 System Status..............................................................................................................................................805
2.6.3.5 File Transfer.................................................................................................................................................807
2.6.4 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................807
2.6.4.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................807
– 20
3 EndUser_Wood.......................................................................................... 808
3.1 60 Wood Series Operation Manual................................................................................808
3.1.1.3 Coordinate...................................................................................................................................................810
3.1.1.4 Program.......................................................................................................................................................812
3.1.1.5 Offset/Setting ..............................................................................................................................................827
3.1.1.6 Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................834
3.1.1.7 Maintain.......................................................................................................................................................838
3.1.2.1 Operation Panel ..........................................................................................................................................847
3.1.2.2 Text Key Description ...................................................................................................................................851
3.1.3.1 System Status..............................................................................................................................................853
3.1.3.5 File Transfer.................................................................................................................................................891
3.1.4 Appendix......................................................................................................................................................892
3.1.4.1 Contact Window..........................................................................................................................................892
– 21
1 EndUser_Lathe
1.1 6D-H/7/21/21-H/22/220 Seies_Serial Bus Lathe Operation Manual
1.1.1 Function Key and System configuration
1.1.1.1 Main Screen Sections
• Meanings for Sections on the Display:

1. Present coordinate system
2. Working file name and machining command line
3. Title of interface
4. Date
5. Time
6. Data input
7. Display(Hint)
8. Status
9. Mode
10. Alarm
11. Function Key Switch
EndUser_Lathe – 22
1.1.1.2 CNC System Configuration

5 buttons
8
buttons
1.1.1.3 Coordinate
• Path
• F1 Coordinate
• Function
• Switch current coordinate system on the screen.
• Display the frequently use machining information.
• Use the group function key【POS】, can switch to the current page quickly.
Explanation of Function
Coordinate Display
• Current screen can display 4 kind of coordinate system.
• Whenever users press F1「Switch Coordinate」function key, the coordinate on the screen will switch between
four different kinds of coordinates.
F(Feedrate)
• User defines Feedrate (mm/min).
• Actual Feedrate of cutting tool (mm/min).
• Percentages of Feedrate that user define.
S (Rotating Speed of Spindle )

• User defines Spindle speed (RPM).
• Actual speed of spindle (mm/min).
• Percentages of Spindle speed that user define.
Run Time
• Timer for the execution of program.
Part counter
• Number of parts that had been finished.
T(Tool No.)
• Current Tool no. and Tool compensation no.
Switch Coordinate
• path
• F1 Coordinate→F1 switch coordinate
• Function
• Whenever users press F1「Switch Coordinate」function key, the coordinate display on the screen will
switch between four different kinds of coordinates.
Half Coordinate
• Path
• F1 Coordinate→F2 Half Coordinate
• Function
• Relative coordinate devided by 2.
• Co-operate with 「Clear Rel. Coord.」function , this function can quickly calculate the middle point of
the object.
• Operation Method
• Enter the axis that you want to calculate and then press「Half Coordinate」.
• Example
• Current Rel.Coord.of X axis is 10.000.
• Enter 「X」,and then press 「half coordinate」.
• Current Rel. Coord. of X axis Will become 5.000.
Zero Rel. Coord.

• path
• F1 Coordinate→F3 Clear Rel. Coord.
• Function
• Set the Relative Coordinate to zero.
• Enter the axis that you want to calculate and then press 「Clear Rel. Coord.」
• Example
• Enter 「X」,and then press 「Clear Rel. Coord.」.
Zero All Rel. Coord.

• path
• F1 Coordinate→F4 Clear All Rel. Coord.
• Function
• Clear all Relative Coordinate.
• Example
• Current X axis of relative coordinate is 10.000, Y axis is 5.000.
• Press「Clear All Rel. Coord.」function key.

• Relative Coordinate of X and Y will become 0.000.
1.1.1.4 Program
• Path
• F2 Program
• Function
• This function provides users program management and editing functions.
• Users can use【↑】【↓】【←】【→】key to move the cursor to anywhere on the screen for editing purpose.
• Press【Page Up】【Page Down】to switch the pages.
• With【Home】【End】can let the cursor switch between the top and end of the line.
• With the group function key【Prog/File】can quickly switch between「Program」and「File Manager」.
Execute
• Path
• F2 Program→F1 Execute
• Function
• This function can assign the current editing program as the executive program and also change the
minitor to the 「Monitor」 page.
• Note
• This function will be disable when machining.
Delete Line
• Path
• F2 Program→F2 Delete Line

• Function
• Delete a line where the cursor is located.
Search/Replace
• Path
• F2 Program→F3 Search/Replace
• Function
• This function can help to find and replace the string within the editing program.
• Press「Search/Replace」function key, a dialog box will appear to ask users input a string that need to
find and replace for.
• With【ENTER】 key, can change the cursor location between「Search」and 「Replace」.
Find Next
• Path
• F2 Program→F3 Search/Replace→F1 Find Next
• Function
• According to the「Search String」, find the next same string within the current editing program.
• Cursor will move the next same string and the string will be highlight.
Replace
• Path
• F2 Program→F3 Search/Replace→F2 Replace
• Function
• According to the「Search String」, find the next same string within the current editing program and
replace with the「Replace String」
• If there's no highlight string on the screen, press「Find Next」.
• Press F2「Replace」will replace the current highlight string with new string and also cursor will go to
the next same「Search String」.
• If you want to skip the current highlight string, press F1「Find Next」.
Replace All
• Path
• F2 Program→F3 Search/Replace→F3 Replace All
• Function
• Replace all of the string defined in「Search String」by new string and move the cursor to the line of last
string.
Modify Setting
• Path
• F2 Program→F3 Search/Replace→F4 Modify Setting
• Function
• Reset the 「Search/Replace」 string.
• After executing 「Find Next」/ 「Replace」/「Replace All」, Cursor will be switched to the program edit
screen.
• Press F4「Modify Setting」to reset the「Search/Replace」string.
File Manager
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager
• Function
• This function key can manage all of the NC files in data storage device set by Pr3213.
• Use【↑】【↓】key to move the cursor to anywhere on the screen for editing purpose.
• 【Page Up】【Page Down】to switch the cursor between pages.
• Press【ENTER】 key to assign the current cursor file as the executed file, screen will display the
program content and user can edit the program.
New File
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F1 New File
• Function
• Open a new file, and that file will be set as the current edit file.
• Press 「New File」function key, a dialog box will appear, enter the new file name and press 【ENTER】.
• Note
• Default format of file name does not have file extension. *.NC is valid file extension incase user wants
to creat new file with file extension.
• The file name cannot be longer than 32 characters(including file extension)
Copy File
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F2 Copy File
• Function
• Copy the file that remarked by cursor.
• Use【↑】【↓】to move the cursor to the file wants to copy.
• Press「Copy File」key.
• A dialog box will appear, enter the new file name.
• Note
• Default format of file name does not have file extension. *.NC is valid file extension incase user wants
to creat new file with file extension.
• The file name cannot be longer than 32 characters(including file extension)
Delete File
• Path
• 5 Buttons type:F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F3 Delete File
• Function
• Delete the file remarked by cursor.
• Press F3「Delete File」, selection box will be shown in front of the NC file within the「File Manager」
minitor page. Use【↑】【↓】to select the delete file.
• Sub-function Key
• Select: Select file, can select more than one file and also can cancel the selection of one file.
• Select All: Select all file.

• Cancel Select: Cancel all of the selected files.
• Delete File: Delete all of the selected files.
• Delete All: Delete all file within data storage device.
• Note
• Current Programming and machining file cannot be deleted.
File Transfer
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F4 File Transfer
• 8 Buttons type: F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F4 File Transfer
• Function
• Transmit data between controller and external storage device.
File Import
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F4 File Transfer→F1 File Import
• Function
• Import external file into controller
• Screen Explanation
• The upper block is the external devices with the following choices.
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
• Left column are data storaged in the external device.
• Right column are current data storaged in the controller.
• Sub-function Explanation
• Copy: Copy the remarked file from the external device to the controller.
• Device Change: Change external device.
• Press F1「File Import」, a dialog box will appear.
• Default external device is USBDisk.
• Press F5「Device Change」 to switch between external devices, switch the cursor to the desire device
and press【Enter】, then the left column data structure will change, according to the selected device .
• Use【↑】【↓】to select file.
• Move the cursor to the import file and press F2「Select」or【Space】to remark file.
• After remarked all of the import file, press F1「Copy」then all of the remarked file will import into
controller.
File Export
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F4 File Transfer→F2 File Export
• Function
• Export file in controller to external device.
• Function Page Explanation
• The upper block is the external devices with the following choice.
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
• Left column are data storage from controller.
• Right column are current data storage in external device.
• Copy: Copy the remarked file from the external device to the controller.
• Device Change: Change external device.
• Press「File Export」, a dialog box will appear.
• Default external device is USBDisk.
• Press F5「Device Change」, to switch between external devices, move the cursor to the desire device
and press【Enter】, then the below left column data structure will change, according to the selected
device .
• Move the cursor to the export file and press F2「Select」or【Space】to remark file.
• After remarked all of the export file, press F1「Copy」 then all of the remarked file will export from
controller to external device.
Execute
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F5 Execute
• Function
• This function can assign the current cursor located program as the executive program and also
change the screen to the 「monitor」 page.
• Use【↑】【↓】to select file, and then press「Execute」the selected file excuted.
• The screen will change to the 「monitor」 page.
• Note
• This function will be disable when machining.
Simulation
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→F5 Simulation
• 8 buttons type: F2 Program→F7Simulation
• Function
• This function can simulate and predict machining path for machining program.
• Debug ability.
• Default display range is the largest limit dimension defined by machining program.
• Relative simulate function can be modified by「simulate Setting」.
Step
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F1 Step
• Function
• Simulate the each single block of machining program.
• Minitor the coordinate change after single block is executed.
Continue
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F2 Continue
• Function
• Kernel will scan all of the program and then do the simulation.
Zoom
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F3 Zoom
• Function
• Zoom out/in the simulation result
• Press F3「Zoom」,there will be a block shown up. Using【↑】【↓】【←】【→】can move the block to up, down,
left and right.
• Use【Page Up】【Page Down】to zoom in/out the area within the block.
• After the area is selected, press【ENTER】to check the result.
Graph Reset
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F4 Graph Reset
• Function
• According the program reset the simulation result to the normal condition.
Simu. Setting
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F5 Simu. Setting
• Function
• Setting the relative simulation item.
• Simulation parameter
1. Color
• Provide 0~15 selections, total 16 different kind of color.
2. Path Color
• Simulation cutting path color.
3. Cursor Color
• Color of cursor point
4. RGB Value
• Except the provided 16 different kind of color, user can define the color by theirself.
5. Draw Mode
• User can define the profile simulate plane.
• Plane can be defined as below.
• XYZ • YX
• XY • ZY
• YZ • XZ
• ZX
6. Setting quadrant
• User can define the profile simulate plane is on which quadrant.
• Quadrant can define are as below.
• First
• Second
• Thrid
• Fourth
7. Simulate Mode
• Setting profile simulate method.
• Simulation
• When user change to the 『Monitor』page, simulation will be displayed automatically.
• Controller will simulate machining program after completing scan program. User does
not need to define the simulate boundary.
• Direct Draw
• When user change to the 『Monitor』page, cursor will show up but simulation will not
execute automatically.
• User need to define the simulation scope first.
• When the machining is started, cursor will simulate machining path according to single
block.
• Not Simulation
• Close the simulation function.
8. View Angle Setting
• Under XYZ draw mode, by setting this parameter, simulation will become 3D simulation.
• View angle can define are as below.
• Vertical
• Horizontal
9. Scope
• Scope can define are as below.
• Minimum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
• Maximum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
Can Cycle
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F1 Can Cycle
• 8 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4Can Cycle
• Function
• Because Syntec system provides many kind of G code with different function. When editing the
program, this function can help user easy to edit G code.
Insert Cycle
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F1 Can Cycle→F1 Insert Cycle
• 8 buttons type: F2 Program→F4 Can Cycle→F1 Insert Cycle
• Move the cursor to the insert location and press 「Insert Cycle」, follow the instruction and insert the
required parameters .
• Press 「OK」, the desire G code will insert into the next line of the current cursor.
Edit Cycle
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F1 Can Cycle→F2 Edit Cycle
• 8 buttons type: F2 Program→F4 Can Cycle→F2 Edit Cycle
• Function
• Edit the cycle at current cursor.
• Move the cursor to the intend modify location, press 「Edit Cycle」,a modify page will show up. Modify
the content and press「OK」, the content of the current cursor will change.
Block Copy
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy
• 8 Buttons type: F2 program→F5 Block Copy
• Function
• Provide copy, cut, paste for more than one single block
Start Line
• Path
• 5 Buttons: F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F1 Start Line
• 8 Buttons: F2 Program→F5Block Copy→F1 Start Line
• Function
• Select the beginning block.
End Line
• Path
• 5 Buttons: F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F2 End Line
• 8 Buttons: F2 Program→F5Block Copy→F2 End Line
• Function
• Select the finishing block.
Block Cut
• Path
• 5 Buttons: F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F3 Block Cut
• 8 Buttons: F2 Program→F5Block Copy→F3 Block Cut
• Function
• Cut the block that had been selected.
Block Copy
• Path
• 5 Buttons: F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F4 Block Copy
• 8 Buttons: F2 Program→F5Block Copy→F4 Block Copy
• Function
• Copy the block that had been selected.
Block Paste
• Path
• 5 Buttons: F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F5 Block Paste
• 8 Buttons: F2 Program→F5Block Copy→ F5 Block Paste
• Function
• Paste the block that had been 「Block Cut」and「Block Copy」.
• Move the cursor to the desire block and press「Start Line, function key「End Line」will be enable.
• Use the key on panel【↑】【↓】【Page Up】【Page Down】 to select the block, the block selected will be
highlight.
• Confirm the block that had been selected and press「End Line」.
→Function key 「End Line」disable.
→Function key 「Block Copy」enable.
→Function key 「Block Cut」enable.
→If 「Block Cut」being use, the whole block that had been highlight will be cut off.
→Function key 「Block Copy」/「Block Cut」disable.
→Function key 「Block Paste」enable.
• Move the cursor to the desire location and press 「Block Paste」, the content that had been cut or copy
will paste at the cursor location.
• If 「Block Copy」is used, the selected blocks will not be disappeared.
• Note
• If 「Block Cut」is used, however if 「Block Paste」 is not executed, the selected blocks will be
disappeared.
• 「Block Cut」can paste only one time and 「Block Copy」 can paste many time.
Teach
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach
• 8 Buttons type: F2 Program→F6 Teach
• Function
• Use function 『MPG』/『JOG』/『INJOG』, move the machine to destination and use 『Teach』function, to
teach the current absolute coordinate value to the NC program.
• Omit the manual input problem.
Rapid Teach
• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F1 Rapid Teach
• 8 Buttons type: F2 Program→F6 Teach→F1 Rapid Teach
• Function
• Add the current absolute coordinate as the value of 「G00 Rapid Traverse」function in current
program.
Line Cut Teach

• Path
• 5 Buttons type:F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F2 Line Cut Teach
• 8 Buttons type:F2 Program→Next→F6Teach→F2 Line Cut Teach
• Function
• Add the current absolute coordinate as the value of 「G01 Linear Cutting」function in current program.
Arc Cut Teach

• Path
• 5buttons key: F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F3 Arc Cut Teach
• 8 buttons key: F2 Program→F6 Teach→F3 Arc Cut Teach
• Function
• Add the current absolute coordinate as the machining value of 「G02/G03 Circular Cutting」function in
current program.
• Move the machine table to the arc center and press 「Arc Cut Teach」, current absolute coordinate will
be defined as the arc center.
• Move the machine table to the ending of the arc and press「Arc Cut Teach」, current absolute
coordinate will be defined as the ending of the arc. Controller will automatically calculate the
relation between middle and end point and determine whether to use G02 or G03. The calculation
result will be added in current cursor location of program.
Cancel Arc Middle

• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F4 Cancel Arc Middle
• 8 Buttons type: F2 Program→F6 Teach→F4 Cancel Arc Middle
• Function
• Clear the arc middle point that had been set.
• If the arc middle were not set, this function will be disable.
Point Teach
• Path
• 5 buttons type: F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F5 Point Teach
• 8 buttons type: F2 Program→F6 Teach→F5 Point Teach
• Function
• Move the worktable to the arc center and press 「Point Teach」, current absolute coordinate will be
added in current cursor location of program.
1.1.1.5 Offset/Setting
• Path
• F3 Offset/Setting
• Function
• Under this function group, user can do the offset/Setting.
• Use the group function key 【Offset/Setting】can switch to the current page quickly.
Tool Wear Set
• Path
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Tool Wear Set
• Function
• Set the wear of tool.
• Actual tool length=Tool length+Tool wear
• Function of parameter
• Wear: Tiny modification of tool length.
• Note
• When the tool length had been set, related tool wear will become zero.
• If the tool wear is set under the machining condition, new tool wear setting will be effective in next
compensation time.
Tool Length Set
• Path
• F3 Offset/Setting→F2 Tool Length Set
• Function
• Set the length of tool.
• Actual tool length=Tool length+Tool wear
• Tool length: G43/G44 tool length compensation setting.
• Note
• Setting is prohibited in machining condition.
Tool Nose Set
• Path
• F3 Offset/Setting→F3 Tool Nose Set
• Function
• Set the top position of Tool .
• Real Tool Nose= Tool Nose Radius+Tool Nose Radius wear
• Tool Nose Radius: G41/G42 Tool Nose Radius compensation (not diameter).
• Tool Nose Radius Wear : G41/G42 Tiny modification of Tool Nose Radius.
• Tool Nose direction: Set the machining direction of Tool Nose.
• Syntec provide total 8 different kind of Tool Nose direction option, see 《Syntec Lathe Programming
Manual—G41/G42》。
• Note
• Setting is prohibited in machining condition.
User Parameter Setting
• Path
• F3 Offset/Setting→F4 User Parameter Setting
• Function
• Syntec controller provided user to set the related machining parameter.
• Detail explanation can be seen in 「Lathe Parameter Manual」.
Working Shift
• Path
• F3 Offset/Setting→F5 Working Shift
• Function
• Set G92 coordinate offset.
• Absolute Input
• Enter 【X】/【Z】and then Enter value, press 【ENTER】.
• Increment Input
• Move the cursor to the coordinate that want to setting.
• Enter value and press 【ENTER】.
Work Piece Cord.
• Path
• 5 Buttons key: F3 Offset/Setting→Next→F1 Work Piece Cord.
• 8 Buttons key: F3 Offset/Setting→F6Work Piece Cord.
• Function
• This function key switch the screen to the 『Work Piece Cord』setting page.
• If user do not define the coordinate system as G54~G59.10, the default system is G54.
• 『External Shift』: All setting of 『External Shift』will be effective in G54~G59.10.
• Use the key on panel【↑】【↓】to move the cursor.
• Use【Page Up】【Page Down】to switch page.
• Note
• After Setting 『Work Piece Cord』, Tool Length compensation need to re-setting again.
Mach. Coord. Teach

• Path
• 5 Buttons type: F3 Offset/Setting→Next→F1 Work Piece Cord.→F1Mach. Coord. teach
• 8 Buttons type: F3 Offset/Setting→F6 Work Piece Cord.→F1 Mach. Coord. teach
• Function
• By the absolute input method, set the current cursor located work piece coordinate value as the
mechanical coordinate value.
• Move the worktable to the destination.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate and press 「Mach. Coord. teach」
• Current cursor located work piece coordinate will be replaced by the mechanical coordinate.
• Example
• Current mechanical coordinate of X axis is 5.000
• Current workpiece coordinate G54 of X axis is 0.000
• Move the cursor to G54 X axis.
• Press 「Mach. Coord. teach」,the coordinate of G54 X axis become 5.000
Mach. Coord. Inc. Teach

• Path
• 5 buttons type:F3 Offset/Setting→Next→F1 Work Piece Cord.→F2 Mach. Coord Inc. Teach
• 8 buttons type:F3 Offset/Setting→F6Work Piece Cord.→F2 Mach. Coord Inc. Teach
• Function
• Current cursor located work piece coordinate will be replaced by the 「Mechanical coordinate 」plus
「Mach. Coord Inc. Teach」 value.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate, key in teach value. And then press 「Mach. Coord
Inc. Teach」
• Current cursor located work piece coordinate will be replaced by the mechanical coordinate plus
Increment value.
• Example
• Current workpiece coordinate G54 of X axis is 0.000
• Key in 10.
• Press 「Mach. Coord Inc. Teach」,the coordinate of G54 X axis become 15.000
Inc. Input
• path
• 5 buttons type: F3 Offset/Setting→Next→F1 Work Piece Cord.→F3 Inc. Input
• 8 buttons type: F3 Offset/Setting→F6 Work Piece Cord.→F3 Inc. Input
• Function
• Current cursor located work piece coordinate will be replaced by current cursor value plus teach
value.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate, key in teach value. And then press 「Inc. Input 」
function key.
• Current cursor located work piece coordinate will be replaced by the current coordinate value plus
teach value.
• Example
• Current G54 X axis value is 5.000
• Key in 10.
• Press 「Inc. Input 」function key ,the coordinate of G54 X axis become 15.000
1.1.1.6 Monitor
• Path:
• F4 Monitor
• Description
• This function key provides all necessary required information in machining process.
• Menu description
1. Machine Monitor Area
• This area displays current machining data
• Absolute coordinate
• Dist. To go
• Feedrate
• Spindle speed,
2. Program Monitor Area
• Display current machining program
• The yellow single block indicates the current machined one
Monitor Area of Machining Information
• Description
• This area and machining setting are overlapped, users can press "F4-parameter set" to switch
between those two displays
1. G-code status
• Display the current G-code that system are running.
2. Run time
• Display machining time of one workpiece.
• When machining program is started, it will start to count.
3. Accum run time
• Display the total machining time
4. Override
• G00 Overide
• G01 Override
• Spindle Override
5. Total AcumPar
• Total workpieces that CNC machined
• The system can not automatically reset this value to zero
• If users want to reset manually, please switch to the "machining setting area" and set
Total AcumPar equal to 0
6. Part count
• It will is reset to 0 when machining other machining program
• Display the No. workpieces machined currently
7. Start block
• Users can set the starting single block in machining program.
• Operation:
• n: Specify the starting single block is the nth row in program. (Ex: 20)
• L+ n: Specify the starting single block is the nth row in program. (Ex: L20)
• N+ n: Search the single block that has N+n sign and specify that single block as
the starting line. (Ex: N3)
• T+ n: Search the single block that has T+n sign and specify that single block as
the starting line.. (Ex: T01)
• If users specify the number of single block exceeding the maximum row
number of program, system will set the last single block as default value
8. Machining tool information
• T
• 4 codes displayed.
• First 2 codes are the tool number currently machining
• 2 subsequent codes specify the tool number executing compensation.
Display Area of Machining Setting

• Description
• This area and machining information are overlapped, users can press "F4-parameter set" to exchange
between those two display.
• Display description
• Interrupt Line No.
• Display the line number interupted at last time (L)
• Interupt Colum No.
• Display the Colum No. interrupted at last time (N)
• Spindle speed
• Set the speed of spindle
• Can be set when system is on busy status. Moreover, it will be activated immediately
• Feedrate
• Set the speed of the feed.。
• Can be set when system is on busy status
• This value will be updated after completely excuting current single block
• Total AcumPar
• Total workpieces that CNC machined
• The system can not automatically reset this value to zero
• Part count
• It will is reset to 0 when machining other machining program
• Display the No. workpieces machined currently
• When CNC executes one M code defined by parameter 3804-part count M code, part count would be added 1
automatically and run time will be reseted to 0. When part count is reached, system will change to pause
status.
• Required Part
• Set number of workpieces wants to machine
• Once the number of required part is reached, an alarm will be issued and system will change to pause
status.
Simulation Graph
• Description
• Display the tool trajectory of current machining program.
• Related setting, please refer to" Simu. Setting."
• Use " simulation switch" to change display content
Open File to Edit

• Command:
• F4 Monitor->F1 Open File to Edit

• Function
• Load and edit the current machining program, also switch to "F2-program" interface.
• Note:
• Once system is on running state, edit function will be disabled.
Simulation Switch
• Command:
• F4 Monitor->F2 Simulation Switch
• Description
• Display or hide simulation display
• 「Graph Adjust」will enable under 「Simulation Switch」 conditions.
MDI Input
• Command:
• F4 Monitor->F3 MDI Input
• Description
• Manual Data Input. Using for simple NC program or testing purpose.
• Operation:
• Select MDI mode
• MDI function is enabled after finishing HOME search action.
• Press F3 「MDI」, edit the program.
• Press F1 (OK) to confirm the input command.
• The command line will show up on the right upper corner of screen.
• Press 【CYCLE START】to execute the command.
• Note:
• This function is enables under MDI mode.
Parameter Set
• Command:
• F4 Monitor->F4 Parameter Set
• Function
• Switch the screen between 「Machining Setting」 and 「machining information」.
Tool Wear Set

• Path:
• F4 monitorF5 Tool wear set
• Description
• Display the tool wear setting interface, user can setting tool wear here.
Work Record
• Command:
• 5 Buttons type: F4 monitor-> Next->F2 work record
• 8 Buttons type: F4 monitor-> F7 work record
• Description
• Check current machining record and export to external storage device.
Clear Acum Cycle time

• Command:
• 5 Buttons type: F4 monitor-> Next->F3 Clear Acum Cycle time
• 8 Buttons type: F4 monitor ->F8 Clear Acum Cycle time
• Function
• Clear the accumulative time
Graph Adjust
• Command:
• 5 Buttons type: F4 monitor-> Next->F4 Graph adjust
• Description
• Zoom in/out simulation graph, this function will enable under 「Simulation Switch」is open.
• Operation
• Please refer to 1.4.7 「Simulation」.
1.1.1.7 Maintain
• Command:
• F8 Maintain
• Description
• Screen displays alarm, network setting, fast diagnostic, PLC param setting, system setting
Alarm
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F1 Alarm
• Description
• Display alarm messages on the screen.
Pending Alarm
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F1 Alarm-> F1 Pending Alarm
• Description
• Display current system alarm.
History Alarm
• Command:
• F8-Maintain->F1 Alarm-> F2 History Alarm
• Description
• Show all the alarm history of the system.
• Note:
• Some alarm were not displayed here, ex: MACRO alarm
Save Alarm
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F1 Alarm-> F3 Save Alarm
• Description
• Save Alarm History to external device according to the current display content.
• Export file name are default :
• Actual alarm: actalm.txt.
• History: histalm.txt.
Network Setting
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F2 Network Setting
• Description
• System network setting
• Related information
• IP address setting
• Select 「Obtain an IP address automatically」when network cable(with HUB) is used.
• For jumper (without HUB), select "use the following IP address" and enter IP address(the last IP no.
must different from controller setting) and Subnet mask(same with controller setting)
• IP Address
• Enter IP address that can be used.
• Sunet Mask
• Enter the IP address for subnet mask (the same with PC setting).
• PC name
• Enter the same full computer name of PC.
• Dir name
• Enter the sharing folder name (same with PC sharing folder)
• User name and password
• If the shared folder is not setting the user and password name, user do not need to enter user name,
if yes, please enter the same user name and password.
Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F2 Network Setting-> F5 Set Kernel Server
• Description
• Setting related function to kernel server
• Related infor.
• Start server and kernel or not when power on.
• Timeout(ms)
• Set the acceptable time out when connecting to Kernel server unsuccessfully.
Start Server
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F2 Network setting-> F5 Set Kernel Server-> F1 Start Server
• Description
• Start server immediately
Fast Diagnostic
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F3 Fast Diagnostic
• Description
• Display simple diagnostic information of system and axes
System Data
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F3 Fast Diagnostic-> F1 System Data
• Description
• Display simple diagnostic information of system
Axes Data
• Command:
• F8 Maintain->F3 Fast Diagnostic-> F2 Axes Data
• Function
• Display simple diagnostic information of Axes
PLC Param Setting
• Command:
• F8 Maintain-> F4 PLC Param Setting
• Description
• SYNTEC's controller provides R81 ~ R100, totally 20 sets of registers for machine manufacture use,
each register have 16 Bits.
• Machine manufacture can use those 20 sets of registers provide user to control the flag of PLC
specific functions.
• Operation
• Press【↑】【↓】【←】【→】 to move cursor and 【PageUp】【PageDown】go to next/previous page
• Users are able to input [0] or [1] and also add comment for every bits.
• Corresponding file name for comment: ParamExt_RBit_(L).xml
• (L)=COM/CHT/CHS/language
System Setting
• Command:
• F8 Maintain -> F5 System Setting
• Description
• This page is used to set system environment
• Operation
• Press【↑】【↓】【←】【→】to move cursor and 【PageUp】【PageDown】go to next/previous page
Operator Mode Setting

• Setting system unit
• 0：mm (Metric unit)
• 1：Inch (British unit)
• Note: reboot to enable setting
System Time Setting

• Date: input format YYYY/MM/DD
• YYYY: year
• MM: month
• DD: day
• Time: input format HH/MM/SS
• HH: hours
• MM: minute
• SS: second
Program File Font Size Setting

• Setting display of font size in program
Backup System
• Command:
• 5 buttons type: F5 Maintain -> Next-> F1 Backup system
• 8 buttons type: F5 Maintain -> F6 Backup system
• Description
• Compress backup system data and save it into external device.
System permissions
• Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F3System permissions
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→F8 System permissions
• Description
• Display system data
• CPU board
• Serial NO
• Model Info
• Machine Type
• Software Option
1.1.2 Series No Setting

• • Path
• 5 buttons type: F5Maintain→Next→F3System Permissions→F1 Ser. NO setting
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→F8 System permissions→F1 Ser. NO setting
• Description
• Can set system series
• Required to obtain the original setting of the password
1.1.3 Use Time Setting

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F3System Permissions→F2 Use time setting
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→F8System Permissions→F2 Use time setting
• Description
• Can set system series
1.1.4 Option Setting

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F3System Permissions→F3 Option setting
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→F8System Permissions→F3 Option setting
• Description
• Can set optional function
1.1.5 Op. Info Restore

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F3System Permissions→F4 Op. Info Restore
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→F8System Permissions→F4 Op. Info Restore
• Description
• Can restore system Permissions
1.1.5.1 User Login

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F1Login
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F1Login
• Description
• Enter username and password to login to the system
• login different users can have different permissions

• Permissions can be set in "Authority mangement"
1.1.5.2 User Logout

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F2Logout
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F2 Logout
• Description
• logout the accessed acount
1.1.5.3 Forget Password

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F3 Forget Password
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F3 Forget Password
• Description
• For general user, please contact the manager to reset password.
• For mechanery manufacturer or manager, please contact to SYNTEC's customer service.
1.1.5.4 Authority Management

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F4Authority management
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F4Authority management
• Description
• Set the authority management of user
1.1.6 Change Password

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F4 Authority management→F1Reset password
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F4 Authority management→F1Reset password
• Description
• Change the old password
• Required to enter the old password
1.1.7 Set Authority of Default

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F4 Authority management→F2Set authority of default
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F4 Authority management→F2Set authority of default
• Description
• When no user is logged in, the function is enabled
1.1.8 Set Authority of Other Users

• • Path
• 5 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→Next→F4 Authority management→F3 Set authority of other users
• 8 buttons type:F5Maintain→Next→F4 Authority management→F3 Set authority of other users

• Description
• Machinery manufacture or manager can set each account permissions
1.1.8.1 Reset Password

• Path
• 5 buttons type: F5 Maintain→Next→Next→F5 Reset password
• 8 buttons type: F5 Maintain→Next→F5 Reset password
• Description
• Can reset machinery manufacturer password
1.1.8.2 About
• Command:
• F8 Maintain -> F8 About
• Function
• Provide controller software version
1.1.9 Machine Operation Panel
1.1.9.1 Operation Panel

• POWER ON
• Turn on controller's power
• POWER OFF
• Turn OFF power
• Emergency STOP
• For safety reason of user and machine in case of unusual phenomenon, after this button is pressed,
CNC would stop all motion, and all main power. Therefore safety of people and machine will be
guaranteed.
• Home mode
• Description:
• When CNC power is on, please implement home search
• Operation:
• Select HOME mode
• Press axis manual key X+ or X-,Y+ or Y-,Z+ or Z- or press cycle start
• CNC would start to return reference position (HOME)
• JOG mode (Rapid JOG)
• Operation:
• Select JOG mode
• Press X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z- key, machine table will move according to axis name and direction
• Operators can use JOG% or G01% to adjust Jog feedrate
• When operator press both above key and rapid Key "〰" at the same time, CNC will move the
machine table with "RAPID speed".
• Incremental JOG (IN JOG)
• Operation:
• Select INC JOG mode
• Press X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z- key, moving distance of machine table equal to the [incremental
distance × pressing number of operator]
• Operators can set the incremental distance by rotary switch *1 : 1um ,*10 : 10um ,*100 :
100um
• MPG JOG
• Description:
• User can use MPG (Manual Pulse Generator) mode to move the machine table
• Operation:
• Select MPG mode
• Select incremental rate
• Select corresponding axis X, Y, Z by rotary switch on MPG device, rotate MPG, machine table
will move with velocity according to rotation speed of MPG device.
• AUTO mode
• Description:
• Users use this function to execute machining NC file
• Operation:
• Select AUTO mode after returning reference point (HOME)
• Set workpiece coor.(G54..G59), CNC will default G54 in case user do not set any workpiece
coor.
• Excute Tool setting by setting tool wear, tool length, and tool nose
• Press "CYCLE START" key to run the NC program.
• Press "Feedhold" key to feedhold the NC program if necessary
• MDI mode
• Description:
• Users use this function to execute a block without NC file
• Operation:
• Select MDI mode
• MDI only is enabled after machine returns reference point (HOME)
• Select F4"Monitor"
• Press F3 "MDI Input", another interface screen would appear to input program.
• Press OK key after finishing input program
• Press "CYCLE START" key to execute the MDI block.
• If MDI block SYNTAX is incorrect, data in MDI menu will disappear
• MPG Simulation
• Description:
• Users can use this function to check NC file
• Operation:
• Select AUTO mode
• Press MPG simulation button, and the corresponding led will be "ON"
• Press "CYCLE START" key to start running NC file.
• CNC would change machine status from "READY" to "BUSY"
• Machine does not move
• Operator can rotate MPG to run NC file
• The faster MPG rotates, the faster machining speed is
• MPG stops, CNC stops too.
• This function can be "Enable" " Disable" immediately
• P.S. This function is easy to use for checking purpose
• Dry Run
• Description:
• User can use this function to check NC file
• Operation:
• Press Dry run button, and the corresponding led will be "ON"
• Press "CYCLE START" key to start running the NC file.
• CNC will change machine status from "READY" to "BUSY"
• This function can be "Enable" " Disable" immediately
• Single block
• Description:
• User can use this function to check NC file
• Operation:
• Press single block button, and corresponding led will be "ON"
• Press "CYCLE START" key to start running the NC file
• CNC will execute NC file only one block and STOP
• CNC will change machine status from "BUSY " to "B_STOP"
• Press "CYCLE START" again ,then CNC execute next block
• This function is used to check NC file by checking each Block of NC file.
• Optional Stop
• Description:
• Users can use this function to decide NC file M01 is STOP or not
• Operation:
• Press Optional stop button, and corresponding led will be "ON"
• Press "CYCLE START" key to run the NC file.
• When CNC run "M01" code, CNC would STOP
• CNC would change machine status from "BUSY " to "Feedhold"
• This function is used to change tool or check workpiece.
• Optional Skip
• Description:
• Users can use this function to decide whether program skips or not when program is run to '/"
sign in NC file.
• Operation:
• Press Optional skip button, and corresponding led will be "ON"
• Press "CYCLE START" key to run the NC file.
• When CNC execute to "/" sign in program ,CNC would Skip this block
• If this key is not pressed, CNC will execute this block
• Spindle control
Spindle CW rotation
Spindle stop
Spindle CCW rotation
Low spindle speed: When spindle rotates, if this button is pressed, spindle will rotate with
low speed
• Working led & Blower
• Working led ON/OFF
• Blower ON/OFF
• Working Liquid
• Flush working liquid ON/OFF
• Aux machine table forward
• Aux machine table backward
1.1.9.2 Keyboard Description
： 26 English character keys
： Numerical keys
： Delete key
： Insert /replace key
： Switch keyboard to use smaller key on keyboard
： Space key
： "Backspace" key to delete a character
： "RESET " abort the CNC status, only use this key if necessary
： To input current data to input box
： Enable Help function/message on screen
： For optional skip Enterput
： End of block
： Decimal fraction
All above symbols are used for "Program Edit" mode.
： Switch cursor to Page Up /Page Down
： Edit cursor control key
1.1.10 How to Operate 21 Series Controller
1.1.10.1 System Status

Syntec Controller display different status under different circumstances, the following content will introduces each
of them and the triggering condition.
(For multi-path interface, system displays the status of first paths among all.)
Not Ready
On Not Ready status, system cannot implement any operations
Conditions:
• Emergency stop button is pressed
• Serious alarm appears
• System is switched to "Not Ready" status and stop all operations to ensure safety of machine and human
SYNTEC's controller will display different status corresponding to different conditions as below:
Ready
On "Ready" status, system can implement all operations
Conditions:
• "Emergency stop" button is released and no alarm exists, system is switched "Not Ready" to "Ready" status.
• On "Busy"/ "Pause"/ "B-stop" status, if user presses "Reset" key; System is switched to "Ready" status.
Busy
System is operating program
Conditions:
• On"Busy"/ "Pause"/ "B-stop" status, if if system executes process; System will switched to "Busy" status.
Feed Hold
System pauses and stop at its current position while executing a program.
• Condition
• Press Stop button under "Busy" status will pause program execution and change to "Feedhold"
Status.
• Notice
• Spindle will continue to rotate even under "Feedhold" status.
B-stop
Conditions:
• Machine program runs to M0 single block when system is on "Busy" status.
• Single block function is triggered when system is on "Busy" status.
Note: On "B-Stop" status, Spindle still rotates
1.1.10.2 Machine Preparation
Manual Function
SYNTEC controller provides 4 functions used to control axis movement including JOG, INC JOG, MPG and Rapid JOG
JOG
• Function:
• Control the axis movement X, Y, Z according to selected direction
• Can control more than one axis at the same time
• Condition:
• System is on "Ready" status
• JOG mode is selected
• Operation:
• Press axis direction key (X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…)
• Hold the axis direction key to keep the axis moving uninterrupted
• JOG speed can be adjusted by G01%
Rapid JOG
• Function:
• Control axis movement X, Y, Z according to selected direction with G00 speed
• Condition:
• Operation:
• Press axis direction key (X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) and rapid key "～ "at the same time ,machine will move
with G00- rapid speed
• Rapid JOG speed can be adjusted by G00%
• Note:
• Rapid JOG is usually much faster than JOG, so when operating, please confirm the axis position to
ensure human and machine safety.
INC JOG (incremental JOG)

• Function:
• Control axis movement X, Y, Z according to selected direction with fixed distance(incremental
distance)
• Condition:
• INC JOG mode is selected
• Operation:
• Press axis direction key (X+, X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…)
• Cannot be constantly triggered like JOG or rapid JOG mode, INC JOG mode only moves once with a
fixed distance when axis direction key is pressed once.
• The fixed distance in INC JOG mode can be selected by percentage movements as below:
• X1 ：Distance 0.001mm
• X100：Distance 0.100mm
• Those percentage movements is shared with MPG mode
MPG
• Function:
• Control axis movement X, Y, Z according to selected direction
• Condition:
• MPG mode is selected
• Operation:
• The moving distance when turning one track in MPG mode can be selected by percentage
movements as below:
Machining Process
Auto
• Condition:
• AUTO mode is selected
• Operation:
• Press CYCLE START button
• System will machine the current machining program
• System status will be switched from "Ready" to "busy" and backs to "Ready" when machining is
finished
Single Block
• Description:
• Excute each single block in program
• Condition:
• Single block mode is selected
• Operation:
• Press CYCLE START button
• System will excute process the current single block in program
finished
HOME
Because tool and workpiece coordinate setting is based on Machine zero point, it is necessary to make sure where
is machine zero (HOME). Therefore, when CNC restarts, return to reference point (search HOME) is very important.
Otherwise, SYNTEC CNC controller will not be allowed to execute AUTO NC files.
• Operation:
• Release emergency stop button, CNC status will change "NOT READY" to " READY "
• Press axis direction key(X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) ,each axis would start HOMING
• Home direction is defaulted in the CNC parameter
• Home function can run 3 axes at the same time
• After HOMING, all machine coordinates will be zero.
• After HOMING, software stroke limit of each axis just is enable, so before HOMING, please do not run
machine too fast.
1.1.10.3 Tool Preparation

When programming and editing machining program, user usually wite Gcode related to tool and workpiece, and
does not care about the real position. Moreover, tool length is different between each cutting tool, so tool
preparation is necessary to avoid disturbing caused by different tool length.
Syntec lathe controller provides: tool length set, tool wear set, tool nose set and working shift.
Tool Length Set
• Path:
• F3 Offset/Setting -> F2 Tool length set
• Switch the cursor to the position wants to set by using page up/down keys and arrow keys
• There are 3 methods to input: absolute, incremental and teaching
• Enter「A***」to input absolute value, here *** is input value; generally, this method is used to input
tool radius compensation or tool length compensation.
• Enter「I***」to input incremental value, here *** is input value; generally, this method is used to input
tool radius wearing compensation or tool length wearing compensation.
• Enter「X**」 or 「Z**」 to input teaching value. User can input other axis name as Y**, X1=**, X2=**,
here ** is teaching value; generally, this method is used to input tool length compensation.
• Fomula calculated compensation value
• Tool radius + radius wear ) is real G41/G42 compensation value
• (Tool length + length wear) is real G43/G44 compensation value
• Using teaching method, user does not need to move cursor to desired input position, only need move
cursor to right tool number and enter axis name, controller will automatically enter setup value
according to axis name.
• After setting tool length by teaching method, tool wear value is set to zero automatically.
Tool Length Measurement

Once NC file has T code, G43 will enable automatically. Therefore, users must set tool length before machining.
Before measuring, please confirm whether working shift(G92)and workpiece coordinate system is correct
Z axis tool length measurement

Use MDI mode and enter the tool No. want to measure. For example: T0101
• Path:
• F3 Offset/Setting -> F2 Tool length set
• Operation:
• Move cursor to tool No. wants to set tool length, ex tool No. 1
• Use manual mode (JOG, INJOG, MPG mode) to move the cutting tool until it touches the Z axis work
piece zero point. Use teaching input method 「Z0」to set current workpiece zero point position.
• Input Z axis cutting measuring
• Normally, it is not easy to move cutting tool until it touches the Z axis work piece zero point. In this
case, user usually inputs Z axis cutting measuring
• Operation
• Clamp the round workpiece by spindle
• Use manual mode to move tool nose touch of workpiece end face, ensure that workpiece can be cut
by moving X axis
• Spindle rotates CW direction, using MPG mode to move X axis in direction that can cut workpiece
• Move X axis in invert direction, do not move Z axis
• Use teaching input method, enter 「Z0, the workpiece end face that just is cut is theworkpiece zero
point.
• Note: After setting Z axis tool length by teaching method, Z axis tool wear value is set to zero automatically.
X axis Tool Length Measurement

• Input X axis cutting measuring
• Normally, it is not easy to move cutting tool until it touches the X axis work piece zero point. In this case,
user usually inputs X axis cutting measuring
• Operation:
• Use MDI mode and enter the tool No. wants to measure. For example: T0101
• Path: F3 Offset/Setting F2 Tool length set
• Move cursor to tool No. wants to set tool length, ex tool No. 1
• Use manual mode (JOG, INJOG, MPG mode) to move the cutting tool until it touches the X axis work
piece zero point. Use teaching input method 「X0」to set current workpiece zero point position.
• Example
• Clamp the round workpiece (diameter14mm) by spindle, ensure workpiece can be cut by moving
cutting tool along Z axis
• Rotary spindle, Cut a distance along Z axis
• Retract cutting tool along Z axis, do not move X axis
• Measure cutting diameter "D "
• Input this teaching value "X+/-D". For example, after cutting, the workpiece diameter is 13.5mm,
input X13.5
• The plus/minus sign is decided by tool tip position, if tool tip is located at X+ (tool tip is located above
central line), sign is "+", if tool tip is located at X-, the sign is "-"
• Note:
• After setting Xaxis tool length by teaching method, X axis tool wear value is set to zero automatically.
Tool Wear Setting

Tool wear setting commonly used to compensate tool wear, tool expansion and contraction caused by thermal, or
corrects the tool length in fine machining process. After completing tool length setting, do not modify tool length
value randomly, only use tool wear setting to correct the size workpiece in fine machining process.
After setting tool length, tool wear value is set to zero automatically. If machining result has error, users can use
tool wear function to compensate tool length. Actually, tool length = tool length + tool wear

• Path:
• F3 Offset/Setting -> F1Tool wear set
• Input method
• Absolute: input the absolute value of tool wear by entering "A**". Tool wear would equal this value
• Incremental: enter tool wear incremental value by entering "I** ". Tool wear will be changed to pre-
value plus this value
• Input mode: only need to input "A" or "I" single character, then "absolute "or "incremental" setting
would be kept, then users can directly input only setting value.
• plus/minus sign +/- :
• Input value can be assigned sign "+/-"
• The plus/minus sign is decided by adjusted direction of tool tip.
• If adjusted direction of tool tip is "Plus" direction, then enter tool wear value with plus sign
• If adjusted direction of tool tip is "minus" direction, then enter in tool wear value with minus sign
• Example:
If machining result is bigger than diameter 10um, tool tip is adjusted to X- , then input "I–0.01" to tool
wear. -10um diameter will be added to current tool wear value. The next cutting time, tool tip cutting path
would move toward "X-" direction 10um in diameter.
• Parameter
Unable to render include or excerpt-include. Could not retrieve page.
Tool Nose Setting

Tool nose is circular, however; tool length measurement only measures tool length, so for precision machining,
users can set tool nose to compensate tool nose dimension error, operation method are shown as below:
• Path:
• F3-Offset/setting-> F3 tool nose set
• There are 3 kinds tool nose data to input

• Radius: tool nose radius
• R.wear: tool nose radius wear, real tool nose equals to (Radius+R.wear)
• Nose: Depending on tool nose shape, there are 8 tool nose directions to be selected. Please see
SYNTEC programming manual to know more detail (G41/G42).
• Using G41/G42 in NC files to enable tool nose compensation
Working Shift
During writing program process, user often uses the workpiece coordinate system, it needs to set properly in CNC
before machining. Machining program will modify the relation between the workpiece coordinate and machine
coordinate system according to different workpice coordinate system shift
• Syntec's controller provides 2 methods to set workpiece coordinate system
• Use NC program or MDI execute G92 code
• Use working shift function
• Working shift function
• Path:
• F3-Offset/Setting-> F5 working shift
• Working shift function has 2 input methods.

• Incremental：Move cursor to axis wants to set, enter offset value. This value describes the offset
relation between absolute coordinate and machine corrdinate.
• Absolute：Enter「X**」or「Z*」.「**」means absolute coordinate value of current position.
Tool Manager Function

Purpose: Record the status of all cutting tool on machine, make users know whether cutting tool reached to Max.
Life, avoid machining in case cutting tool is broken. This function needs a related PLC setting. In case, cutomers
need to use this function, please contact to machine maker.
• Condition
• Both auto and manual can be use.
• Operation
• Pr.3228 is the on/off control of 「Tool management」
• Description
• Turret
• Current tool case no. that tool located.
• Group
• Same kind of tool within in one group, if the first tool of that group is on lock state or 「Tool
life」is end, whenever user use T code to change the tool, system will skip the first tool and use
the second one, when the second one is lock or「Tool life」is end,will use the third one, and so
on.
• Tool informations (Status)
• L—Lock / U—Unlock
• If the status of tool is lock, that tool cann't be use and when T code is use to change the tool,
system will skip that tool.
• B—Large diameter Tool/ N—Normal Diameter Tool
• Adjacent side of large diameter tool set is empty(for display)
• T—working time T / C—Number of working times
• Decide the current life time, the maximum life time, life time prediction, unit of timing and
number of time.
• R—effective value / - —non effective value.
• Current tool are using tool management or not.
• Current Life time
• Current Tool Using Condition
• Maximum Life Time
• Maximum lifetime of tool.
• Lifetime prediction
• when lifetime of tool is greater than lifetime prediction, alarm will be show up.
• Current Status of Tool
• (0)Without management: Set values are not effective.
• (1) Without use: Lifetime of tool is zero.
• (2) usable:0< Tool Life Time <lifetime prediction
• (3) End prediction: Lifetime prediction < Tool Lifetime < Maximum Lifetime
• (4) End of Life: Maximum Lifetime < Tool Lifetime
• (5)ware of tool
1.1.10.4 Program Preparation and Execute Machining
Select Machining Program

• Condition
• Except single block mode
• Operation
• Specify current edit program as machining program
• Switch to edit page
• Select F1-Excute, and the program will be designated as the machining program
• Specify machining program in file manager.
• Switch to the "File Management" page
• Move the cursor to the expected program and press Enter
• Confirmation:
• There are two ways to confirm whether machining program is specified successfully.
• The screen displays the correct machining program name
• The content of machining program is displayed when pressing F4-Monitor
Simu. Setting
SYNTEC's controller provides simulation program, after editing machining program, users can easily simulate the
path machining process, this feature also contains checking features that help users to quickly verify the syntax
error in machining program or unreasonable actions, we suggest users should use this function to check machining
program.
• Condition
• Operation
• In the "File Management" page, select the program you want to edit after completing edit program,
press F7-Simulation
• Screen will switch to the "graphic simulation" page and scan the contents of the program
• Detail description
-Simulation screen
• The solid line represents the cutting path
• The dashed line represents the moving path
• In the scanning process, if there is any syntax or content error, they will be displayed on the screen
with corresponding error line number.
• F1-step: To simulate tool path corresponding to single block in NC files. It is used for coordinate
checking purpose.
• F2-Continue: System scans the whole program first before executing simulation.
• F3-zoom: To zoom in/out the workpiece graph. Users can use the arrow key "←", "↑", "→", "↓" to
move the frame to the determined area, use "PageUp" "PageDn" to zoom in/out this area. After
selecting zoom scales, press "enter" to finish.
• F5- simu. Setting: To set simulation parameter
Machining Test
MPG Simulation
• Condition
• Only for single block and auto mode
• Operation
• Select Auto mode
• Press MPG simulation button on operation panel
• Turn MPG to execute machining
• If MPG is turned in CW direction, Program will be run from current NC line down to below NC line
• If MPG is turned in CCW direction, Program will be run from current NC line up to above NC line
• Confirm
• We can confirm MPG simulation successful or not by these two method.
• Not machining, execute MPG function, and then in the monitor page try to rotate the MPG. If you can
see G01 is zero before you rotate and has value after you rotate MPG.
• While machining, execute MPG function, and then machine will stop to 0 immediately, until you
rotate MPG or cancel MPG function.
Single Block
• Condition
• Operation
• Press single block button on operation panel
• After programming and decelerating to 0, system status changes to B-stop
• Press CYCLE START again
• After completing next single block in NC file, system will be on B-stop status again
Start MPG Coordinate

This section will introduce how to execute the function of part count and work record
• Condition
• MDI or Auto mode
• F4 Monitor→F6 Start MPG Coordinate
• You will see the MPG coordinate system window.
• Switch to the MPG mode.
• Rotate the MPG, you can see the value at this window.
• Confirmation
• Switch to workpiece coordinate page, confirm the value in MPG Shift is correct.
• Relative parameter
• .Pr 3201 Set the Lathe Rule, you must set 0 if you want to use Start MPG Coordinate function
• Note
• R606 must be 1
• Only accept MPG command, JOG&INJOG are invalid.
• It is still work while Machine Lock
• Time to disable
-Keep the MPG coordinate while starting the machine.
-Don't clear the value while G54/G55 is changed.
-Don't clear the value while change the machining code.
-Don't clear the value after go back to Home.
-Don't clear the value after go back to referent point by G28/G29/G30.
• Limit
• Use the Start MPG Coordinate function under MPG simulation mode. Command will send to MPG
coordinate while rotate the MPG until you finish the MPG coordinate function, the command will go
to MPG simulation.
Break Point
• Condition
• Under Auto mode
• Move cursor to the Start Block No.
• Enter the line number you want return
• Line number can be refer to break point line number.
• System will pop out confirm window.
• Press enter, wait the cursor move to the line number you choose.
• Execute.
Machining Monitor
This section will introduce how to use Break Point Return function.
Part Count Manager

• Description
1. Total accum part
• The total accumulative part machined by CNC
2. Required part count
• Once machining program specifies the needed workpiece number, and CNC continues
machining when it meets M99, if the demand workpiece number is reached, machining
process will be paused and notification message will be displayed.
3. Part count
• Once CNC continues machining when it meets M99, this number will be accumulated until
reset
• Part count reset (clear to 0) condition
• Required part count is reached
• Change machining files
• Modify the required part count, and the required part count is smaller than part count.
Work Record Function

• Description
• Once CNC continues machining when it meets M99, work record function will automatically record
status
• Work record condition
1.1.10.5 Alarm Processing

In order to avoid wrong operation effects on safety of human and machine, the system and PLC have many kinds of
protection. When these protection conditions are triggered, the system will issue warning or alarm to users. This
section will describe how to view and troubleshooting alarm.
Emergency Stop
Machine failure or unexpected movements may cause un-safety for human and machine. Pressing emergency stop
button, you can immediately stop the machine.
Alarm Display
Alarm is basically divided into the pending alarm and history alarm.
Pending Alarm
• The current status of system alarm
• Once an alarm occurs, the controller will issue alarm and display the current alarm content on screen
• Press ESC to jump that window
• If the alarm is still not remove, press reset button, alarm window will be not displayed.
• Press F8-Maintain to display pending alarm contents.
History Alarm
Accessing into this page enables user to see all system alarms which have occurred, so users may find out the alarm
reason.
• Command:
• F8- maintain-> F1-AlarmF2 History alarm
• Display history alarm
• The smaller No. alarm is, the sooner alarm occurres
Save Alarm
In case users need support from machinery manufactory to repair once alarm appears, users can export the alarm
contents to an external storage device, and send it to machinery manufactory. By that way, they could clarify and
find out the possible reasons.
• Operation
• Insert the external storage device into controller, or set the corresponding network folder
• Switch to "Alarm" page(F8-maintainF1-alarm)
• To export the pending alarm, press F1-pending alarm F3-save alarm
• To export the history alarm, press F2-history alarm F3-save alarm
• External storage device will be displayed on screen, select the destination folder to save
• Select OK to complete export alarm content
• File Name
• Actual alarm：Actalm.txt
• History alarm：Histalm.txt
Emergency Stop
Machine failure or unexpected movements may cause unsafety for human and machine. Pressing emergency stop
Alarm Display
1.1.11 Pending Alarm

• If the alarm still is not removed, press reset button, alarm window will be not displayed.
1.1.12 History Alarm

reason.
• Path:
• F5- maintain F1-AlarmF2 History alarm
The smaller No. alarm is, the sooner alarm occurres
1.1.12.1 Save Alarm

• Operation
• File name
1.1.12.2 Network Setting
• Command:
• Description
• IP Address
• Sunet Mask
• PC name
• Dir name
Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• Description
• Related infor.
• Timeout(ms)
Start Server
• Command:
• Description
1.1.12.3 PC Setting
XP OS
1. Guest account setting
Log in as Administrator and select "start" "control panel""user account" Guest
1. Sharing resource setting

• Right click the folder you want to share and select "Sharing and security"
• Click on "If you understand security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click
here"
1. Click "OK" to confirm sharing setting; Select "Share this folder on the network", and "Allow network users to
change my files".
1. Setting PC name and workgroup

"Start" "control panel""System" "change" to set "Computer Name" and "Workgroup", and remember these setting
contents to use later on when setting controller.
1. TCP/IP setting
"Start" => "Setting" => "Network connections"

and right click on "Properties", and select "Internet Protocol [TCP/IP]"
• Jumper cable (without HUB), select "use the following IP address" and enter IP address (the forth number is
different from controller setting) and Subnet mask (same with controller setting)
• Network cable (with HUB), select "Obtain an IP address automatically"
VISTA OS
Log in as Administrator and select "start" "control panel" "user account" Guest

Create a sharing folder, and change this folder's setting to offer controller to use, as the below figure.
1. Click on "advanced sharing"
2. Click on "share this forlder"
1. Click on "permission"
2. Click on "add"
3. Enter "GUEST" as the new group name, click "OK" to complete setting
1. Security setting
Right click on forlder to share properties security Edit add "Guest" as a new group, then open group permissions to
maximum.

"Start" "control panel""System" "change" to set "Computer Name" and "Workgroup", and remember these setting
contents to use later on when setting controller.
1. TCP/IP Setting
2. "START" "control panel" "Network and sharing center""Network connection manager" "Properties"
1. Select "internet protocol(TCP/IP)" as shown below:

• Jumper cable (without HUB), select "use the following IP address" and enter IP address (the forth number is
different from controller setting) and Subnet mask (same with controller setting)
• Network cable (with HUB), select"Obtain an IP address automatically"
Win 7 OS
• Right-click on folder wants to share, select "share with" and "spefic people"
• Share this folder to everyone, and then click "Share" as follows.
• Set permission as write/read
• Left-click on "advanced sharing"and select "share this forlder"
• Select "permission" and select "full control" "only read"and "change"
• Open"Network and sharing center", select "turn off password protected sharing" and "Open sharing….."

"Start" "control panel""system and security" "System" "change " to set "Computer Name" and "Workgroup",
remember these setting contents to use later on when setting controller.
1. TCP/IP Setting
• Double click "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)"
• Jumper cable(without HUB), select "use the following IP address" and enter IP address(the forth
number is different from controller setting) and Subnet mask(same with controller setting)
• Network cable(with HUB), select "Obtain an IP address automatically"
1.1.12.4 File Transfer

This section will show how to transfer files, files transfer is divided into import and export files, allowing controller
share files to external devices, such as USB, CF card or users on the network.
File Import
• Operation
• Path: F2-program-> F8-file manager -> F4 File import
• Other interface will appear on screen, press F5-"device change" to move cursor to desired external
device on the status bar
• Press [Enter] key to access to inside device, if the device icon has red cross, which means that there is
no connection to this device,
• Select the file wants to import and press [Copy] to complete import file
• Press F4 cancel select to cancel the selected file
• After complete file transfer, press [Left] or [ESC] to leave this screen
File Export
• Operation
• Path: F2-program-> F8-file manager -> F5 File export
• Other interface will appear on screen, press F5-device change to move cursor to desired external
no connection to this device,Select the file wants to export and press [Copy] to complete export file
• After complete file transfer, press [left] or [ESC] to leave this screen
• Note:
• if destination of export file does not exist, below alarm will appear
1.1.13 Appendix
1.1.13.1 Contact Window
Hsinchu Headquarters Jiangsu-Suzhou

Tel：+886-3-6663553 SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd.
Fax：+886-3-6663505 TEL：+86-512-69008860
E-Mail：syntec@syntecclub.com.tw1 FAX：0512-69560818
Address： Address：
No.21, Industry E.Rd. 4, Hsinchu Science Park D 1-8,Teng Fei New Industrial Zone, 5# Xing Han Street,
30077,Taiwan,R.O.C Suzhou Industrial Park, China
Taichung Taichung
Taichung Service Agency Taichung Service Agency
TEL：+886-4-25337731 TEL：+886-4-23102626
FAX：+886-4-25349224 FAX：+886-4-23102636
No.31, Alley 9, Lane 271, Shepi Rd., Fengyuan City, No.42, Jingming St., West Dist., Taichung City 403,
Taichung County 420, Taiwan, R.O.C Taiwan
Tainan Jiangsu-SuZhou
Tainan Service Agency Suzhou Huaxin Numerical Control Technology
TEL：+886-6-2796707 Development CO.,LTD
FAX：+886-6-2796705 TEL：0512-69560828
Address： FAX：0512-69560818
No.218, Denan Rd., Rende Dist., Tainan City 71756, Address：
Taiwan Xing Han Street, Suzhou Industrial Park, Jiangsu
Province, to take off the new Su Industrial Square D,
2nd Floor 01-08 unit
Zhejiang-Hangzhou Zhejiang-Ningbo
SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Hangzhou SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Ningbo Branch
Branch Ningbo City.
TEL：+86-571-82751187 TEL：+86-574-87750305
FAX：+-86-571-82751186 FAX：+86-574-87750306
Room1202 Unit2 Buiding1, Edifice DiKai , Jincheng Room 12-07,No.262,416 Alley,Zhaohui Road,Jiangdong
Road, Beigan Street,Xiaoshan District , Hangzhou District,
City,Zhejiang Province, China
1 mailto:syntec@syntecclub.com.tw

Zhejiang-Wenling Guangdong-Guangzhou
The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Guangzhou
Ltd. Wenling Branch Branch
TEL：0576- 86138372 TEL：+86-20-34583040
FAX：0576-86119106 FAX：+86-20-34583220
Room 1206, Department A, Zhenxing Plaza, Taiping Room 403 Stairs1 Youyi Building!ALuojia Village 8,Fuyi
Subdistrict, Wenling City Road,ShijiTown,Panyu Distrct,Guangzhou
City,Guangdong Province, China
Guangdong-Dongguan Shaanxi-Xi′an
SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Dongguan The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
Branch Xi'an Office
TEL：+86-769-81660318 TEL：029-88287423
FAX：+86-769-81660328 FAX：029-88287423
Room 705 JinGuo Business affairs centre Xin an Room 2503,Unit 1,Rancho Santa Fe,No.36, Dianzi Third
District Chang an Road, Yanta District, Xi′an, Shaanxi
Shaanxi-Baoji Shandong-Jinan
The Suzhou new generation CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Jinan Branch
Baoji offices TEL：+86-53185907208
TEL：18700712118 FAX：+86-53185905708
Room 2401, Building 1, Xinjian Road, Weibin District, Room 1112, Unit A, Jiahui Global Plaza, No.548,
Baoji Beiyuan Street, Tianqiao District, Jinan, China
Fujian-Xiamen Tianjin
SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Xiamen Branch The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
TEL：+86-592-7191901 Tianjin Branch
FAX：+86-592-7220536 TEL：+86-22-87134111
Address： FAX：022-87134111
No. 100,B Chuang Chang Fang 3F East,Jin Fu Address：
Road,Tong An District,Xiamen City, Fujian Province, Tianjin Huayuan Industrial Zone, Rong Yuan Road No. 4
China day science and Technology Park Building No. 1, 2 door
501
Henan-Luoyang Chongqing
The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
Ltd. Luoyang Company Chongqing Branch
TEL：0379-65110352 TEL：023-67913296
FAX：0379-65110352 FAX：023-67634382
601B, Runsheng Building, Cross of Sanshan Road & Room 41-4, Building A, Hongding International,
Heluo Road, Hi-and-New Tech Park of Luoyang, Guanyinqiao, Jiangbei District, Chongqing
Henan

Jiangsu-Nanjing Hubei-Wuhan
The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
Ltd. Chongqing Branch Wuhan Office
TEL：0512-69008860-300 TEL：027-87638876
Room 505, Unit 3, Building 12,Wuyi Luzhou Guan Chu Address：
Yuan, No.99, Tianyuan Middle Road, Jiangning Room2003-2006,A#Guangguguoji,456#Luoyu
District, Nanjing Road,Donghukaifaqu,Wuhan City, China
Shenyang Anhui-Hefei
The Suzhou new generation CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. The new generation of CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. in
Shenyang Office Suzhou, Hefei Office
TEL：024-25821398 TEL：15951989576
FAX：024-25821398 Address：
Room 704, Building 13,Wanzhen Xiaoyao Garden Ⅳ,
Taihu East Road, Hefei
Shenzhen Thailand
Shenzhen branch SIAM RADERMEN Co., Ltd.
District, Sham Chun City, Guandon Province TEL：+66-27553536
TEL：0755-84584085 FAX：+66-27575476
Address： E-Mail：
Room 706, Hsin Toun Building, Toun Chung Road, Ai lee_cheahow@yahoo.com2
Lian Hsin Toun Village, Loggan Address：
52/4,MOO5,THEPARAK RD.
(KM11.5)BANGPLEEYAI,BANGPLEE, SAMUTPRAKRAN
10540
Malaysia Lebanon / Damascus

SURE FIRST ENTERPRISE (M) SDN BHD. Kesmeyan Group Co.
TEL：+603-61577632 Lebanon Beirut, Jdeideh - Ammaieh - Kessmeyan Group
FAX：+603-61574632 Build.DamascusTEL: +963 11 6731602Mob.: +963 988
Address： 211407E-Mail : info@rockwell.tw
47000 NO 19.JALAN TSB 6,TAMAN INDUSTRI SUNGAI TEL：+961-76-883778
BULOH.47000 SELANGOR DARUL.EHSAN FAX：+961-1-901807
E-Mail：
kesmeyan@rockwell.tw3
France Turkey
INTEGRATION CNC KASIKCIOGLU ELEKTROMEKANIK OTOMASYON
TEL：+33 2 35 06 07 83 TEL：+90-224-4434684
FAX：+33 2 35 06 07 83 FAX：+90-224-4434685
http://www.integrationcnc.fr/ E-Mail：
E-Mail： murat@kasikcioglu.com5
vaque.j@online.fr4
2 mailto:lee_cheahow@yahoo.com
3 mailto:kesmeyan@rockwell.tw
4 mailto:vaque.j@online.fr
5 mailto:murat@kasikcioglu.com

6, Rue l'arché de Copigny, 76630 BAILLY, FRANCE Besevler K.S.S. 17 BLOK NO:72 Nilufer/BURSA/TURKYIE
ISTANBUL/TURKEY
AKSIS MAKINA
TEL：+90 212 613 87 83
FAX：+90 212 613 87 85
http://www.aksismakina.com6
E-Mail：
info@aksismakina.com7
Address：
Yeni doğan mahallesi karakaş Sk. Emintaş Erciyes
Sanayi Sitesi no:12/206
6 http://www.aksismakina.com/
7 mailto:info@aksismakina.com

1.2 Lathe Operation Manual
1.2.1 Lathe Controller Interface
1.2.1.1 SNC System Configuration


1.2.1.2 Screen Sections

The screen sections are shown below:
Meanings for Fields on the Display:

• （1）Program Number
• （2）Title
• （3）Time
• （4）Date
• （5）Data Input
• （6）Hint
• （7）Status
• （8）Function Key Switch

1.2.1.3 Main Menu Selections

The following diagram is the main menu selections for SNC Lathe controller. To operate SNC Lathe controller, users
simply make the selections by pressing function keys, F1～F8 located on the bottom of the screen.
F1: Position Setting of Working Platform

This selection displays coordinate settings of current position. It can also be used to reset the position of relative
coordinate. Pressing function key, F1, under the main menu to enter this selection
(Note:This is the first screen when the system is booted up)

Meaning of fields on the display------

• X:X axis coordinate.
• Z:Z axis coordinate.
• Feedrate:Feedrate of cutting tool at each machining, mm per minute (mm/min).
• Spindle rotating speed: RPM of spindle speed.
• Machine coordinate: (Relative coordinate of working platform)
• The current position of cutting tool relative to working platform is shown as machine coordinate on the
display.
• Relative coordinate:
• The current position of cutting tool relative to the previous location.
• Absolute coordinate:(Programming Coordinate)
• The current position of the origin of user defined coordinate is shown as an absolute position on the display.
• Distance To Go: The remaining distance for the cutting tool to move to the next position in both position
and negative direction.
Descriptions of Function key selections:
F1: Switch of Coor.

Function: Switch Coordinate Displays。
Operation: Under the Position submenu, whenever users press F1 key, the values and coordinate on the left corner
of the display will toggle among the four different coordinates with bigger fonts as shown in the following figure:

F2: 1/2 Coor.

Function: Set the center point of work piece as coordinate origin.
Operation: Under the Position submenu, when the message line shows "X Input"(or "Y Input" or "Z Input"), press
"F2 1/2 Coordinating" and the origin of the coordinate will move to the center point of work piece.
F3: Clear Coor.

Function: Reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.
(No effect on other axis)
Operation: Under the Position submenu, when the message line shows "X Input" (or "Y Input" or "Z Input"), press F3
to reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.
F4: All Clear Relative

Function: Reset XYZ relative coordinate to zero.(No effect on other coordinates)
Operation: Under the Position submenu, pressing "F4" will reset XYZ relative coordinate to zero.

F5: Workpiece Coor.

Function: Relative to machine coordinate setting for G54~G59.
Operation: Under the Position submenu, press "F5" key and the following screen will show up. By pressing "F1" key,
then users can begin to set the auto machine coordinate settings of G54~G59 one by one. (The system needs to be
in manual date input (MDI) mode.)
1. "External Shift": operator can set the all coordinate G54..G59 at the same time .
2. CNC default G54, if user don't set any G54…G59 in the NC file
F2: Program
This selection provides users with program file management and editing. With a full screen editor, users can use
arrow keys（↑、↓、←、→）to move the cursor to anywhere on the screen for editing purpose. Press F2 under the
main menu to enter this selection. The full screen editor is shown as follows:

Descriptions of Program Sub menu Key Selections:
F1: Insert Cycle

Function: Insert a block or cycle by conversation
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F1 to insert a line or cycle before cursor position.

F2: Delete Line

Function: Delete a line at cursor position.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F2 to delete a line where the cursor is located.
F3: Edit Cycle

Function: Edit an old block or cycle by conversation input.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F3 to edit a line where the cursor is located.

F5: EDIT
Function: Edit sub function "Search" "Replace" "Goto line" "Copy line" "Insert line" "Teach" .
Operation: user can use this menu for more edit sub function
F1: Search
Function: Search String
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5"EDIT" and then F1 "Search" to search string. A dialog box will pop up
asking users to input a string as shown in the following figure. After keying in a string, press F1 to start searching.
F2: Replace
Function: Replace string.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "EDIT" and then F2"Replace" to replace string. An dialog box will pop
up asking users to input the replacing string and the new string as shown in the following figure. After keying in a
string, press F1 to start replacing.
F3: Go To Line
Function: Go to a line number
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5"EDIT" and then F3"GOTO line" to go to the line number. A dialog box
will pop up asking users to input a line number. After keying in a number, press F1 to go to the desired line.
F4: Copy Line
Function: copy a line from current cursor to next line
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "EDIT" and then F4"Copy line" to go to the next line.
F5: Insert Line
Function: Insert a space line above current cursor line
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "EDIT" and then F5"Insert line" to Insert a new space line.
F6: Block Edit
Function: support functions of "Select block " "Copy block" "Move block" "Delete block"…etc. (By taking "line" as a
unit.)

Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "EDIT" and then F6"Block edit" to edit blocks through available
functions.
F6: Teach
Function: Teach current absolute coordinate to NC files
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F6"Teach"
Descriptions of Teach sub Key Selections:

F1: Rapid Teach
Function: Add "G00" code to NC files. Perform G00 to current absolute coordinate.
F2: Linear Teach
F3: Arc Teach
Function: Add "G02" or "G03" code to NC files
Press(1st time) this key "arc teach ":
CNC will automatically put current value to Arc middle point.
Press(2nd time) this key "arc teach ":
CNC will automatically calculate G02 or G03, and filled the complete code to NC files.
F4: Cancel Middle
Function: When arc teach function performs, user can use this key to abort middle point teach.
F5: Radius of Arc Teach
Function: Add "G02" or "G03" code to the NC files.
F6: Delete Line
Function: When user uses Teach function, user can use this key "Delete line" to delete an entire command line.
F7: Coor. Switch

Functions: Switch the coordinate displays when more than 3 axes exist.
F8: Coor. Teach
Function: Add point position to the NC files by the current absolute coordinate.
F7: Simulation
Function: Simulation program can verify the accuracy of the editing program.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F7.
Descriptions of F7 "simulation" sub Key Selections:

F1: STEP
Function: To simulate and check NC files STEP by STEP
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F4"Simulation" and then F1"Step".The operator can use this
function ,to check NC file Step by STEP
F2: Continue
Function: To simulate NC file once.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F4 "Simulation" and then F2"Continue". The operator can use this
function to check NC file whole picture, when push button.
F3: Zoom
Function: To enlarge the workpiece graph.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F4 and then F3.The operator can use the "←","↑","→", "↓" cursor to
move the frame to the determined area. And use "PageUp" "PageDn" to Enlarge this area .
F5: Graph Reset
Function: To recover the zoomed workpiece graph.
F6: Abort
Function: To abort simulation action
F8: Simu. Setting

Function: To set simulation parameter
Simulation Parameter Description:

Path color: user can select cutting path color by this parameter
Cursor color: user can select cutting point color by this parameter
Drawing mode: user can select simulation plane by this parameter
Vertical / Horizontal angle: when XYZ drawing mode, user can select 3D View angle by these 2 parameters
Window range
Mode (0: simulation, 1: direct draw)
0: When operator change his operation main screen to F4"Monitor" , CNC would automatically simulation at that
screen
1: When operator change his operation main screen to F4"Monitor" , CNC would not simulation at that screen but
direct drawing the cutting cursor .
Xmin/Xmax,Ymin/Ymax, Zmin/Zmax :
When "direct draw" mode, operator must set draw window by these parameter, the best way: after simulation use
simulation result which is located at the top of this screen to X, Y, Z range.
F8: File Manager

Under Program submenu, press F5 and the following diagram will show up. Users can use arrow keys（↑、↓）to
select file to be edited. After pressing【ENTER】, content of the file will show up on the screen

Descriptions of Key Selections:

F1: New File
Operation: Step 1: A dialog box will prompt users with "New File ". Type in the new file name and press 【ENTER】.
Step 2: An empty screen shows up waiting users to type in a new program.
F2: Copy File
Operation: After pressing F2, a dialog box will prompt users to type in a file name and press 【ENTER】. The current
file is then copy to the hard disk with a different file name.
F3: Delete File
Operation: Select a file to be delete by pressing （↑、↓）. A dialog box will pop up to confirm this operation.
F4: Import
Function: Input file from floppy.
Operation: Insert a disk to the floppy drive and then press F4. Select a file name by pressing（↑、↓、←、→）.
Press【ENTER】to input the file from a floppy disk.

P.S.
1. floppy disk file format is ASCI code
2. SYNTEC CNC also can accept *.zip format ,when import from floppy disk , cnc would unzip automatically
3. if NC file too big ,operator can use more than ONE floppy disk to import NC FILE , separates a big file to some
floppy disks ,use the same file name ,then import THIS file DISK BY DISK ,operator choose appEnd but not
overWRITE ,IT IS VERY EASY TO INSATLL A BIG FILE
4. IF OPERATOR INSTALL EHTERNET, IT IS MORE EASY TO INSTALL A BIG FILE FROM NET .
F5: Export
Function: Output file to floppy disk
Operation: Select a file by pressing（↑、↓、←、→）and then press F5. After following the prompt in the dialog
box, confirm this operation by pressing 【ENTER】.
F6: RS232 Import /F7 RS232 Export
Function: use RS232 communication function to import /Export NC files
Operation: Follow the prompts in the dialog box and type in needed data.
RS232 Communication Parameter Setting
CNC parameter settings from: 3901 to 3949
F3: DIgInput (ONLY for 920T)

Pressing "F3" under the main menu to begin dialog box input as shown in the following figure. After users follow the
prompts shown on the dialog box to key in every needed parameter, the SNC lathe controller can start lathe a work
piece immediately.
F4: Monitor
This selection displays machining speed, time, manual data input (MDI) and some machine information such as
coordinate, range or program at the run time. Press F4 under the main menu to select this function.
Each Key Selections are described below:

F1: Coor.
Function: Toggle way of display among the four different coordinate systems, graphical working paths display and
the absolute coordinate. (Absolute coordinate is display at the upper right corner of the left half screen.
Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F1 to toggle coordinate display between the four coordinates as shown
as the following figure:

F2: Graph Adjust

F1: Zoom
Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2 and then F1.The operator can use the cursor to move the frame to the
determined area.
F2: Graph Reset
Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2"Graph Adjust" and then F2"Graph Reset"
F5: Simu Setting
Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2"Graph Adjust" and then F5"Simu Setting" .
F3: MDI Input

Function: Manual Data Input
Operation: Users can operate SYNTEC Lathe Controller manually in MDI mode.
1. Press F3 under Monitor submenu and type in single-line G or M code.
2. Press F1 (OK) to confirm the input command.
3. The typed-in command line will show on right upper corner of the screen.
4. Press 【CYCLE START】on the machine panel to execute the single-line command.

5. The following figure shows an example of this function.
F4: SETTING of Parameters

Function: To set the part count and also set required current
Operation: From this screen users can set the part count what he need
1. when CNC execute M02 ,M30 ,M99 ,part count would add 1 automatically ,
2. When part count reaches required part count, CNC would stop executing.

F5: Tool Setting

Function: To set the tool compensation value, including tool length , tool wear , tool nose , describe as below :
Tool length: G43/G44 tool length Hn compensation
Tool Length wear: for small length dimension adjust
Tool nose: G41/G42 tool radius Dn compensation (not diameter)
Operation procedure:
1. Main screen press F4 "monitor "
2. Press F5 "Tool Setting"
3. F1 " Tool Wear "
4. F2 " Tool Len "
5. F3 " Tool Nose "
6. Use " Page Up "," Page Down ","↑", "↓ ", "← ", "→ "select tool No ,and X,Z item

F8: Work Record

Function: This table can record 300 sets executed NC file ,this is very helpful to know end user working history .
Operation Procedure:
1. main screen ,press F4 "monitor"
2. at main screen ,Press right arrow "◥ "
3. Press F5 "Work record"
F5: Alarm
Whenever the system or the program stops running due to some errors, there will be an alarm message shown on
the screen. In order to clear the errors, users can press F5 in the main menu for Alarm submenu as shown in the
following figure.

F1: Actual
Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F1 to show current alarm situation.
F2: History
Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F2 to show the alarm history of the system.
F5: Save
Function: Save Alarm History To File.
Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F5 to save alarm history to a file as shown in the following figure. A
dialog box will prompt users to type in file name to be saved. After selecting a disk drive by using (↑、↓、←、→),
users press【ENTER】to confirm this operation.

F6: Parameter
Under the main menu, press F6 and then F1 to enter this function as shown in the following figure.
F1: User Param.

Function:
Parameter setup for servo system such as servo parameters, mechanical parameters, programmable travel range,
maximum machining speed and so on.
Operation:
While the system is in manual data input(MDI) mode , users needs to press E-Stop before setting the parameters
and "Not Ready" will show up on the status line. After key in new values for the parameters, users need to reboot
the system before any change takes effect.

F2: Application Param.
F3: Mechanism Param.
F4: Compensation Table Data
F5: Go To Parameter No.
F6: System Setting
F10: Next Page

• F4：High speed high precision parameter setting
Function:
A preset mode P10000 and 5 high speed high precision motion modes (P1~P5) are provided for user to
choose. By command G90/G91, system decides whether absolute or incremental mode is used. Feedrate is
decided by F code for high speed & high precision interpolation.
Operation：
1. Enter human-machine interface=> select parameter setting(F6) => select F10 => select F4 to enter high speed
high precision setting modes. Pr407 setting is not available in DOS system.
2. Available G code mode：G62, G62.9, G05. G05 is not available in DOS system.

3. Command form：
G05 P ；//Start high speed high precision mode

…
G01 X__ Y__ Z__ F__；
G02 X__ Y__ Z__ R__ ；
G00 X__ Y__ Z__ ；
…
G05 P0；// cancel high speed high precision mode
P：high speed high precision mode setting
X、Y、Z：specified coordinate
4. F：max. feedrate mm/min
F7: Diagnosis
This selection provides users with direct access to the memory area for parameter checking, parameter settings
and NC diagnosis function. It can also be used to maintain and debug the control devices. Under the main menu,
press F6 and then F2 to access this function as shown in the following figure.
Key Selections:

F1: PLC State

Display states and information of individual PLC internal-devices, including staircase charts.

F2: System Data

Function:
Display current system data. (For the meanings of serial No., refer to the application manual)

F3: Global Data
F4: Param. State
F8: System Manager
F1 Program Install
F2 System Backup
F3 Local Language Install
F4 Current Language Backup
F8: Guidance
If users have any problem about SNC Lathe controller, in addition to user manual, users can also use this function
for on-line help. Under the main menu, press "F8" for on-line help.
1.2.2.1 2nd Machine Operation Panel
POWER ON
Turn on main power
POWER OFF
Turn OFF power
Emergency STOP
For safety reason, press this button ,CNC would stop all movement ,and also stop all main power ,so ,people and
machine safety is guarantee .
Home Mode and Home Function

Description : when CNC power on ,please do the home function
Operation :
1. mode select to HOME mode

2. Press axis manual key X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z-:

3. CNC would start the machine home function
Continus JOG (Rapid JOG)

Description : User can use this function to move the machine by press JOG key
Operation :
1. mode select to CON JOG mode
2. Press axis manual key X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z- ,work table would move
3. operator can use JOG% or G01% adjust Jog federate
4. When operator press manual key and rapid Key "〰" at the same time
5. CNC would move the work table "RAPID speed"
6. operator can use G00% Rapid Jog federate
G00 % : Adjust G00 % (F0 .25% .50% .100%)
G01 % : Adjust G01/G02 /G03 feedrate override %:
Incremental JOG
Description: User can use this function to move the machine by press JOG key
Operation:
1. mode select to INC JOG mode
2. Press axis manual key X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z- ,work table would move a fixed distance
3. operator can set the incremental distance by G00 rotary switch 1 : 1um *,10 : 10um *,*100 : 100um
MPG JOG
Description: User can use this function to move the machine by MPG(Manual Pulse Generator )
Operation:
1. mode select to MPG mode
2. Select axis by hand box
3. Select incremental distance
4. Press axis manual key X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z- ,work table would move a fixed distance *1 : 1um , *10 : 10um ,
*100:100um , *1000 : 1000um
AUTO Mode NC File Execute

Description: User use this function to execute NC file
Operation:
1. mode select to AUTO mode
2. After Home function .AUTO mode is available
3. Set workpiece coor.(G54..G59) ,CNC default G54 ,if user don't set any G94..G59 in the NC file
4. Set Tool setting to select tool radius and tool length.
5. Press "START" key to start the NC program.
6. Press "Feedhold" key to feedhold the NC program ,if necessary
MDI Mode Single Block Execute

Description: User use this function to execute a block without NC file
Operation:
1. mode select to MDI mode

2. After Home function .MDI mode is available

3. Main function select F4"Monitor"
4. Press F3 "MDI Input" ,screen would pop up a window.
5. After key in date ,Press "ENTER" key to input the data
6. Press "START" key to start the MDI block.
7. If MDI block SYNTAX is correct ,data in MDI menu would disappear
MPG Simulation
Description: User can use this function to check NC file

Operation:
2. Press this button ,and button led light"ON"
3. Press "START" key to start the NC file.
4. CNC would change machine status from "READY" to "BUSY"
5. Machine is still not moving
6. Operator can use rotate MPG to start the NC file
7. MPG rotate more fast ,machining speed is more fast
8. MPG stop, CNC stop too .
9. this function can "Enable" " Disable" immediately
P.S. this function is very friendly to user to check his program
Dry Run

Operation:
2. Press this button ,and button led light "ON"
Single Block

Operation:
4. CNC would execute NC file only one block and STOP
5. CNC would change machine status from "BUSY " to "B_STOP"

6. Press "START" again ,then CNC execute next block

7. This function is for user to check his NC file Block by Block
Option Stop
Description: User can use this function to decide NC file M01 is STOP or not
Operation:
4. When CNC execute "M01" ,CNC would STOP
5. CNC would change machine status from "BUSY " to "Feedhold"
6. This function use to change tool or check workpiece
Option Skip
Description: User can use this function to decide NC file '/' skip or not
Operation:
4. When CNC execute "/" ,CNC would Skip this block
5. If this key is not pressed ,CNC would execute this block
Machine Lock
Description： The function is used to check NC file

Operation：
1. Select the mode into AUTO mode
2. Press this button ,and button led light will turn "ON"
4. The actual machine will not move while coordinate system shown on screen varies.
Spindle Control
Spindle CW rotates

Spindle stop

Spindle CCW rotates

Spindle low speed: When spindle is rotating, press this key and then spindle will rotate in low speed
Spindle speed increase by 10%
Spindle speed decrease by 10%
C axis JOG
High/Low Spindle speed (H/L)
Spindle positioning
A axis CW rotates
B axis CW rotates

Working Led & Blower
working led ON/OFF
Blower ON/OFF
Working Liquid
Flush working liquid ON/OFF
Circulation of working liquid ON
Manual working liquid
Lubricant ON/OFF
Aux Table forward
Aux Table backward
Power ON/OFF & Clamping Jaw ON/OFF

Feeder & Material Receiver
Feeder connection/Material receiver forward
Feeder control button
Chip Removal Device
Chip removal device positively rotates
Chip removal device negatively rotates
Lathe Center Control

Lathe center moves forward/ creeps/ moves backwards
G00&G01 Override Switch
Increase the speed of G00.
Decrease the speed of G00.
Increase the speed of G01.
Decrease the speed of G01.

MPG (handwheel) Override Switch

*1：1um *10：10um *100：100um
Tool Magazine Control

Facer rotates CW Facer rotates CCW
Code Extension Key (defined by users)
Stroke Limit
PLC is defined by the user.
Text Key Description:
： English 26 character key
： numerical key
： delete a character
： Insert /replace mode switch

： for select keyboard the other textkey
： for select keyboard the other textkey
： "Backspace" delete a character
： "RESET " abort the CNC status ,so please be careful to use this key
： to input current data to input box
： press this key ,user can get help message about this screen
： for optional skip key input
： end of block
： decimal fraction
Above symbols are used for "Program Edit" mode.

： edit cursor Page Up /Page Down
： edit cursor control key
1.2.3 How to Operate SYNTEC 900TE

This chapter is written for user task by task ,when user operates this controller ,operator can follow task description
as below STEP by STEP ,So very easy to use this controller ,TASK description as below :
• Manual function(JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG)
• HOME
• Open a file (EDIT / FLOPPY /RS232 )
• Tool setting (G40/G41/G42 ,G43/G44/G49)
• Tool Length measurement (G43/G44/G49)
• Setting the Workpiece origin offset value(G54…G59)
• Manual Data Input(MDI )
• Assigned an executing NC file (AUTO)
• Graphic Simulation
• How to check NC file in SYNTEC controller
1.2.3.1 Manual Function (JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG)

When power on SYNTEC CNC, there are 3 mode to manual machine
1st CON_JOG:
1. Release emergency stop button ,CNC status "NOT READY" change to "READY "
2. Mode select switch rotate to JOG mode
3. Press axis direction key(X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) ,table would move
4. operator can use JOG% adjust JOG speed
5. operator can press axis direction key and rapid key "～ "at the same time ,machine will move by rapid speed
6. rapid JOG speed can be adjusted by G00%
Incremental JOG:
2. Mode select switch rotate to INC JOG mode
3. Press axis direction key(X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) ,table will move a fixed distance once

4. operator can select incremental distance by G0% (*1,*10,*100)
MPG incremental JOG (MPG):

2. Mode select switch rotate to MPG INC JOG mode
3. Select movement axis
4. Select movement distance (*1,*10,*100)
5. Rotate MPG, table would move.
1.2.3.2 HOME
Because tool setting, workpiece coordinate setting is based on Machine zero point ,so ,it is necessary to make sure
where is machine zero (HOME) ,so ,when CNC bootup, execute HOME function is very important ,otherwise SYNTEC
CNC controller would not be allowed to start AUTO NC files
Procedure:
1. Release emergency stop button ,CNC status "NOT READY" change to " READY "
2. Mode select switch rotate to HOME mode
3. Press axis direction key(X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) ,axis would start HOMING
4. Home direction is defaulted in the CNC parameter
5. Home function can run 3 axis at the same time
6. After home function, machine coordinate would be zero.
7. After home function completed, software limit protection is available, so, before HOME function, please
don't run machine too fast.

1.2.3.3 Open a File (EDIT / FLOPPY /RS232)

Procedure:
1. Press Group function key "Program"
2. Press submenu function key "File manage"
3. screen display file system screen
4. Press F1 "New file" to open a new file

5. Press F2"copy file" to copy current focus file to target file
6. Press F3 "delete file " to delete current focus file
7. Press F4 "Import" to import a new file from floppy disk
8. Press F5 "Export" to export focus file to floppy disk
9. Press F6 "RS232 Import" to import a new file from RS232
10. Press F7 "RS232 Export" to export focus file to RS232
1.2.3.4 Tool Setting

Procedure for setting Tool offset value :
1. Press Group function key "Monitor"
2. Press function key F5 "tool setting "
3. Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or change using page keys and cursor keys
4. Type "A" or "I" key to selected input type is "Absolute" or "Incremental"
5. Generally use Absolute type to input Tool radius and Tool length
6. Use Incremental type to input radius wear and Length wear for small value adjust
7. (Tool radius + radius wear ) is real G41/G42 compensation value

8. (Tool length + length wear) is real G43/G44 compensation value
1.2.3.5 Tool Length Measurement

After NC code select T code, then G43 is enables automatically, so, operator must set tool length data before
cutting.
2. Press F5 "Tool setting" to this screen
3. Press F2 "Tool len" to set tool length
4. Move the cursor to the compensation number for the target tool
Z Axis Tool Length Measurement Procedure

1. Use manual operation to move the tool to be measured until it touches the z axis work zero point.
2. There are 3 methods to input z tool length
• Absolute : enter work zero point machine coordinate ,by "A*** " ,tool length would be replaced by this value
• Incremental : enter Incremental value ,by "I*** " , use this function to shift current tool length by this value

• Teach : enter current position relative to work zero point by "Z**" ,for example "Z0" means current position
is work zero point ,and after this ,tool length would be the same with machine coordinate .
X Axis Tool Length Measurement Procedure

1. Use manual operation to move the tool to be measured until it touches the X axis work zero point.
• Absolute : enter work zero point machine coordinate ,by "A*** " ,tool length would be replaced by
this value
• Incremental : enter Incremental value ,by "I*** " , use this function to shift current tool length by this
value
• Teach : enter current position relative to work zero point by "X**" ,for example "X0" means current
position is work zero point ,and after this ,tool length would be the same with machine coordinate .
3. Teach by cutting : procedure as below
• Cut a distance along Z axis
• Retract tool along Z axis , don't move X axis
• Input this value by teaching input "X+/-D"
• The plus/minus sign is decided by tool tip position ,if tool tip is located at X+(tip is located above
central line) , sign is "+" ,else if tool tip is located at X- sign is "-"
Tool Wear Setting

Use tool wear setting to adjust cutting dimension, procedures are as below

1. After tool length setting ,tool wear value is set to zero automatically
2. measure cutting result ,if there is an error ,use tool wear setting to compensate tool length ,actually tool
length = tool length + tool wear
3. There are 2 methods to input tool wear
• Absolute : enter tool wear absolute value ,by "A**" ,after this setting ,tool wear would be changed to
this value
• Incremental : enter tool wear incremental value ,by "I** " after this .tool wear amount would be
changed to pre_value plus this value
• Modal setting: only enter "A" or "I" single character, then "absolute " or " incremental" setting would
be kept ,after this user can directly input value only .
4. plus/minus sign +/- :
• Input value can be assigned sign "+/-"
• The plus/minus sign is decided by tool tip would be adjusted direction
• if tool tip is modified to move "Plus" direction ,then key in tool wear value by plus sign"+"
• if tool tip is modified to move "minus" direction ,then key in tool wear value by minus sign"-"
Example:
If cutting result is 10um too big in diameter ,and tool tip would be adjusted to X- ,then key in " I–0.01 " to tool wear
value ,then "-10um" would be added to current tool wear value ,next cutting ,tool tip cutting path would move
toward "X -"direction 10um in diameter .
Tool Nose Setting:

Because tool nose is circular, tool length measurement only measure tool length when precision cutting, use tool
nose setting to compensate tool nose dimension error, procedures are as below
1. Press group function "monitor"
2. Press F5 "tool setting"
3. Press F3 "Tool Nose" to select tool nose compensate
4. There are 3 kinds tool nose data to input Radius : tool nose radius R.wear : tool nose radius wear ,actually
the real tool nose is (Radius+R.wear) Nose : tool nose direction ,there are 8 tool nose directions to be
elected ,it depends on tool nose shape ,please see SYNTEC programming manual more detail(G41/G42)
5. Use G41/G42 in NC files, to enable tool nose compensation .
6. please see SYNTEC programming manual more detail(G41/G42)

1.2.3.6 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (G54…G59)

Procedure:
1. Press group function key "Position"
2. Press sub selection soft key "Workpiece coor."
.
3. The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists two pages. Display a desired page by
Press PageUp/PageDn key
4. Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed
5. "External shift" input the value, which can shift the whole coordinate (G54…G59.8) simultaneous
6. F1"coor. Latched": user can press this function key ,and CNC would latch current machine coordinate to the
screen where cursor is located .
Note:
1. This function is enable by setting CNC parameter 3229 : disable workpiece coordinate by " 1 "
2. System default is G54 ,and values are zero every axis
3. After change G54...G59 ,please reset tool length again ,this is very important
1.2.3.7 Manual Data Input (MDI)

Procedure:
1. Mode select switch rotate to MDI mode
2. Press group function key "Monitor "

3. Press sub selection soft key "MDI input"
.
4. The screen display the MDI input window
5. Key in MDI data at input bar and PRESS "ENTER"
6. Press 2nd operation panel "START" to execute the current block
7. If current block SYNTAX is correct, the data in the window would be disappeared.
1.2.3.8 Assigned an Executing NC File (AUTO)

Procedure:
1. Mode select switch rotate to AUTO mode
2. Make sure CNC status is "READY"
3. Press group function key "Program ",select NC file what user want to execute

4. Press group function key "Monitor" then executing file is assigned automatically .
5. Please make sure CNC status is "READY", that is the only available status to assigned executing NC file.
1.2.3.9 Graphic Simulation

Procedure:
2. Press group function key "Program ",select NC file what user want to execute ,Press sub menu "Simulation"
3. User can use "STEP" to check NC file STEP by STEP

4. use "continue" to simulation whole picture

5. Use "Zoom" check more detail
6. Use "simulation setting" set simulation parameter
7. CNC status is "READY", Press group function key "Monitor" that is the available status to assigned executing
NC file.
1.2.3.10 How to Check NC File in SYNTEC Controller

MPG simulation Procedure:
2. Press group function key "Monitor"
3. Press "MPG simulation "key enable this function (led on)

4. Press "Start " key, CNC status from "READY" to "BUSY"
5. Machine table current status is static
6. Operator rotate MPGs ,then table is start moving along cutting path
7. MPG rotates more fast ,table moves more fast ,MPG stop ,table is stop From monitor screen ,operator can
see the cutting cursor move along simulation path
8. Operator also can Press "Single Block" key ,enable single block function when "MPG simulation " function is
ON ,then user can use test two function simultaneous ,check NC file STEP by STEP ,with" MPG simulation "
function .
9. "MPG simulation" can control table forward ,also can control backward too ,but NC file would stop at M,S,T
code when backward .
RS232 FUNCTION
DNC SOFTWARE <->CONTROLLER

(SYNTEC NC CONTROLLER SOFTWARE)
DESCRIPTION:

Users can uses software of CAD/CAM transfer data to controller by RS232 cable. Let user can select be transferred
NC file to working.
Operation:
1. The hardware line link to COM1
2. Parameter of SYNTEC software system setting (Suggest value of default)
Param. controller meaning of parameter
3901 0 Dc protocol role, 0:CNC, 1:Device or PC
3903 1 File transfer port number(1:Com1, 2:Com2)
3921 2 Com1 baud(0:24;1:48;2:96;3:192;4:384..)
3922 8 Com1 data bit number
3923 0 Com1 exchange code type (0:ASCII;1:EIA;2:ISO)
3924 0 Com1 control code (0:No;1:DC2;2:DC4;3:DC2DC4)
3925 1 Com1 End-of-block output code(0:EOB;1:CR+EOB)
3926 0 Com1 DC3 control code parity (0:Off;1:On)
3927 2 Com1 flow control(0:No;1:CrsRts;2:XonXoff)
3928 1 Com1 parity check(0:No;1:Odd;2:Even)
3929 1 Com1 stop bit number(1:1 bit;2:2 bit)
3. Turn on the controller power. The RS232 file input is ready.
Operation has been stated as follows.
• Press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu. And than to press [=>] show up as follow:
• press [RS232 Import].show up as follow:

• After input the file name, Press [Ok] . Than the program will into waiting for receive state. The
transfer state will has shown on transfer process.
4. Step IV: Executing DNC software. Does the RS232 transfer setting adjust is the same controller, or controller
adjust is the same of DNC software. Executing the send function of DNC software. It can be transferred into
which the file of output.
Attention:
• When operating. The file input should be doing firstly. Let controller stay on the receive file state. And
then to set up transfer file function of DNC software. It can be sure transfer correctly.
DNC Function
DNC SOFTWARE <-> CONTROLLER
(SYNTEC NC CONTROLER SOFTWARE)
DESCRIPTION:
When user is use the CAD/CAM software. The controller doesn't capacity in save the too large size program in
working. Can use this function to execute that aside transfer and aside working.
Operation:
1. The hardware line link to COM1
2. Parameter of SYNTEC software system setting (Suggest value of default)
Param. controller meaning of parameter
3901 0 Dc protocol role, 0:CNC, 1:Device or PC
3921 2 Com1 baud(0:24;1:48;2:96;3:192;4:384..)
3. Executing DNC software. Does the RS232 transfer setting adjust is the same of controller, or controller adjust
is the same of the DNC software. Executing the send function of DNC software. It can be transferred into

4. Turn on controller power. Into system by press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu. Select the
RS232 DNC Program is a working file. It is shown as follows.
5. Press "monitor". Controller will read into file to working by RS232

Attention:
• When operating. It should be doing that the working file from DNC software output wait controller to
reading firstly. And select RS232 DNC Program is working file on controller. Finish, Setup working. It
can be sure transfer correctly.
The Software of SYNTEC Controller Replace the Software of DNC to Execute RS232 Function
PC(SYNTEC software end of PC) <-> controller

DESCRIPTION:
The SYNTEC controller software made user transfer into controller working by RS232 that CAD/CAM generate or
writing file. But the SYNTEC controller software can't offer the DNC software that aside transfer and aside working
function.
Operation:
1. Step I:The hardware line link to COM1
2. Step II: Parameter of SYNTEC software system setting (suggest setting value. Exception of 3910 other all the
same)
Param. PC controller meaning of parameter
3901 1 0 Dc protocol role, 0:CNC, 1:Device or PC
3903 1 1 File transfer port number(1:Com1, 2:Com2)
3921 2 2 Com1 baud (0:24;1:48;2:96;3:192;4:384..)
3922 8 8 Com1 data bit number
3923 0 0 Com1 exchange code type
(0:ASCII;1:EIA;2:ISO)
3924 0 0 Com1 control code

(0:No;1:DC2;2:DC4;3:DC2DC4)
3925 1 1 Com1 End-of-block output code
(0:EOB;1:CR+EOB)
3926 0 0 Com1 DC3 control code parity (0:Off;1:On)
3927 2 2 Com1 flow control (0:No;1:CtsRts;2:XonXoff)
3928 1 1 Com1 parity check (0:no;1:Odd;2:Even)
3929 1 1 Com1 stop bit number (1:1 bit;2:2 bit)
3. Step III: Turn on the controller power. The RS232 file input is ready. Operation has been stated as follows.
• Press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu, And then to press [=>]show up as follow:
• press [RS232 Import].Show up as follow:
• After input the file name. Press [Ok].Than the program will enter into waiting for receive state. The
transfer state will be shown on transfer process.
4. Step Iv: Upper End of PC. Executing c:\cnc\cnc into the controller simulation software. Does RS232 file
output. Operation has been stated as follows.

• Press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu. Than to press [=>] key to appearing. And
press up/down key select that want output of file. Such as O1000.
• press[RS232 Import].show up as follow:
• After press [Ok] .Start transfer program. And appearing state of transfer.
Attention:
a. 1. When operating. The file input should be doing firstly. Let controller stay on the receive file
state. And to setup transfer file function of DNC software. It can be sure transfer correctly.
b. To be careful. SYNTEC controller software can offer RS232 file transfer function. But can't offer
DNC software that aside transfer and aside working function.
c. The most our must be careful. When PC executing. We suggest that add up /M /P parameter
behind batch of CNC. Let controller software can execute simulation controller of function on
PC. The /M is operate plate of simulation. Let user can setup working from keyboard. The /P
will simulate ISR and cover off Interrupt. Convenient software can execute upper the

Windows. But will be invalid of transfer function if behind batch of CNC add up /P

parameter.
1.2.3.11 Dos Ftp Server
Controller Setting
1. F6 (Param. Setting) => The right most key (Next Page) => F3(Internet Setting) => F2(Ftp Svr Setting), enter 1
into the cell of Ftp Server to turn ON Ftp Server.
2. According to the description shown below, specify the input controller, IP address, subnet mask and
gateway..etc.
• Ftp Server(0:Off, 1:On)：
When 0 is set, system Internet will use Internet disk (drive n: ).
When 1 is set, system will turn off the Internet disk and turn on Ftp Server.
• IP Address Setting：
When Controller Ftp Server is turned on, the input IP Address has to be in the same area network with
the PC.
• Subnet mask：
The corresponding subnet mask to controller IP address has to be the same as that of PC.
• Pr-specified gateway：
The corresponding pre-specified gateway to controller IP address has to be the same as that of PC

PC Setting
1. Install program "Ftp Client". FileZilla3.3.5.1 is recommanded. The program can be downloded at website:
http://filezilla-project.org/
• Host：
Fill in the IP Address of controller Ftp setting menu. Only IP connection is available in DOS.
• User name and password：
Current default user name and password are both "cnc". "NcFiles" is the access folder.
The user name is case sensitive.
• By clicking "Link", system connects to the controller.
When errors occur during connection, click disconnection before connect again.
2. Multi fixed sites setting:
• Open the site manager

• Input site information: input "controller IP" in host setting, select "normal" in logon type setting and input
"cnc" in user/password setting.
• The site will appear in dropdown list.
• If one PC will connect to multi-controller, repeat step 1 and step 2. The new sites will appear.
Dos Ftp Server Usage Limitation

1. Only one of Dos Ftp Server and web-folder (drive n: ) can be turned on at the same time. Rebooting is
required whenever modifications are made.
2. Current available for Dos controller system with FRAM.
3. User name and password for connection is case sensitive.
4. When system is in the processing mode (busy), Ftp Server will be turned off.
5. S99 is turned on while file transmission. S99 is turned off when file transmission finishes.
6. Average speed of file uploading (PC => CNC) in an area network is 140k bytes/sec.
7. Average speed of file downloading (CNC => PC) in an area network is 13k bytes/sec.
8. FileZilla3.4.0 has currently being verified to be unavailable for connection. Do not use FileZilla3.4.0 at the
moment.
9. In addition to FileZilla, ultrafxp107 has been tested and verified to be valid for connection.

10. The file name of file transmitted needs to be in Dos format: 8 characters for main file name without special
characters.
11. While file transmission, if user starts processing by mistake, the file will be transmitted continually until
transmission completes. Net connection is unavailable if user re-executes the file transmission.

Above picture will occur when user starts processing by mistake.
Disconnection in transmission occurs when transmission is executed again after file transmission complete.
Connection will be re-established after processing complete or end of processing.
Dos Ftp Server Message Description

• Ftp Server is not available in the system：
The controller system is without FRAM, therefore Ftp Server is unavailable.
(I/O card is too old and does not support Ftp Server.)
• Ftp Server is off：
Ftp Server is not turned on or Ftp Server is processing.
• WATTCP.CFG environment variable has to be set：
The Setting of WATTCP.CFG=c:\net is not complete when controller turns on.
Check if the command exists in c:\netftp.bat.

• WATTCP.CFG Access Failure：

Ftp Server reads c:\net\wattcp.cfg unsuccessfully.
Check the existence of c:\net\wattcp.cfg.
• Packet Driver error：
When Ftp Server turns on, Packet Driver is not found.
Check the existence of c:\net\ E100BPKT.COM.
Check if c:\net\ NetFtp.bat has driver E100BPKT.COM.
• IP Address has been used：
When Ftp Server turns on, system discovers the set IP has been used in area network.
Reset controller IP address.
1.2.3.12 Usage Description of Radial Cutting Facer Mechanism Selecting
Rotated cutting facer (spin axis is used) and multiple-unit cutter (linear Y axis is used) are used in Lathe tool
selecting. In radial cutting facer mechanism, practical X and Y axes are combined to form virtual X axis, which
contributes rapid tool changing speed.
Setting Description
1. In the conversational interface, "execute processing (F4)" >"tool setting(F5)">"radial cutting facer angle(F5)"
to set tool angle. The default value of tool angle is 0.
2. After tool angle setting completes, the control system of automatic processing, manual pulse generator,
JOG, teaching etc. are all compatible with the functions without radial cutting facer mechanism. Since the
cylindrical workpiece is symmetric in shape, the tool operating manner shall be exactly the same no matter
in which direction tool positions. The mechanism transformation transforms physical axis (X, Y, Z) to virtual
axis (X', Y', Z') which an operator is used to. (As shown below)
3. The absolute coordinate system is transformed into coordinate (X'、Y'、Z') based on radial cutting facer
angle.
4. Machine coordinate and relative coordinate will not be transformed.
5. Currently unavailable to use in conjunction with G12.1
Example 1
1. As for DOS system, click "F4 execute process" in main menu.
2. Click "F5 Tool setting".
3. Click "F3 Tool nose setting"

4. Specify each tool angle corresponding to the tool number.

5. Select the required tool in each mode.
Example 2
1. As for CE system, click "F4 execute process" in main menu as shown below.
2. Click "F5 Tool setting".
3. Click "F5 radial cutting facer angle"
4. Specify each tool angle corresponding to the tool number.
5. In each mode, once select the required tool, the selected tool is available for use.
1.2.3.13 Bit Function Operations in PLC Parameters
Specification
MLC configuration parameters (Pr3401~3460) are often used as flag On/Off switch for customized function. In order
to ecnomize the use of parameter, a flag is represented by a bit. Therefore, we provide this page to support binary
system modifications, that user can modify the value of them (1 or 0).
Usage spceifications
1. How to switch to R-bit setting page?
From the main manu, key in F6=>F10=>F8.
2. Introduction of the R-bit page
3. Edit comments of R-bit page

1.2.4 Appendix
Hsinchu Jiangsu-Suzhou
SYNTEC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd.
(Headquarters) D 1-8,Teng Fei New Industrial Zone, 5# Xing Han
No. 21 Industry E. Rd. 4, Hsinchu Science Park, Street, Suzhou Industrial Park, China
Hsinchu City 30077, Taiwan, ROC TEL：+86-512-69008860
TEL：+886-3-6663553 FAX：0512-69560818
FAX：+886-3-6663505
E-Mail：
sales@syntecclub.com.twcustomerservice@syntecclu
b.com.tw
Taichung Taichung
Taichung County 420, Taiwan Taiwan
TEL：+886-4-25337731 TEL：+886-4-23102626
FAX：+886-4-25349224 FAX：+886-4-23102636
No.218, Denan Rd., Rende Dist., Tainan City 71756, Development CO.,LTD
TEL：+886-6-2796707 Province, to take off the new Su Industrial Square D,
FAX：+886-6-2796705 2nd Floor 01-08 unit
TEL：0512-69560828
FAX：0512-69560818
Branch Room 12-07,No.262,416 Alley,Zhaohui
Room1202 Unit2 Buiding1, Edifice DiKai , Jincheng Road,Jiangdong District,Ningbo City.
Road, Beigan Street,Xiaoshan District , Hangzhou TEL：+86-574-87750305
City,Zhejiang Province, China FAX：+86-574-87750306
TEL：+86-571-82751187
FAX：+-86-571-82751186

TEL：0576- 86138372 City,Guangdong Province, China
FAX：0576-86119106 TEL：+86-20-34583040
FAX：+86-20-34583220
Guangdong-Dongguan Shaanxi-Xi'an
SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Dongguan The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co.,
Branch Ltd. Xi'an Office
District Chang an Road, Yanta District, Xi'an, Shaanxi
TEL：+86-769-81660318 TEL：029-88287423
FAX：+86-769-81660328 FAX：029-88287423
Baoji offices Room 1112, Unit A, Jiahui Global Plaza, No.548,
Room 2401, Building 1, Xinjian Road, Weibin District, Beiyuan Street, Tianqiao District, Jinan, China
Baoji TEL：+86-53185907208
TEL：18700712118 FAX：+86-53185905708
SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Xiamen Branch The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co.,
No. 100,B Chuang Chang Fang 3F East,Jin Fu Ltd. Tianjin Branch
Road,Tong An District,Xiamen City, Fujian Province, Haiyi International 3-1416, No.2, Rongyuan Road,
China Huayuan Industries Park, Binhai Hi-and-New Tech
TEL：+86-592-7191901 Park, Tianjin
FAX：+86-592-7220536 TEL：+86-22-87134111
FAX：022-87134111
The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co.,
Ltd. Luoyang Company Ltd. Chongqing Branch
Henan TEL：023-67913296
TEL：0379-65110352 FAX：023-67634382
FAX：0379-65110352
Room 505, Unit 3, Building 12,Wuyi Luzhou Guan Chu Room2003-2006,A#Guangguguoji,456 #Luoyu
Yuan, No.99, Tianyuan Middle Road, Road,Donghukaifaqu,Wuhan City, China
Jiangning District, Nanjing TEL：027-87638876
TEL：0512-69008860-300 FAX：027-87204137

Liaoning-Shenyang Anhui-Hefei
No.3 A 1-12-3, South Wenhui Street, Shenhe District, Room 704, Building 13,Wanzhen Xiaoyao Garden Ⅳ,
Shenyang, Liaoning Taihu East Road, Hefei
TEL：15002491395 TEL：15951989576
FAX：18698806526
Thailand Malaysia
SIAM RADERMEN Co., Ltd. SURE FIRST ENTERPRISE (M) SDN BHD.
52/4,MOO 5,THEPARAK RD. 47000 NO 19.JALAN TSB 6,TAMAN INDUSTRI SUNGAI
(KM11.5)BANGPLEEYAI,BANGPLEE, SAMUTPRAKRAN BULOH.47000 SELANGOR DARUL.EHSAN
10540 TEL：+603-61577632
TEL：+66-27553536 FAX：+603-61574632
FAX：+66-27575476
E-Mail：lee_cheahow@yahoo.com8
Lebanon / Damascus France

Kesmeyan Group Co. INTEGRATION CNC
Lebanon Beirut, Jdeideh - Ammaieh - Kessmeyan 6, Rue l'arché de Copigny, 76630 BAILLY, FRANCE
Group Build.DamascusTEL: +963 11 6731602Mob.: TEL：+33 2 35 06 07 83
+963 988 211407E-Mail : info@rockwell.tw FAX：+33 2 35 06 07 83
TEL：+961-76-883778 http://www.integrationcnc.fr/
FAX：+961-1-901807 E-Mail：vaque.j@online.fr10
E-Mail：kesmeyan@rockwell.tw9
Turkey ISTANBUL/TURKEY
KASIKCIOGLU ELEKTROMEKANIK OTOMASYON AKSIS MAKINA
Besevler K.S.S. 17 BLOK NO:72 Nilufer/BURSA/ Yeni doğan mahallesi karakaş Sk. Emintaş Erciyes
TURKYIE Sanayi Sitesi no:12/206
TEL：+90-224-4434684 TEL：+90 212 613 87 83
FAX：+90-224-4434685 FAX：+90 212 613 87 85
E-Mail：murat@kasikcioglu.com11 http://www.aksismakina.com12
E-Mail：info@aksismakina.com13
1.3 Lathe Machine Program Manual
1.3.1 G Code Comparison Table

• G Code List

Function Name G code Index
Type A Type B Type C
Positioning(Rapid traverse) G00 G00 G00 7
Linear interpolation(cutting feed) G01 G01 G01 9
Circular interpolation(CW) G02 G02 G02 11
Circular interpolation(CCW) G03 G03 G03 11
Dwell G04 G04 G04 16
Cylinder interpolation G07.1 G07.1 G07.1 17
Exact stop check G09 G09 G09 19
Programmable data input G10 G10 G10 20
Start polar coordinates interpolation G12.1 G12.1 G12.1 22
polar coordinates interpolation Cancel G13.1 G13.1 G13.1 22
X-Y plane selection G17 G17 G17 25
Z-X plane selection G18 G18 G18 25
Y-Z plane selection G19 G19 G19 25
Outer/internal diameter cutting cycle G90 G77 G20 26
Threadingcycle G92 G78 G21 31
End-face cutting cycle G94 G79 G24 36
Return to reference position G28 G28 G28 41
Return from any reference position G30 G30 G30 43

Skip function G31 G31 G31 44
Thread cutting G32 G33 G33 46
Cancel tool nose radius compensation G40 G40 G40 56
Tool nose radius compensation(left) G41 G41 G41 56
Tool nose radius compensation(right) G42 G42 G42 56
Polygon Cutting G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 66
Local coordinate system setting G52 G52 G52 69
Machine coordinate system setting G53 G53 G53 70
Workpiece coordinate system selection G54 G54 G54 72

~G59.9 ~G59.9 ~G59.9
Single Marco calling G65 G65 G65 74
Custom marco modal call G66 G66 G66 74
Custom marco modal call cancel G67 G67 G67 74
Input in imperial system G20 G20 G70 75
Input in metric system G21 G21 G71 75
Fine cutting cycle G70 G70 G72 76
Stock removal in turning G71 G71 G73 81
Stock removal in facing G72 G72 G74 88
Pattern repeating G73 G73 G75 95
End face peck drilling G74 G74 G76 99
Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling G75 G75 G77 102

Multiple threading cycle G76 G76 G78 105
Canned cycle for drilling cancel G80 G80 G80
Cycle for face drilling G83 G83 G83 112
Cycle for face tapping G84 G84 G84 115
Cycle for face boring G85 G85 G85 119
Cycle for side drilling G87 G87 G87 112
Cycle for side tapping G88 G88 G88 115
Cycle for side boring G89 G89 G89 119
Coordinate system setting/max. spindle speed setting G50 G92 G92 121
Feedrate per minute(mm/min.) G98 G94 G94 122
Feedrate per revolution(mm/rev.) G99 G95 G95 122
Constant surface speed control - G96 G96 123
Constant surface speed control cancel - G97 G97 123
Return to initial point - G98 G98 -
Return to R point - G99 G99 -
1.3.2 Positioning (G00)
1.3.2.1 Command Form

G00 X(U) Z(W)
X ,Z: specified position(absolute mode) U ,W: specified position(increment mode)

1.3.2.2 Description
The G00 command moves a tool to the position, in the workpiece system, specified with an absolute or an
incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. There is no any cutting action in this command. The main aim is to
save the movement time when action includes no cutting. In the lathe program, it is usually used in the tool from
machine zero point to start cutting point, or from end point to machine zero point. In absolute mode (G90), tool
moves to specified position in coordinate system in increment mode(G91), tool moves to specified position by
specified distance.
1.3.2.3 Example

There are several ways to make tool move from point A to point O. Three of them are as below:
Absolute mode
G00 Z0.0 // A. → B.
X40.0 // B. → O.
G00 X40.0 Z0.0 //A. → C. → O.
G00 X40.0 //A. → D.
Z0.0 //D. → C. → O.
Incremant mode
G00 W-100.0 //A. → B.
U-60.0 // B. → O.
G00 U-60.0 W-100.0 //A. → C. → O.
G00 U-60.0 //A. → D.
W-100.0 //D. → C. → O.

Combination of absolute mode and increment mode

G00 Z0.0 or G00 W-100.0
U-60.0 or X40.0
G00 X40.0 or U-60.0
W-100.0 or Z0.0
G00 X40.0 W-100.0 or G00 U-60.0 Z0.0
1.3.3 Linear Interpolation (G01)

G01 X(U) Z(W) F
X ,Z: specified position(absolute mode)
U ,W: specified position(increment mode)
F: Feed rate, Unit: mm/min (inch/min) for G94 mode, mm/rev (inch/rev) for G95 mode<--default mode
1.3.3.2 Description
G01 executes linear interpolation, moves to specified position with feed rate defined by F value. It can process:
outer (inner) diameter, end face, outer (inner) taper, outer (inner) tank, chamfer...etc.
1.3.3.3 Note
• The max. feed rate of G01 is defined by PR405-maximum cutting feed rate or (PR621~PR636)-each axis
maximum cutting feed rate
• Default value F: 1000mm/min(inch/min) for G94 mode and 1.mm/rev(inch/rev)14 for G95 mode
• Default mode G94/G95 can be changed by parameter Pr3836 (reboot controller to activate setting).
14 http://1.mm/rev(inch/rev)

1.3.3.4 Example
G92 X50.0 Z160.0 S10000 //set the program zero point, max.
// speed 10000 rpm
T01 //use tool NO. 1
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed
//=130m/min, spindle rotate CW
M08 //cutting liquid ON
G00 X20.0 Z111.0 //positioning to specified point P0
G01 Z90.0 F600 //linear interpolation P0-->P2
X26.0 //P2-->P3
X30.0 Z88.0 //P3--> P4
Z60.0 //P4-->P5
X40.0 Z20.0 //P5-->P6
Z0.0 //P6-->P7
G00 X50.0 //return the tool
Z160.0 //return to zero point
M05 M09 //spindle stops, setting liquid OFF
M30 //program end

1.3.4 Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)
G02: Circular Interpolation (CW)

G03: Circular Interpolation (CCW)
X(U) ,Z(W): end point of the arc
R: radius of arc(under 180∘)
I, K: X(Z) axis distance from starting point of arc to the center of circle. Positive or negative is determined by the
direction.
F: Feedrate of cutting
1.3.4.2 Description
The G02 ,G03 command will move a specified tool along a circular arc on XZ plane
Pic

G02/G03 Direction Decision
Parameter setting in process
G02 circular interpolation

a. Use R value
b. Use I ,K

• G03 circular interpolation

a. Use R value
b. Use I ,K

Example 1
T01 //use tool NO.1

G92 S10000 // max spindle speed 10000 rpm
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed =130
//mm/min, spindle rotate CW
G00 X0.0 Z41.0 //positioning O.--->P0
G01 Z40.0 F600 //linear interpolation, feedrate600 mm/rev,
//P0--->P1

X10.0 //P1--->P2

G03 X20. Z35.0 R5.0 //circular interpolation CCW P2--->P3,
//radius5mm
G01 Z25.0 //P3--->P4
G02 X30.0 Z20. R5.0 //circular interpolation CW P4--->P5,
//radius5mm
G01 X40.0 //P5--->P6
G03 X50.0 Z15.0 R5.0 //circular interpolation CCW P6--->P7,
//radius5mm
G01 Z5.0 //P7--->P8
G02 X60.0 Z0.0 R5.0 //circular interpolation CW P8--->P9,
//radius5mm
G00 X100.0 //tool escape, escape from workpiece
G00 Z65.0 //return to initial point
M09 //cutting liquid OFF
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program end
1.3.4.3 Example 2
T01 //use tool NO.1

G92 S10000 // max spindle speed 10000 rpm
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed=
//130 mm/min, spindle rotate CW

M08 //cutting liquid NO

G00 X0.0 Z110.5 //positioning, close to the starting point
G01 Z110.0 F500 //linear interpolation, feedrate
//500 mm/min
G03 X20.0 Z83.82 K-15.0 //circular interpolation CCW,
//P1--->P2, radius15 mm
G01 Z70.0 //linear interpolation, P2--->P3
X30.0 //P3--->P4
X50.0 Z50.0 //P4--->P5
G02 X50.0 Z30.0 R10.0 //circular interpolation CW,
//P5--->P6, radius 10 mm
G03 X50.0 Z10.0 R10.0 //circular interpolation CCW,
//P6--->P7, radius10 mm
G01 Z0.0 //linear interpolation, P7--->P8
G00 X100.0 //tool escape, escape from workpiece
Z160.0 //return to initial point
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program end
1.3.5 Dwell (G04)
Command Form

X(U) ,P: dwell time
1.3.5.1 Description
We can use G04 command to let the tool dwell a specified time when we process to an appropriate position. It can
help cutting off the scouring of iron, improving the precision of cutting depth, and better the surface finish to
achieve roundness (as below). When G04 command coordinates with G94 or G95, the time unit is in second.
※G04 command is only effective in single block.
Example
G04 X0.5 //dwell 0.5s

G04 U0.5 //dwell 0.5s
G04 P500 //dwell 0.5s
//※Notice: P is not allowed to be decimal point
1.3.5.2 Referenced Formula
T: dwell time (s)

Z: dwell numbers of revolution

N: rev/min
Notice: Syntec controller didn’t offer direct Command to input dwell coils. Operator must input the dwell time
calculated from the given formula.

1.3.6 Cylinder Interpolation (G07.1)
G19 Z0 C0 //select the working platform

G07.1 C___ //start the cylinder difference, C the cylinder radius
...
… //the description of the route
…
G07.1C0 //end the cylinder difference
Description
G07.1 starts the cylinder difference, G02/G03-> circular interpolation function, G40/G41/G42-> compensation
function for tool nose radius. Because of the difficulty of the calculation of the vector in the center of a cirle, we use
the way of R_radius address. Feedrate F_ is linear velocity in the surface of the cylinder. About the way of feed we
must swith it into G94 inthe lathe system in the first, for the C-axis is the main shaft probably.
1.3.6.2 Example

G28 U0 W0
T0202
G97 S1000 // set up the rotational speed of the main shaft
G00 X50.0 Z0.
G94 G01 X40.0 F100.
G19 C0 Z0 // choose CZ the working platform
G07.1 C20.0 // start G07.1, the radius is 20.0
G41 // start process
G01 Z-10.0 C80.0 F150.0
G01 Z-25.0 C90.0
G01 Z-80.0 C225.0
G03 Z-75.0 C270.0 R55.0
G01 Z-25.0
G02 Z-20.0 C280.0 R80.0
G01 C360.0
G40 // end process
G07.1 C0 // cancel G07.1
G01 X50.0
G00 X100.0 Z100.0
M30

1.3.7 Exact Stop (G09)
G09 X__ Z__

X ,Z: specified corner position
Description
When processing the corner, we cannot cut the exactly corner and the rounding off occurs because the tool moves
too fast or servo system delays. In the situation that we need a right-angled, we can use G09 to prevent the CNC
from rounding off sharp corners. It controls the tool to decelerate when approaching to the corner and come to a
complete stop at the end of block. When the tool reach to specified position, then the next block will be executed.
1.3.7.2 Pic

1.3.8 Programmable Data Input (G10)
G10 P X Z R Q
or
G10 P U W C Q

P: offset number
Tool wear offset value: P = number of tool wear offset
Tool geometry offset value: P = 10000 + number of tool geometry offset value
X: offset value on X axis(absolute)
Y: offset value on Y axis(absolute)
Z: offset value on Z axis(absolute)
U: offset value on X axis(incremental)
V: offset value on Y axis (incremental)
W: offset value on Z axis (incremental)
R: tool nose radius offset value(absolute)
C: tool nose radius offset value (incremental)
Q: imaginary tool nose number(setting method is in next page)
Description
G10 command is programmable data input command. We can use this command to change the tool offset value
when programming.
1.3.8.2 Imaginary tool nose setting

1.3.9 Polar coordinates interpolation (G12.1/G13.1)
G12.1 //Start polar coordinates interpolation

…
… // (Start linear or circular interpolation in rectangular
… // coordinate and rectangular coordinate is composed of
… // linear and rotational axes)
…

G13.1 //Cancel polar coordinates interpolation
1.3.9.2 Description
The function of the polar coordinates interpolation transfers the program instructions of the patterns in the
rectangular coordinate to linear motion (knife motion) and rotational motion (workpiece motion). This way is
usually used in cutting end face and milling cam shaft in lathe.
The plane of the polar coordinates interpolation: G12.1 starts polar coordinates interpolation and selects the plane
of the polar coordinates interpolation (below). The polar coordinates interpolation is completed in the plane.
When system power on or reset, polar coordinates interpolation will be cancelled (G13.1).
With G12.1, the planes (chose by G17 ,G18 or G19)used before are cancelled but with G13.1(polar coordinate
interpolation cancel) they are restored. When we reset the system, polar coordinates interpolation is cancelled and
restore ,the plane G17 ,G18 or G19 assigned before.
We can use G code with polar coordinates interpolation
G01 linear interpolation
G02, G03 circular interpolation
G04 pause
G40, G41, G42 tool nose radius compensation
G65, G66, G67 sub-program call
Circular interpolation in polar coordinate plane: In the polar coordinate plane, the arguments of the arc’s radius
with Circular interpolation (G02 or G03) are I and J.
The motion along the axis of the plane of the Cartesian coordinate interpolation in polar coordinates interpolation:
The tool moves along these axes and has no relationship with polar coordinates interpolation.

The display of the coordinates in polar coordinates interpolation: Linear axes(X) and rotational axes(C) show their
real location by radius axes and others show theirs by original parameters.
1.3.9.3 Restriction
The coordinates in polar coordinates interpolation: We should set new working coordinates before G12.1 and the
center of the rotational axis is the origin in the coordinate. With G12.1 we must not change coordinates
(G92 ,G52 ,G53 ,G54~G59 and so on.).
The instructions of the tool nose radius compensation, With G41 or G42 mode active. We cannot start or cancel
G12.1 or G13.1. Only after G40(tool nose radius compensation cancel) can we start or cancel G12.1 or G13.1.
Program restart: We cannot execute “restart” in the programs with G12.1.

The programming of diameter and radius:
We program both linear axes(X) and rotational(C) with the programming of radius.
Example
T0101
G00 X110. C0 Z_ //positioning
G40 G94
G12.1 //start polar coordinates interpolation use Cartesian

//coordinate X－C plane edit program

G42 G01 X20. F_
C10.
G03 X10. C20. R10.
G01 X-20.
C-10.
G03 X-10. C-20. R10.
G01 X20.
C0
G40 X110.
G13.1 //cancel polar coordinates interpolation
M30
1.3.10 Plane Selection (G17/G18/G19)
1.3.10.2 Description
We must make prior change when using circular interpolation command tool and radius compensation command.
G17 ,G18 ,G19 activates different planes. The controller will only process on the selected cutting plane.

1.3.10.3 Pic
1.3.11 Outer(Internal) Diameter Cutting Cycle (G20)
Command Form
1. Linear cutting cycle: G20 X(U) Z(W) F
2. taper cutting cycle: G20 X(U) Z(W) R F

X ,Z: end position of cutting(absolute)
U ,W: end position of cutting(incremental)

R: difference radius value between starting point and end point

F: feedrate
Description
G20 can be used in outer (internal)diameter cutting and taper cutting cycle. By cycle function, we can use only one
block to repeat the program, thus simplify the process.
Pic
• 1.3.11.1 Linear cutting cycle
• Taper cutting cycle

1.3.11.2 Action description
Position the tool to start point before cycle starts.

After executing G20 command, tool move to specified X(U) position in X direction.
The tool starts cutting to the specified X(U) ,Z(W) position in specified federate.
Tool rapidly return to start point once finish each cutting cycle.
After reaching the start point, tool will repeat cutting in the path by changed X(U) value
When cutting to specified size, the tool will stop at start point.
※ When using increment mode, the relationship of U ,W ,R(plus or minus) and the tool path as below:

1.3.11.3 Example 1
• Straight cutting cycle
G92 S5000 //max. speed 5000 rpm

//130 m/min, spindle rotate CW
G00 X60.0 Z65.0 //positioning to a.(starting point)
G20 X45.0 Z15.0 F600 //execute straight cutting cycle, feedrate
//600 μm/rev, a.--->b.--->f.--->k.--->a.
X40.0 //a.--->c.--->g.--->k.--->a.
X35.0 //a.--->d.--->h--->k.--->a.
X30.0 //a.--->e.--->i--->k.--->a.
N007 G28 X60.0 Z70.0 //positioning to specified mid-point then

//return to machine zero point

M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.11.4 Example 2
• Taper cutting cycle
G92 S5000 //max. speed 5000 rpm

T01 //use tool NO.1
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface
//speed 130m/min, spindle rotate
//CW
G00 X60.0 Z65.0 //positioning to a.(starting point)
G20 X53.0 Z15.0 R-7.5 F600 //Taper cutting cycle, feedrate 600
//μm/rev, a.--->b.--->f.--->k.--->a.
X48.0 //a.--->c.--->g.--->k.--->a.
X42.0 //a.--->d.--->h.--->k.--->a.
X35.0 //a.--->e.--->i.--->k.--->a.
G28 X60.0 Z70.0 // positioning to specified mid-point
//then returns to machine zero point
M05 //spindle stops

M30 //program ends
1.3.12 Thread Cutting Cycle (G21)

Straight thread cutting cycle:
G21 X(U) Z(W) H___ ( F___ or E___ )

Taper thread cutting cycle:
G21 X(U) Z(W) R H___ ( F___ or E___ )

X, Z: end point of cutting (absolute)
U, W: end point of cutting (incremental)
R: difference radius value between starting point and end point
F: screw lead of Metric system (unit: mm/tooth)
E: screw lead of English system(unit: tooth/mm)
H: number of teeth (ex: H3 for cutting the screw of 3 teeth type. In case of H command, F: pitch of teeth)
Description
G21 command is thread cutting cycle. It simplifies many repeating thread cutting blocks into one single block.
1.3.12.2 PIC
• Straight thread cutting cycle: G21 X(U) Z(W) F

• Taper thread cutting cycle: G21 X(U) Z(W) R F
Positioning the tool to start point before cycle starts.

After executing G24 command, tool moves along the X axis direction and reaches to the specified X(U) position.
Then tool start cutting to the specified X(U) ,Z(W) by specified F code
4. The tool returns to start point after cutting.
5. After reaching to the starting point, tool will repeat cutting in the path by changed X(U) value(the changed value
is the value that we cutting each time, it can reference tool feed value table in G33).
6. When cutting to specified size, the tool will stop at starting point.


※ When we use increment mode, the relationship of U ,W ,R(plus or minus) and the tool path are as below:
1.3.12.4 NOTE
• From version 10.114.56E/10.116.0E/10.116.5 (included), the spindle override of entire thread-cutting cycle is
locked at the value of the start of cycle, i.e., the spindle override button is in vain during thread-cutting
cycle.
• Before version 10.114.56E/10.116.0E/10.116.5, during thread-cutting cycle, the spindle override is locked at
100% when cutting and resume to setting of control panel while retracting. Therefore, one apply thread-
cutting cycle with a spindle override that is not equal to 100% will find the spindle is under a frequent
acceleration and deceleration situation.

• The parameter Pr4018 - Chamfer angle (θ) of thread cutting G21, must be set as the actual cutting tool’s
degree, e.g. the actual cutting tool is 60 degrees, so Pr4018 is set as 60.

• The setting of parameter Pr4043 - Chamfer amount for threading must meet the condition r*tanθ≧h (where
h is the depth). If r is set too large, it will shorten the total thread length (p), as W = r+p In contrast , if r is set
too small, it will cause the retraction end point B’ appear on the last tooth, hence the last tooth will be

relatively lower than the others (see the graph below).
• Under the incremental mode, the definition of the signs of values in U, W, and R as well as the relation
between the cutting tools and the cutting path is as follows:
1.3.12.5 Example 1
• Straight thread cutting cycle, 3 teeth type

T03 //use tool NO.3

G97 S600 M03 //constant rotate speed, 600 rpm CW
G00 X50.0 Z70.0 //positioning to the starting point of cycle
G21 X39.0 Z20.0 H3 F2.5 //execute thread cutting, 3 teeth type,
//first cycle
X38.3 //second cycle
X37.7 //third cycle
X37.3 //fourth cycle
X36.9 //fifth cycle
X36.75 //sixth cycle
G28 X60.0 Z75.0 //positioning to specified mid-point and
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.12.6 Example 2
• Taper thread cutting cycle, single tooth type

T03 //use tool NO.3

G00 X50.0 Z55.0 //positioning to the starting point of cycle
G21 X39.0 Z15.0 R-10.0 F2.5 //execute taper thread cutting cycle,
//first cycle
X38.3 //second cycle
X37.7 //third cycle
X37.3 //fourth cycle
X36.9 //fifth cycle
X36.75 //sixth cycle
G28 X60.0 Z70.0 // positioning to specified mid-point and
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.13 End Face Turning Cycle (G24)
1. Straight end face cutting cycle: G24 X(U) Z(W) F

2. Taper end face cutting cycle: G24 X(U) Z(W) R F

X ,Z: end position of cutting(absolute)
U ,W: end position of cutting(incremental)
R: difference length from starting point to end point
F: feedrate
G24 command is end face cutting cycle. It simplifies several repeating end face cutting blocks into one single block.
1.3.13.3 PIC
• Straight end face cutting cycle

• Taper end face cutting cycle
Positioning the tool to start point before cycle starts.

After executing G24 command, the tool will move along Z direction and reach the specified Z(W) position.
Then the tool will cut to specified X(U) ,Z(W) by specified feedrate.
After finishing cutting, the tool returns to start point.
After reaching to the start point, tool will repeat cutting in the path by changed Z(W) value.
When reaching to the specified size, the tool will stop at start point.

※ when we use increment mode, the relationship of U ,W ,R(plus or minus) and the tool pathare as below:

1.3.13.5 Example 1
• Straight end face cutting cycle.
G92 S3000 //max. rotate speed 3000 rpm

//130 m/min
G00 X52.0 Z35.0 //positioning to starting point of cycle
G24 X20.0 Z25.0 F600 //execute straight end face cutting,
//feedrate 600 μm/rev, first cycle

Z20.0 //second cycle

Z15.0 //third cycle
Z10.0 //fourth cycle
G28 X70.0 Z40.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, then
//return to the machine zero point
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.13.6 Example 2
• Taper end face cutting cycle

T01 //use tool NO.1
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed130 m/min
G00 X52.0 Z35.0 //positioning to starting point of cycle
G24 X20.0 Z32.0 R-10.0 F600
//execute taper end face cutting cycle, feedrate 600 μm/rev, first cycle
Z28.0 //second cycle
Z24.0 //third cycle
Z20.0 //fourth cycle
G28 X70.0 Z35.0
//positioning to specified mid-point, then return to machine zero point
M05 //spindle stops

M30 //program ends
1.3.14 Reference point return (G28)
G28 X(U) Z(W)

X ,Z: specified mid-point(absolute)
U ,W: specified mid-point(incremental)

When G28 command is executed, tool will move to specified intermediary point and then return to reference
point(machine zero point) by the speed of G00 To prevent interference between tool and workpiece, G28 keep tool
clear of the workpiece when returning.
In absolute mode, it is the absolute value to the intermediary-point in increment mode, it is the increased value
from start point to intermediary point.

※ Notice: We must cancel tool compensation function prior G28 command to insure the returning action correct.
1.3.14.3 PIC
1.3.14.4 Additional remark

If the axis (parameter221~236) is set to be rotated axis, see the attachment “parameter manual” for your reference.
1.3.15 Return from reference point (G29)
G29 X(U) Z(W)

X ,Z: specified point(absolute)
U ,W: specified point(incremental)

G29 command is used in conjunction with Reference point return (G28). Noted that G29 is not allowed to be
executed alone. G29 does not specify its own intermediary point, it uses the intermediary point that G28 specifies,
so G29 can only be executed after executing G28 command.
G29 returns the CNC to the intermediary point programmed in G28, then to the coordinates programmed in the G29
block. In short, it can move to specified position through intermediary point from reference point.
In absolute mode, it is the absolute value to the intermediary point in increment mode, it is the increased value
from starting point to intermediary point.
Pic
1.3.16 Any reference point return (G30)

Command Form
G30 Pn X(U) Z(W)

X ,Y ,Z: coordinate value of mid-point
Pn: specify the reference point (setting parameter #2801 ~ #2860)

P1: machine zero point

P2: second reference point
P_default is P2
Description:
In order to be convenient in tool change and inspection, we specify another reference point from the machine zero
point by parameter. The machine needs not to return to machine zero point when changing tool, thus increases the
changing efficiency. Usage of this command is same as G28 command except the different tool return point. G30
command is usually used in the situation which tool changing position differs from origin. The moving mode is G00
(positioning) mode.

<Notice>this command usually use in auto tool change. We should cancel tool compensation function before
executing G30 insafety.
1.3.16.2 Example
Path 1
G30 P01 X50.0 Z78.0 // P0--->mid-point--->P1

Path 2
G30 P02 X50.0 Z78.0 // P0--->mid-point--->P2
Or
G30 X50.0 Z78.0 //default P2

Path 3

G30 P03 X50.0 Z78.0 // P0--->mid-point--->P3
1.3.17 Skip Function (G31)
G31 X(U)__ Z(W)__ F__

X ,Z: specified position(absolute)
U ,W: specified position(incremental)
F: feedrate
G31 is to be issued with an associated axis move. When the G31 is executed, it moves at current feedrate selected
from G1 until the touch probe selected is deflected. At this point, the move is stopped, and the position where the
probe touched the part is read and passed to system variables. Machine will receive the signal then ladder C-bit
turns on. Skip function is used in unknown end program. G31 command will then record the present position of
machine whenever be interrupted and terminate the current action, continuing to execute the next block.
1.3.17.3 Example 1
• Increment mode

G31 W100.0 F100 //origin path until run into contact point
U100.0 //use contact point to be the relative
//coordinate and change the path to specified
//position
Example 2
• Absolute mode for one axis
G31 Z200.0 F100 // origin path until run into contact point
X100.0 // use contact point to be the relative coordinate

//and change the path to specified position
1.3.17.4 Example 3
• Absolute mode for two axes
G31 Z100.0 F1000 // origin path until run into contact point
Z130.0 X70.0 // use contact point to be the relative coordinate
//and change the path to specified position
1.3.17.5 Additional Remark

To avoid several G31 command be skipped simultaneously, in conjunction with PLC , the C-bit should be positive
edge triggered.

1.3.18 Thread cutting (G33)
Straight thread cutting:

G33 Z(W) Q___ ( F___ or E___ )

Taper threading:
G33 X(U) Z(W) Q___ ( F___ or E___ )

Endface thread cutting:
G33 X(U) Q___ ( F___ or E___ )

F: lead in longitudinal direction<---common thread ,Metric system
E: lead in longitudinal direction<---pricise thread ,English system
Q: the shift of the threading start angle, this function can let all the tool start point be the same when cutting
rotating workpiece and usually use in multiple-thread cutting. (range: 0.001~360.000∘) When single-thread cutting,
we can ignore the Q argument and apply default value Q= 0∘(range：0.001~360.000∘)
G33 command executes endface thread cutting, taper threading, and straight thread cutting. It based on spindle
rotates and tool feed executing synchronously.

1.3.18.3 Pic
1.3.18.4 Notice
• Input unit and modal of E ,F value as below table: table 1. Metric system ,table 2. English system
Table 1. input by Metric system

Table 2. input by English system
1.3.18.5 Note
If the converted feedrate is greater than Max. cutting feedrate, the pitch will vary. Thus the pitch is not the originally
specified one.
Tilt thread cutting command and spiral thread cutting command are unavailable in constant surface speed mode.
The spindle speed should be fixed from coarse cutting to fine cutting.
If we use dwell in thread cutting, the thread will be damaged. So we cannot use dwell when thread cutting. If we
press the dwell button, the thread cutting will be terminated (not in G33 mode) and will stop at the next block.
In the beginning of thread cutting, the varying cutting feed rate will be compared with the limitation of cutting
speed. The alarm of error operation will occur if the speed limitation is exceeded. 【Note 1】
In the thread cutting, it is possible that the varying cutting speed exceeds the limitation of cutting speed for keeping
the constant pitch.
The limitation of spindle speed is as below:
R: spindle rotate speed (rpm)

Lead of thread (F): mm or inch
Feedrate: mm/min or inch/min
Around the start and end thread cutting point, incorrect pitch length will occur due to the servo lag. Therefore the
thread length we want should be the specified thread length (L1 ,L2) plus the thread length.

※L1 ,L2 formula are as below:
The external speed control is effective during the thread cutting, but the feedrate of external speed control cannot
synchronize with spindle revolution cannot be in synchrony.
In non-synchronous feed(G94) command, the thread cutting command will become synchronous feed type.
During the thread cutting, manual adjustment of spindle speed is also effective. If manually adjust the speed during
thread cutting, an incorrect thread cutting due to delay of servo system may also occur.
When thread cutting command executed during tool nose radius compensation, tool nose radius compensation
will be temporarily canceled.
During the G33 command, thread cutting will be canceled if changing to other automatic modes. Automatic
spinning will be terminated after executing a block.
During the G33 command, thread cutting will be canceled if change to manual mode, Automatic spinning will be
terminated after a block. During the spinning of single block, thread cutting will also be canceled. Automatic
spinning will be terminated after executing a block.
During the thread cutting, it begins to move till the appearance of synchronous signal per one revolution from
spinning encoder. But in case of a thread cutting in a system which there is another thread cutting command, it will
start to move instead for waiting the appearance of synchronous signal per revolution from backward encoder.
Therefore, do not execute duplicated system of thread cutting command.
• Tool feed value of thread cutting reference table:

1.3.18.6 Example 1

T03 //use tool NO.3

G97 S1000 M03 //spindle rotate CW 1000 rpm, constant rotate
//speed
G00 X30.0 Z10.0 //positioning to starting point of cutting
X19.0 // First cutting 1.0 mm
G33 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X30.0
Z10.0
X18.3 // Second cutting 0.7 mm
G33 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X30.0
Z10.0
X17.7 // Third Sixth cutting 0.6 mm
G33 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X30.0
Z10.0
X17.3 // Fourth Sixth cutting 0.4 mm
G33 Z-30.0
G00 X30.0
Z10.0
X16.9 // Fifth Sixth cutting 0.4 mm
G33 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X30.0

Z10.0
X16.75 // Sixth cutting0.15 mm
G33 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X30.0
Z10.0
G28 X50.0 Z30.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, then return to
//machine zero point
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.18.7 Example 2
Pitch = 2.5
T03 //use tool NO.3

G97 S1000 M03 //spindle rotate CW 1000 rpm, constant rotate
//speed
G00 X40.0 Z10.0 //positioning to starting point of cutting
X12.0 // First cutting 1.0 mm
G33 X20.0 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X40.0

Z10.0
X11.3 // Second cutting 0.7 mm
G33 X19.3 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X40.0
Z10.0
X10.7 // Third cutting 0.6 mm
G33 X18.7 Z-30.0 F2.5 //
G00 X40.0
Z10.0
X10.3 // Fourth cutting 0.4 mm
G33 X18.3 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X40.0
Z10.0
X9.9 // Fifth cutting 0.4 mm
G33 X17.9 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X40.0
Z10.0
X9.75 // Sixth cutting 0.15 mm
G33 X17.75 Z-30.0 F2.5
G00 X40.0
Z10.0
G28 X50.0 Z30.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, and return to
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.19 Variable lead threading cutting (G34)
(1) Straight thread cutting: G33 Z(W) Q F___ K___

(2) Taper threading: G33 X(U) Z(W) Q F___ K___
(3) Endface thread cutting: G33 X(U) Q F___ K___

F: lead in longitudinal axis direction(at the start point) ßcommon thread ,Metric system
E: lead in longitudinal directionßpricise thread ,Imperial system
Q: the shift of the threading start angle, this function can let the tool start point the same when cutting rotating
workpiece and usually use in multiple-thread cutting. (range: 0.001~360.000∘) When single-thread cutting, we can
use ignore the Q argument and will apply default value Q= 0∘
K: Increment and decrement of lead per spindle revolution.
G34 command executes straight thread, taper thread, and endface thread cutting that have variable pitch, based
on spindle rotation and tool feed synchronously. (Note. G34 is available in version 10.112.0 or later 9.0 version is
unavailable)

1.3.19.3 Pic
1.3.19.4 Notice
If specified K value cause latter pitch to be negative, an alarm「Invalid Threading Lead」will be issued If the feedrate
is greater than maximum allowable feedrate, the pitch will decrease and an alarm 「threading block feedrate
exceed」will be issued.
Total move distance in one block: [F+(F+Rev*K)]* Rev/2
Other notices are the same with G33.
1.3.19.5 Example 1
T03 // use tool no. 3

G97 S1000 M03 //Spindle rotate CW 1000rpm, and the speed
//is constant
M08 //cutting liquid On
G00 X0.0 Z0.0 // G00 move to cutting original point
G34 Z-50.0 F1.0 K0.2 // pitch increase 0.2 per rev to cut
M09 //cutting liquid Off
M05 //Spindle stop
M30 //finish

1.3.19.6 Example 2
T03 //use tool no. 3

G97 S1000 M03 //Spindle rotate CW 1000rpm, and the speed
//is constant.
M08 //cutting liquid On
G00 X0.0 Z0.0 //G00 move to cutting original point
G33Z16F4 //Threading with fix pitch that is 4mm
G34W19F4K5.5 //Pitch increase 5.5mm per rev. Pitch is 4mm
//become 15mm.
G33W4F15 //Threading with fix pitch that is 15mm
G34W18F15K-4 //Pitch decrease 4mm per rev. Pitch is 15mm
//become 4mm .
G33W12F9 //Threading with fix pitch that is 9mm
M09 //cutting liquid Off
M05 //Spindle stop
M30 //finish
1.3.20 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42/G40)
G41 X(U)___ Z(W)___

G42 X(U)___ Z(W)___
G42

G40 compensation cancel


A rounded tiny nose on the tool tip increases its strength, the tool life, decreases the stress, help heat radiation and
improve the smoothness of surface. It is called tool nose, and its radius is called tool nose radius. But when we use
tool nose to cut corner, ,slanting line or an arc, errors will occur because of the arc of tool tip, we cannot perform
the exactly shape of workpiece. We can use G41 ,G42 to compute the error of tool nose radius accurately and make
adjustment to compensate it.
1.3.20.3 Pic
• Relationship between tool feed direction and workpiece, setting of compensation:

• Compensation setting of actually perform
• Imaginary tool nose number setting:

• Compensation without tool nose:

1.3.20.4 Tool Radius (R) compensation
• Compensation Starts
When a block which satisfies all the following conditions is executed, the system enters the offset mode.
Control during this operation is called compensation start-up.
G41 or G42 is contained in the block, or has been specified to set the system to enter the offset mode.
The offset number of tool nose compensation is not “ 00 ”.
X or Z moving are specified in the block and the move distance is not zero.




• Compensation mode
In compensation mode, it is the same as straight and circular interpolation. It uses compensation even
during positioning. In compensation mode, it does not specify tool movement block (M Function or
dwell .etc.) it cannot be specified continuously. If it is specified continuously, overcut or undercut will occur.





• Compensation Cancel
In compensation mode, when block satisfies following conditions, system will enter cancel mode:
1. Specify G40
2. The number of tool nose radius compensation is specified to “0”



1.3.20.5 Example 1

T02 //use tool NO.2
G92 S10000 //max. rotate speed, 10000rpm
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, spindle rotate
//130 m/min CW
G42 X21.0 Z0.0 //tool compensation start-up, move to P1
G01 X25.0 Z-2.0 F600 //linear interpolation, feedrate 600
//μm/rev, P1--->P2
Z-20.0 // P2 --->P3
X30.0 Z-50.0 // P3 --->P4
Z-57.0 //P4 --->P5
G02 X36.0 Z-60.0 R3.0 // P5 --->P6
G01 X39.0 // P6 --->P7
G03 X45.0 Z-63.0 R3.0 // P7--->P8
G01 Z-70.0 // P8 --->P9
X60.0 //return the tool
G28 X70.0 Z-60.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, then

M05 //spindle stops

M30 //program ends

1.3.20.6 Example 2
T02 //use tool NO.2

G92 S1000 //max. rotate speed, 10000rpm
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, spindle rotate 130
//m/min CW
G41 X47.0 Z0.0 //start tool compensation, move to P1
G01 X46.0 Z-0.5 F600 //linear interpolation, feedrate 600μm/rev,
//P1 ---> P2
Z-13.0 //P2 ---> P3
X38.0 //P3 ---> P4
Z-28.0 //P4 ---> P5
G03 X28.0 Z-33.0 R5.0 //circular interpolation CCW, radius 5

//mm, P5 ---> P6
G01 X-1.0 //linear interpolation
G28 Z20.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, then
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.21 Polygon cutting (G51.2)
G51.2 P__Q__R__
P: Basic spindle (workpiece axis) rotation speed rate. Default is P=1 (range from integer 1to 999)
Q: Synchronous spindle (tool axis) rotation speed rate. Default is Q=1(range from integer 1to 999).
R: Synchronous phase difference (range from 0°to 359.999°).

G51.2 is polygon cutting by workpiece axis and tool axis that is synchronous rotates and have fix phase difference
and rotation rate.
Synchronous spindle rotate speed: basic spindle speed * Q / P
Synchronous phase difference: the clockwise angle difference between synchronous spindle and basic spindle. If
user doesn’t use R statement, it would not synchronize the phases.
G50.2 cancels the polygon cutting.
G51.2 is available in version 10.113.0 or later unavailable in earlier versions (9.0 and 10.0).

1.3.21.3 Note
1. Two synchronous spindles must be servo motors. Spindle type is only available in Type3 (Pr1791~1796). If
set the wrong type, alarm (Cor093) will occur. If basic and synchronous spindle (Pr4021, 4022) does not exist,
alarm (Cor091, Cor092) will occur as well.
2. If set two servo motor in different motion parameter. EX: acceleration/deceleration time (Pr1831~1836) and
acceleration time of spindle motor acceleration up to 1000RPM/Sec (Pr1851~1856). They will use their own
parameter to arrive the synchronized feedrate before reaching synchrony. After synchrony, two motor will
use the slower parameter to control motion to synchronize the spindle feedrate.
3. If the position loop gain (Kp, Pr 181~196) of two servo motor are not the same, Kp of controller is used to
compensate. User have to check if Kp of controller and Kp of driver are the same, or the motion will not be
controlled as expected.
4. G51.2 is model G-Code. When the signal of spindle synchronization is on and both of spindles have rotate
command (M03, M04), spindle synchronization will start and output spindle synchronization success signal.
5. After spindle synchronization, rotational direction of basic spindle and synchronous spindle are assigned by
Pr1861~1866 (Spindle Sync. basic spindle direction). M03 and M04 enable to control the direction.
6. During spindle synchronization, commanding to synchronous spindle is invalid. If the speed of the basic
spindle is greater than maximum allowed synchronous spindle speed, the speed of the basic spindle will
descend to be P/Q times the speed of maximum allowed synchronous spindle speed.(Ratio between basic
and synchronous spindle speed is P:Q)
7. After spindle synchronization, synchronous spindle doesn’t act on M03, M04, M05 and S code but only record
the mode until synchronization disabled.
8. Pressing emergency stop will terminate spindle rotation and spindle synchronization.
9. After spindle synchronization finish, user can’t orientate for spindle.
10. After finishing synchronization (S62, ON) and pressing reset G51.2 synchronization will be disabled until two
spindles stop.
11. When reading feedback from the encoder, 8-μs delay time exists between the port and its adjoining ports.
The further two ports are, the longer the delay time results. Spindle synchronization has to take care about
phase. If using spindle synchronization to implement polygon cutting, user have to put two spindles on the port
that is next to each other. EX: Since P1 and P2 are on the same servo card, connecting feedback ports to them
decreases time delay as well as the phase error.
12. If G50.2 is commanded during spindle synchronization, only until the speed reaching the specified speed, will
the system disable spindle synchronization.
13. To synchronize again, G50.2 must be performed to cancel synchronization first, otherwise an alarm will
occur.
14. When synchronize phase difference is used, the value of R shall equal to the amount of angle different
between the tool and the workpiece, times Q, and divided by P. (Please refer to the example)
15. P and Q value can be only integer. In case of the ratio is not integer, such as 1:2.5, user shall use equivalence
integer ratio, e.g. 2.:5.
16. In order to assure the absolute position of the workpiece, tool’s home position teaching needed to be set.
(Please refer to the first section of Example)
17. The length of arc from a tip of the tool to another, is require to be larger than the target side length of the
workpiece, as referred to the following diagram, L1 needs to be larger than L2.


18. G51.2 performs a polygon cutting through the speed difference of the tool and the workpiece (spindle). The
result of surface (convex, flat, or concave) depends on the cutting conditions. The chart below provides
some information of the cutting conditions and the results of surface for references.


1.3.21.4 Example
• Setting Up
In order to assure the absolute position of the workpiece, tool’s home position needed to be setup. There are
three different ways to setup the tool’s home position:
1. Input the phase difference via R input
2.

3. Reset the zero position of tool to where the tip of the tool is perpendicular to the workpiece.
4. Turn the tool to where the tip of the tool is perpendicular to the workpiece, and then proceed the phase
difference teaching (F4>F4>F3), the angle will be input to the Registry Table automatically.
• Sample Command
Ex1. Hexagon with 3 flute tool : G51.2 P3 Q6 (or G51.2 P1Q2)
Ex2. Pentagon with 2 flute tool : G51.2 P2 Q5
• Sample Program
S1 = 1000 //Workpiece axis (basic spindle) rotate speed 1000 RPM
M03 //Workpiece axis (basic spindle) spindle rotate CW
S2 = 500 //Tool axis (Synchronous spindle) rotate speed 500
//RPM
M204 //Tool axis (Synchronous spindle) spindle rotate CCW
G51.2 P1 Q2 R30 //Tool axis (Synchronous spindle)
//synchronoziation arrive to 2000RPM and the phase
//difference is 30 degree. Cut for quadrangle
M81 // reading S62. Check the synchronization success.
G01 X50 // start cutting
G04 X5
G01 X0 //return
G51.2 P1 Q3 R60 //Tool axis (Synchronous spindle)
//synchronoziation arrive to 3000RPM and the

//phase difference is 60 degree. Cut for hexagon.

G01 X50 //start cutting
G04 X5
G01 X0 //return
G50.2 //cancel polygon cutting
M05 //Workpiece axis (basic spindle) stop
M205 //Tool axis (Synchronous spindle) stop
M30 //program finish
• Synchronizing Error
The speed of main and sub spindle can be different during synchronization, therefore, the synchronizing error
is calculated through the formula as below:
Synchronizing Error = (Actual Position of sub-spindle – Datum Angle of sub-spindle) - Speed Ratio*(Actual
Position of main spindle – Datum Angle of main spindle) – Phase Difference
Note 1 : Datum Angle is referred to the Registry Table
Note 2 : Speed Ratio is Q/P
Note 3 : Actual position is referred to the feedback from the motor encoder
1.3.21.5 Polygon machining PIC

• A square can be machined as shown below

• A hexagon can be machined as shown below

1.3.21.6 Reference

1.3.22 Local Coordinate System Setting (G52)
G52 X__ Y__ Z__

X, Y, Z: Set the local coordinate system
Description
When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system (G54~G59.9), another sub-coordinate can be
established for easier programming, this sub-coordinate system is called local coordinate system.
G52 X0.0 Z0.0: cancel local coordinate.
• Coordinate System
G54 //specify workpiece coordinate system G54

G52 X15.0 Z30.0 //specify the zero point of local coordinate
//system to X15.0 Z30.0 of workpiece

//coordinate system
G00 X10.0 Z10.0 //positioning to X10.0 Z10.0 of local
//coordinate
G52 X0.0 Z0.0 //local coordinate system cancel
…
1.3.23 Machine Coordinate System (G53)
G53 X___ Y___ Z___

X: move to specified X in machine coordinate.
Y: move to specified Y in machine coordinate.
Z: move to specified Z in machine coordinate.
Description
The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the machine zero
point. A machine coordinate system, once set, remains unchanged until the power is turned off. A machine tool
builder sets a machine zero point for each machine. When a position has been specified as a set of machine
coordinates, the tool moves to that position by means of rapid traverse.
Notice
• G53 command is valid only in the block in which it is specified on a machine coordinate system .
• G53 is valid only in absolute mode. When an incremental command is specified, the G53 command will be
ignored.
• Prior to specifying G53, cancel related tool radius ,length or position compensation .

• Prior to G53 command is specified, manual reference position return must be performed.
Example
G53 X20.0 Z20.0 //move to specified position in machine coordinate

G53 X10.0 Z40.0 //move to specified position in machine coordinate
1.3.24 Workpiece Coordinate System (G54…G59.9)

G54 X___ Y___ Z___

G55 X___ Y___ Z___
G56 X___ Y___ Z___
G57 X___ Y___ Z___
G58 X___ Y___ Z___
G59 X___ Y___ Z___
G59.1 X___ Y___ Z___
G59.2 X___ Y___ Z___
…
G59.9 X___ Y___ Z___

G54: First workpiece coordinate system
…
G59: Sixth workpiece coordinate system
G59.1: Seventh workpiece coordinate system
…
G59.9: 15th workpiece coordinate system

X,Y,Z: Move to specified position in workpiece coordinate system which has been set
Description
When operating the lathe, we may repeat performing the same process in different positions which are in one
workpiece. By specifying G code from G54 to G59 and G59.1 to G59.9, one of the 15 workpiece coordinate systems
can be selected for easier repeating processes. It can be set by parameter #3229「disable workpiece coordinate
system」(0: enable, 1: disable).
1.3.24.2 How to set G54……G59.9

By selecting “Set workpiece coordinate system” in controller operation interface, workpiece coordinate system G54
…G59.9 can be set one by one.

1.3.24.3 Example
1.3.25 Simple Marco Call (G65)
G65 P L

P: number of the program to call
L: Repetition count (1 by default)

After G65, specify at address P the program number of the custom Marco to call. When repetition is required, specify
the repetition count after address L. The execution is valid only in the block in which G65 performed. Refer to
SYNTEC『OPEN CNC Macro Develop Tool Guide』for more instructions.
1.3.25.3 Example
G65 P10 L20 X10.0 Y10.0 //call the marco program O0010.
//Execute the program repeatedly for 20
//times with value X10.0 Y10.0 being
//operated.
1.3.26 Modal Marco Mode (G66/G67)
Command Form
G66 P L Modal Marco call

G67 Modal Marco cancel

P: number of the program to call
L: Repetition count (1 by default)
After G66, specify the number of the program to call P_. When repetition is required, specify the repetition count
after address L_. After finishing the execution in one block, it will automatically execute the contents of G66 in the
next “moving” block. (If next command is not a moving block, G66 does not act until moving command appears.)
G66 movement performs repeatedly until G67 is issued. (if the subprogram called contains calculation of variables,
notice the problems of pre-calculated variable values.)
1.3.26.2 Example

G91
G66 P10 L2 X10.0 Y10.0 //call O0010 two times and
input the //value X10.0 Y10.0
into the program for //calculation
X20.0 //move X axis to 20.0, then execute
//G66 P10 L2 X10.0 Y10.0
Y20.0 //move Y axis to 20.0, then execute
//G66 P10 L2 X10.0 Y10.0
G67 //cancel the model marco mode

1.3.27 English/Metric Unit Setting (G70/G71)
Command Form
G70
G71
Description
G70: Imperial unit system

G71: Metric unit system
After changing Imperial/Metric, workpiece coordinate offset ,tool data ,system parameter ,and reference position
are still correct. System will convert the unit automatically. After unit converting, the function units list below will
change as well:
Coordinate display ,unit of speed

Incremental JOG unit

MPG JOG unit
1.3.28 Finishing Cycle (G72)
G72 P(ns) Q(nf)

ns: Sequence number of starting block in finishing cycle
nf: Sequence number of ending block in finishing cycle
G72 command is finishing cycle (contour cutting cycle), this command must be in conjunction with stock removal
cycle in the previous block. In general, finishing cycle is executed after stock removal cycle in the program, The
execution range is from “P(ns)” to “Q(nf)”.
While rough cutting is performed by G73 / G74 / G75, G72 command must be implemented to reach the final
specified size.
1.3.28.3 Notice
• F,S and T functions specified in the block G73,G74 and G75 are not effective while those specified between
the blocks determined by addresses P and Q( "ns"à"nf") are effective in G72.
• When the cycle machining through G72 is terminated, the tool is returned to the start point and the next
block is read.
• In blocks between “ns” and “nf” referred in G72 through G75, the subprogram cannot be called.

1.3.28.4 Example 1

G92 S5000 //Max. rotate speed 5000 rpm
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed130 m/min,
//spindle rotate CW
G00 X60.0 Z15.0 //positioning to start point
G73 U2.0 R1.0 //cut3.0 mmin X axis direction, tool returned
//value 1.0 mm
G73 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.1 F300 //execute stock removal in turning,
//sequence number N01 -→ N02, leave 0.8mm for
// finishing allowance in X axis direction, leave
//0.1mmfor finishing allowance in Z axis direction
//feedrate 300 μm/rev
N01 G00 X17.0
G01 Z0.0
X20.0 Z-1.5
Z-20.0
X25.0
X30.0 Z-45.0 //contour for cutting
Z-52.0
G02 X36.0 Z-55.0 R3.0
G01 X45.0
G03 X55.0 Z-60.0 R5.0

N02 G01 Z-70.0

G72 P01 Q02 //execute fine cutting cycle, sequence number
//N01 -→ N02
M28 X60.0 Z20.0 //tool positioning to specified mid-point, then
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.28.5 Example 2

G92 S5000 //Max. rotate speed 5000 rpm
//spindle rotate CW
G74 W3.0 R1.0 //cut3.0mmin Z axis direction, tool returned value
//1.0 mm
G74 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.2 F600 //execute stock removal in facing,
//the sequence number N01àN02,leave 0.8mm for
//finishing allowance in X axis direction, leave


//, feedrate 600 μm/rev
N01 G00 Z-55.0
G01 X60.0
Z-45.0
X50.0 Z-40.0
X40.0
G03 X30.0 Z-35.0 R5.0
G01 Z-30.0
X20.0 Z-15.0
X15.0
Z-1.5
N02 X12.0 Z0.0
G72 P01 Q02 //execute fine cutting cycle, the sequence number
//N01àN02
M05 //spindle stops
M32 //program ends

1.3.28.6 Example 3
T01 //use tool NO.1

//spindle rotate CW
G75 U15.0 W15.0 R3.0 //cut15.0mmin X axis direction, cut
//3.0mmin Z axis direction, repeat 3 times
G75 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.2 F300 //execute pattern repeating cutting,
//the sequence number N01àN02,leave0.8mmfor
//finishing allowance in X axis direction, leave
//feedrate 300 μm/rev
N01 G00 X40.0 Z5.0
G01 Z-30.0
X50.0
X60.0 Z-35.0
Z-70.0
G02 X70.0 Z-75.0 R5.0

G01 X100.0

G03 X120.0 Z-85.0 R10.0
N02 G01 Z-105.0
G72 P01 Q02 //execute fine cutting cycle, the sequence number
//N01àN02
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.29 Stock Removal in Turning (G73)
Command Form
G73 U(Δd) R (e )_H__

G73 P (ns) Q (nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F S T


Δd: depth of each cut in X axis direction, it can be specified by the parameter#4013 -when this statement is not
applied.
e: escaping amount, it can be specified by the parameter#4012 when this statement is not applied.
ns: sequence number of the first block for the program of stock removal in turning.
nf: sequence number of the last block for the program of stock removal in turning.
Δu: distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter/radius designation)
Δw: distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
F: feedrate
T: number of the tools
S: spindle rotate speed
H: cutting type. Tpye I set 0. Type II set 1.
If user dosen’t set value in H, system will check the type automatically.
G73 command (stock removal in turning) processes the workpiece to specified shape, leaving a specified value of
distance for finishing allowance. This cutting cycle needs to define the block path range of workpiece, the depth of
each cut and both the distance and direction of finishing allowance.
1.3.29.2 PIC
TYPE I: The figure must show monotone increase or decrease along both X and Z axes. Each block must satisfy that
the amount of cut is always increase or decrease. Usually start cutting from end face.

• Description
Tool should be positioned to point A(start point) before cycle starts.
Tool offsets to point C by specified finishing allowance (ΔU/2 for X axis, ΔW for Z axis).
Tool moves Δd amount of distance in X axis direction. Tool begins to move to the endface of contour.
Tool escapes(retracts) e amount of distance in X axis direction, but moves by the direction of 45°.Tool then
retracts in reversed Z axis feed direction to the point that parallels in X direction to the start point.
Move Δd amount of distance in X direction, continuing next cycle
a. In last cycle, tool cuts along contour A → B once
b. After finishing last cycle, tool positions to point A.

TYPE II: Usually be performs in the middle part of the workpiece. The figure need not show monotone increase
or decrease in the direction of X axis. Only Z axis needs to satisfy the condition that cutting amount is always
increasing or decreasing.

1.3.29.3 Notice
When ns and nf are not specified, specified U in G73 block is depth of cut Δd. Otherwise, U is finishing
allowance in X direction.
Contour path is described by the blocks ns and nf, passing through point A à A' à B. If Z coordinate of contour
path is not monotone,
System will send out [MAR-002 the profile must be monotone along X, Z axis] alarm. If starting point (defined
by the block before G73 command)
is lower than contour path, System will send out [MAR-005 the position higher than the cycle start point]
alarm.

F, S or T function issued within block range of nsànf will be ignored. The relevant F,S and T functions specified
in G73 block are effective instead.
G00/G01 command in the G73 blocks will be used to perform linear cut to the workpiece.
Using G73 command, If H is equal to 0, system will interpret as TYPE I. If H is equal to 1, system will interpret as
TYPE II. If H is not specified,
system will diagnose automatically. If H variable is specified wrong, System will send out [MAR-018 ERROR
INPUT OF G73/G74 H VALUE] alarm
Sub-program cannot be called during blocks nsànf.
All tool nose compensation commands will be disabled when G73 is in the block. However, the compensation
value will be added to the finishing allowance.
When H value is not specified in G73, and the first block contains only movements along X axis, system will
take TYPE-I as default.

Direction of finishing allowance: the direction depends as figures shown below, passing through point A -
→ A' -→ B.

1.3.29.4 Example 1
• TYPE I

//spindle rotate CW
G00 X60.0 Z15.0 //position to start point
G73 U2.0 R1.0 H0 //depth of cutting in X direction is 2.0 mm,
//escaping amount 1.0 mm
//(equivalent to G73 U2.0 R1.0)
G73 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.1 F0.3 //execute stock removal in turning,
//the sequence of block N01 ---> N02, finishing
//allowance in X direction is 0.8 mm, finishing
//allowance in Z direction is 0.1mm, feedrate
//0.3mm/rev
N01 G00 X17.0 //<--- TYPE I
G01 Z0.0
X20.0 Z-1.5
Z-20.0
X25.0
X30.0 Z-45.0
Z-52.0
G02 X36.0 Z-55.0 R3.0
G01 X45.0

G03 X55.0 Z-60.0 R5.0

N02 G01 Z-70.0
M28 X60.0 Z20.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, then return to
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.29.5 Example 2
• TYPE II

G92 S5000 //max. rotate speed 5000rpm
G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed 130 //m/min
G00 X120.0 Z-10.0 //positioning to start point
G73 U2.0 R1.0 H1 //depth of cutting in X direction is 2.0 mm,
//escaping amount is 1.0 mm
G73 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.1 F300 //execute stock removal in turning,
//the sequence of block N01 -→ N02, finishing
//allowance in X direction is 0.8 mm, //finishing
//allowance in Z direction is 0.1mm, feedrate
//0.3mm/rev

N01 G00 X101.0 Z-20.0 // <--- TYPE II

G01 X100.0
X30.0 Z-40.0
Z-60.0
X70.0 Z-70.0
Z-80.0
X50.0 Z-90.0
Z-110.0
N02 X100.0 Z-130.0
G28 X150.0 Z40.0 //positioning to specified mid-point, then
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.30 Stock Removal in Facing (G74)
G74 W(d) R(e) H__

G74 P(ns)_ Q(nf)_ U(Δu)_ W(Δw)_ F___ S___ T___

Δd: depth of each cut in Z axis direction, it can be specified by the parameter#4013 -when this statement is not
applied
e: escaping amount, it can be specified by the parameter#4012 when this statement is not applied.

ns: sequence number of the first block for the program of stock removal in facing.
nf: sequence number of the last block for the program of stock removal in facing.
Δu: distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter/radius designation)
Δw: distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction
F: feedrate
T: number of the tools
H: cutting type. Tpye I set 0. Type II set 1.
If user dosen’t set value in H, system will check determine the type automatically.
G74 command is stock removal in facing, generally used when the diameter of workpiece is relatively greater than
its length. That is, G74 is used when cutting amount in diameter direction is larger than axle direction, .
1.3.30.3 PIC


1. Positioning to point A (start point) through rapid traverse (G00) before cycle starts.
2. Tool offsets to C point according to specified finishing allowance. (ΔU/2 inX direction, ΔW in Z direction)
3. Tool moves Δd distance in Z axis direction, feed to the contour endface.
4. Tool escapes(retracts) e amount of distance in Z axis direction, but moves by the direction of 45°.Tool then
retracts in reversed X axis feed direction to the point that parallels in Z direction to the start point.
5. Move Δd amount of distance in Z direction, continuing next cycle.
6. In last cycle, tool cuts once along contour A' ---> B.
7. Positioning to point A through rapid traverse.
TYPE II: Usually be performs in the middle part of the workpiece. The figure need not show monotone increase or
decrease in the direction of Z axis. Only X axis needs to satisfy the condition that cutting amount is always increase
or decrease.


1.3.30.5 Notice
1. When ns and nf are not specified, specified W in G74 block is depth of cut Δd. Otherwise, W is finishing
allowance in Z direction.
2. Contour path is described by the blocks ns and nf, pathing through point A --> A' --> B. If X coordinate of
contour path is not monotone,
System will send out [MAR-002 the profile must be monotone along X, Z axis] alarm. If starting point (defined
by the block before G74 command)
is lower than contour path, System will send out [MAR-005 the position higher than the cycle start point]
alarm.
3. F, S or T function issued within block range of ns-->nf will be ignored. The relevant F,S and T functions
specified in G74 block are effective instead.
4. G00/G01 command in the G74 blocks will be used to perform linear cut to the workpiece.
5. Using G74 command, If H is equal to 0, system will interpret as TYPE I. If H is equal to 1, system will interpret
as TYPE II. If H is not specified,
system will diagnose automatically. If H variable is specified wrong, System will send out [MAR-018 ERROR
INPUT OF G73/G74 H VALUE] alarm
6. Sub-program can not be called during blocks ns-->nf.
7. All tool nose compensation commands will be disabled when G74 is in the block. However, the
compensation value will be added to the finishing allowance if exists.

8. Direction of finishing allowance: the direction dependeds on figures shown below. Path is AàA’àB.

1.3.30.6 Example 1

//spindle rotate CW
G74 W3.0 R1.0 H0//depth of cutting in Z direction is 3.0 mm,


G74 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.2 F0.6 //execute stock removal in turning,
//the sequence of block N01-->N02, finishing
//allowance in Z direction is 0.2mm, feedrate 0.6
//mm/rev
N01 G00 Z-55.0
G01 X60.0
Z-45.0
X50.0 Z-40.0
X40.0
G03 X30.0 Z-35.0 R5.0
G01 Z-30.0
X20.0 Z-15.0
X15.0
Z-1.5
N02 X12.0 Z0.0
M05 //spindle stops
M32 //program ends

1.3.30.7 Example 2

//spindle rotate CW
G74 W2.0 R1.0 H1 //depth of cutting in Z direction is 2.0 mm,
G74 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.1 F0.6 // execute stock removal in turning,
//the sequence of block N01-->N02, finishing
//allowance in Z direction is 0.1mm, feedrate 0.6
//mm/rev
N01 G00 X150.0 Z0.0
G01 Z-10.0
X140.0 Z-50.0
X130.0
X100.0 Z-20.0
X80.0
X50.0 Z-50.0
G03 X20.0 Z-35.0 R15.0

G01 X20.0

X0.0 Z-10.0
N02 X0.0 Z0.0
M05 //spindle stops
M32 //program ends
M30
1.3.31 Pattern Repeating Cycle (G75)
G75 UΔi WΔk R d

G75 P (ns) Q (nf) UΔu WΔw F___ S___ T___

Δi: distance in the X axis direction, this value can be specified by the parameter #4015 when this statement is not
applied.
ΔK: distance in the Z axis direction, this value can be specified by the parameter #4016 when this statement is not
applied.
d: number of cuts parallel to the contour, it can be specified by parameter #4017
ns: sequence number of the first block for the program of finishing shape
nf: sequence number of the last block for the program of finishing shape
Δu: distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction
Δw: distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction
F: feedrate
T: tool number of the tool in use (tool selection)
S: spindle speed
G75 command is a pattern repeating cycle. By this cutting cycle, it is possible to efficiently cut work whose rough
shape has already been made by a rough machining, and only slightly larger than finishing shape, such as forged or
cast workpieces, etc. Using G73, G74 wastes time on unnecessary routes. G75 command, instead, repeats cutting

along the contour of workpiece for specified times. Each cutting cycle the tool moves toward the fringe for an
appropriate amount of distance (depth).
1. Positioning to point A (start point) before cycle starts

2. Tool offsets to point C by the sum of specified finishing allowance (ΔU/2 for X axis, ΔW for Z axis) and cutting
value. (Δi for X axis, ΔW for Z axis)
3. Tool cuts through path A-->A'-->B, according given feed value and times of cutting to finish the cyclic
processes.
4. After finishing last cutting cycle, tool will position back to point automatically.
1.3.31.4 Example


G96 S130 M03 //constant surface speed, surface speed 130 //m/min,
//spindle rotate CW
G75 U15.0 W3.0 R3.0 //cutting value of X axis 15.0 mm, cutting
//value of Z axis 3.0 mm, cut 3 times
G75 P01 Q02 U0.8 W0.2 F300//execute Pattern Repeating,
//sequence of the block N01-->N02, finishing
//allowance of X axis 0.8 mm, finishing //allowance
//of Z axis 0.2 mm, feedrate 300 μm/rev
N01 G00 X40.0 Z5.0 //shape of cutting
G01 Z-30.0
X50.0
X60.0 Z-35.0
Z-70.0
G02 X70.0 Z-75.0 R5.0
G01 X100.0
G03 X120.0 Z-85.0 R10.0
N02 G01 Z-105.0
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.32 End Face (Z axis) Peck Drilling Cycle (G76)

G76 R e
G76 X(U) Z(W) P(Δi) Q(Δk) R (d) F

e: return amount(return amount in Z direction when cut Δk distance) ß the value can be setted by parameter #4011
when this statement is not applied.
X: X coordinate of point B（diameter）
Z: Z coordinate of point C
U: Incremental amount from A to B（diameter）
W: Incremental amount from A to C
Δi: Travel distance in X direction (display by radius, positive)
Δk: Depth of cutting Z direction (positive)
Δd: Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. (If set to be 0 , tool returns in original path)
F: Feedrate
G76 command is end face peck (Z axis) drilling cycle, generally used for grooving on the end face and peck drilling
in Z direction A cycle of cutting by ∆k and return by e(in Z axis direction) is repeated. Therefore G76 can be used not
only in grooving of workpiece endface and grooving during outer diameter cutting/cutting off, but also deep drilling
of workpiece.
1. Positioning to point A (start point) before cycle starts.

2. When execute G76, tool starts peck drilling from point A to point C. Peck drilling is performed in the way that
tool returns e amount each time tool cuts Δk distance(in Z direction). Tool immediately escapes Δd distance
(in X direction then rapid traverse to the position parallel with start point.
3. Afterwards, tool moves Δi distance in X direction, and continues the cycle (the steps above). When machine
performs G76 to point B, tool will return back to point A automatically.
1.3.32.4 Notice
1. e and Δd is specified by parameter R, when X or Z are specified. R is escaping amount in X axis direction.
2. When there is only parameter R after G76 command, it is escaping amount in Z axis direction. This is called
modal G code, in which G code is always effective until changing to new program.
3. If Q(Δk) is not specified, peck drilling will be canceled. Tool cuts once directly to the end point of Z axis.
1.3.32.5 Example

//spindle rotate CW
G00 X60.0 Z5.0 //positioning to point A
G76 R1.0
G76 X30.0 Z-20.0 P4.0 Q8.0 F100 //execute end face peck
//drilling cycle, after cutting 8.0 mm, tool escape
//1.0 mm distance, X axis moves 4.0 mm after
//cycle starts, feed rate 100 μm/rev


M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.33 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle (G77)
G77 R e
G77 X(U)___ Z(W)___ P(Δi )Q(Δk) R(Δd) F

e: return amount(after cutting Δi distance in X axis direction) ßit can be setted by parameter #4011
X: X coordinate of point C (diameter)
U: increment amount from B to C(diameter)
W: increment amount from A to B
Δi: depth of cut in Z direction (positive)
Δk: travel distance in X direction (display by radius, positive)
Δd: Relief amount of the tool at the cutting g bottom. (this value is 0 when it returns in origin path)
F: feedrate
G77 is outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle, generally used for grooving and peck drilling in X axis
direction. To avert the variable pith at the ends of thread, and to make tool retraction easier, grooving on the outer
diameter is performed. Furthermore, G77 is often called when cutting off the workpiece is needed in processing.

1. Positioning to point A (start point) before cycle starts.

2. When execute G77, tool starts peck drilling from point A to the specified point X. Peck drilling is performed in
the way that tool returns e amount each time tool cuts Δk distance(in Z direction). Tool immediately
escapes Δd distance (in X direction then rapid traverse to the position parallel with start point.
3. Afterwards, tool moves Δi distance in Z direction, and continues the cycle (same steps above in operation
2.). When machine performs G77 to the terminal point B, tool will return back to point A automatically.
1.3.33.4 Notice
1. e and Δd is specified by parameter R, when X or Z are specified. R is escaping amount in Z axis direction.
2. When there is only parameter R after G77 command, it is escaping amount in Z axis direction. This is
called modal G code, in which G code is always effective until changing to new program.
3. If P(Δi ) is not specified, peck drilling will be canceled. Tool cuts once directly to the end point of X axis.

1.3.33.5 Example

//spindle rotate CW
G00 X70.0 Z20.0 //approaching to workpiece
Z-20.0 //positioning to cutting start point
G77 R1.0
G77 X30.0 Z-35.0 P8.0 Q4.0 D0.0 F150 //execute Outer
//Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle, after
//cut 8.0 mm, then tool escapes 1.0 mm, Z axis
//moves4.0mmafter first cycle, feed rate 100
//μm/rev
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

1.3.34 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle (G78)
G78 P m r a Q ∆dmin R d ;
G78 X(U)___ Z(W)___ R ∆i P(∆k) Q(∆d) H___ ( F__ or E__ ) ;

P:
m: repetition count in finishing, specified by system parameter #4044.
r: chamfering amount, specified by system parameter #4043.
a: angle of tool tip, angle from 800, 600, 550, 300, 290 and 00 can be specified or specified by system parameter
#4042.
Q(∆dmin): minimum cutting depth , specified by system parameter #4045
d: finishing allowance, specified by system parameter #4041
X(U): X coordinate in end point(bottom of tooth)
Z(W): Z coordinate in end point(bottom of tooth)
∆i: difference of thread radius
∆k: height of thread
∆d: depth of cut in first cycle
F: lead of thread in metric system (unit: mm/tooth)
E: lead of thread in imperial system (unit: tooth/inch)
H: numbers of thread (ex: H3 is three thread type cutting. Multiple thread F function is the distance neighbor
thread)
By G78 command (multiple thread cutting cycle),system automatically program the repeated paths which is
needed to accomplish the thread cutting process. The controller computes counts of thread cutting needed , depth
of cutting and start points of each cutting cycle according to the specified parameter assigned by user.

1.3.34.3 Ways of thread cutting

1. G33(thread cutting): A 4-block sequence of commands is needed to finish one thread cutting, thus the
programming of thread cutting in G33 is inconvenient and time-consuming.
2. G21(thread cutting cycle): A “single” cycle command of thread cutting. we can use one block of command to
finish thread cutting, but it also need to repeating thread cutting many times so the program is also too
long.
3. G78(multiple thread cutting cycle): Byusing only one commandG78finishes all needed cycle in thread
cutting.Therefore G78 much simplifies shortens the procedure of programming.

cutting path:
1. Positioning to point A(start point) by rapid traverse before cycle starts.

2. The tool cuts along path A-->B-->E-->A, depending on the cutting feed to finish first time of threading.
3. After rough thread cutting, machine performs equivolume cutting (in sequence) accordong to finishing
allowance(d) and repetition count in finishing(m) to accomplish finishing cutting.
4. After final cutting (along A-->C-->D-->E-->A), tool stops at point A.
The way of feed in thread cutting and the depths of each cut:

1.3.34.5 Notice
1. From version 10.114.56E/10.116.0E/10.116.5 (included), the spindle override of entire thread-cutting cycle is
locked at the value of the start of cycle, i.e., the spindle override button is in vain during thread-cutting
cycle.
2. Before version 10.114.56E/10.116.0E/10.116.5, during thread-cutting cycle, the spindle override is locked at
100% when cutting and resume to setting of control panel while retracting. Therefore, one apply thread-
cutting cycle with a spindle override that is not equal to 100% will find the spindle is under a frequent
acceleration and deceleration situation.
1.3.34.6 Example 1
Compare with example one of G21

G00 X50.0 Z70.0 //positioning to the start point of cycle


G78 P011060 Q0.15 R0.02//execute multiple repetitive cycle,
//finishing cutting once, escaping amount=Lead,
//angle of tooth 60°, Min. depth of cutting 0.15
//mm, finishing allowance 0.02 mm
G78 X36.75 Z20.0 R0.0 P1.624 Q1.0 H3 F2.5//difference radius
//of multiple thread cutting cycle is 0 mm, depth
//of thread 1.624 mm, first cutting value is 1.0
//mm, lead of thread 2.5 mm, three tooth thread
//cutting
G28 X60.0 Z75.0 //positioning to specified mid-point and return to
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.34.7 Example 2
compare with example two of G21, single tooth type, Pitch＝2.5 mm

G00 X50.0 Z55.0 //positioning to start point of cycle
G78 P011060 Q0.15 R0.02//execute multiple repetitive cycle,

//finishing cutting once, escaping amount=Lead,

//angle of tooth 60°, Min. depth of cutting 0.15
//mm, finishing allowance 0.02 mm
G78 X36.75 Z15.0 R-10.0 P1.624 Q1.0 F2.5//difference radius of
//multiple thread cutting cycle is 10.0 mm, depth of
//thread 1.624 mm, first cutting value is 1.0 mm,
//lead of thread 2.5 mm, single tooth thread cutting
G28 X60.0 Z70.0 //positioning to specified mid-point and then return
//to machine zero point
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.35 Canned Cycle For Drilling (G80～G89)
The canned cycle for drilling simplifies the program by instruct the CNC to perform necessary moves in only one
block containing G functions. A customized canned cycle is a preset sequence of events initiated by a single block of
data. The objective of a canned cycle is to simplify the process normally be performed through several blocks.
• Table of Canned Cycle

Note 1: use M04 command to reverse the spindle.

Note 2: Whether G83 ,and G87 is cutting feed or intermittent feed is decided by Q command.
1.3.35.2 Drilling cycle figure

※The difference between G83/G87, G84/G88, G85/G89 is the direction of drilling-axis. G83, G84, G85 are for Z axis
and G87, G88, G89 are for X axis.
In general, the drilling cycle consists of the following six operation sequences:
Operation 1 positioning of X(Z) and C axis
Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level
Operation 3 Hole machining
Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5 Retraction to point R level
Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point
※Two modal G code specify the ways of drilling cycle.

In returning, G98/G99 specifies whether the tool retract to point-R level or initial level.(an illustration is shown
below)
If the regression position is initial level/ point-R level, the start point of next cutting is initial level/ point-R level.
The initial level doesn’t change even when drilling is performed in G99 mode.

1.3.36 Front/Side Drilling Cycle (G83/G87)

Command Form
G83 X(U) C(H) Z(W) R Q P F K M

or
G87 Z(W) C(H) X(U) R Q P F K M

X(U) C or Z(W) C : Hole position data
Z(W) C or X(U) C : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole
R : The distance from the initial level to point R level
Q : Depth of cut for each cutting feed
P : Dwell time at the bottom of the hole (sec)
F : cutting federate
K : Number of repetitions
M : M code for clamping C axis. C axis is unclamped when Clamp Code adds 1 (Unclamp Code)
Description
G83/G87 command is front/side drilling cycle, generally used in drilling of the lathe, it uses rotating tool to do front/
side drilling cycle to clamped workpiece(fixed).

1.3.36.1 Note
Using G83 or G87, if absolute value of argument R is larger than the relative Z or X coordinate of 【G83 or G87
command】 and the block before, System will send out [MAR-011 the R level is lower the bottom level of hole] alarm.
If Z or X coordinate is not specified, System will send out [MAR-012 absent bottom level, Z, in canned cycle] alarm.
1.3.36.2 PIC
TYPE I: High speed deep hole drilling cycle (Custom Parameter No.4001= 1)
TYPE II: deep hole drilling cycle 1(Custom Parameter No.4001=0

TYPE III: Drilling without specified Q
Type IV：Deep hole drilling cycle 2 (Custom Parameter No. 4001=2)

1.3.36.3 Example
Suppose M31 is the command of Clamp for C axis, M32 is the command of Unclamp for C axis.

S1000 //spindle speed 1000 rpm
G00 X50.0 //rapid traverse to start point
G98 G83 Z-40.0 C0.0 R-5.0 P10.0 Q500 F500 M31
// first hole drilling of C axis at 0°
C90.0 M31 // second hole drilling of C axis at 90°
C180.0 M31 // third hole drilling of C axis at 180°
G80 //cycle cancels
M30 //program ends


1.3.37 Front/Side Tapping Cycle (G84/G88)
G84 / G88 command is Front(Z)/Side(X) Tapping cycle, generally used in tapping of the lathe. Rotating tool
performs front/side tapping cycle on clamped workpiece(fixed ).

G84 X(U) C(H) Z(W) R P F K M
or
G88 Z(W) C(H) X(U) R P F K M

X(U) C or Z(W) C : coordinate of the hole
Z(W) C or X(U) C : position(absolute mode) of the bottom of the hole (The distance from point R to the bottom of the
hole)
R : The distance from the initial level to point R level(always positive)
P : Dwell time at the bottom of the hole (sec)
F : cutting federate(mm/rev), equivalent to the pitch of metric system
M : M code for clamping C axis. C axis is unclamped when Clamp Code adds 1 (Unclamp Code)
Q : Depth of cut in peck tapping, incremental and positive. (System is set to be normal tapping without specified
value)
• TYPE I

1. Action starts, Z axis rapid traverse to point R by G00 (R mudt be in incremental value)
2. Start tapping, pitch is the specified F value.
3. When Z axis reachs the specified Z depth of G84(Z absolute / W incremental)
4. Spindle stops.
5. Dwell P(sec) (with floating point, unit : 1 s, without floating point, unit : 0.001 s)
6. Spindle rotates CCW (use M04 inCNC)
7. Escape to point R by the feedrate of tapping.
8. Dwell several second (Dwell time set at Pr4003. Defaul value is 0 second)
9. Spindle rotates CW (M03)
10. Return to initial point(G98) or stop at point R(G99)
• TYPE II High-Speed peck tapping (Custom Parameter No.4004=1)

1. Rapid traverse (G00) to specified point (X, C) when process starts.

2. Rapid traverse (G00) to specified point R.
3. Interpolate (G01) depth of cut (Q) from the present position.
4. Spindle stops and rotates CCW. Use G01 to retract height d (set by Pr4005).
5. Spindle stops and rotate CW. Interpolate (G01) to the position which is a depth of cut (Q) below the last
tapping position.
6. Spindle stops and rotates CCW. Use G01 to retract height d (set by Pr4005).
7. Repeat the above steps until tapping to the end of hole.
8. Dwell P seconds then rotate CCW.
9. By G01 feedrate, return to specified point R (G99).
10. Dwell a few seconds (set by Pr 4003, default value is 0 second) then rotate CCW.
11. Rapid traverse(G00) to the start point (G98).
• TYPE II: Peck tapping (Custom Parameter No.4004=0)

1. Rapid traverse (G00) to specified point (X, C) when process starts.

2. Rapid traverse (G00) to specified point R.
3. Interpolate (G01) depth of cut (Q) from the present position.
4. Spindle stops and rotates CCW. Use G01 to retract to the point-R level.
5. Spindle stops and rotate CW. Interpolate (G01) to the position which is a depth of cut (Q) below the last
tapping position.
6. Spindle stops and rotates CCW. Use G01 to retract to the point-R level.
7. Repeat the above steps until tapping to the end of hole.
8. Dwell P seconds then rotate CCW.
9. By G01 feedrate, return to specified point R (G99).
10. Dwell a few seconds (set by Pr 4003, default value is 0 second) then rotate CCW.
11. Rapid traverse (G00) to the initial level (G98).
1.3.37.3 Notice
1. when first time tapping, spindle has to be initiated to rotate CW.
2. If initial point is the same as point R, we do not need to specify R.
3. If there is no power tool seat on lathe, the parameter X ,C ,K ,M of G84 need not to be specified.
4. When G84/G88 ends, spindle returns to rotate CW.
5. G84/G88 is canceled by G80. When G00/G01/G02/G03 in the program be executed, G84/G88 will also be
canceled automatically.
6. If M4 is specified behind G84/G88, it is set to be the left hand tapping.
7. Please avoid to use M code behind G84/G88.
8. Using G84 or G88, if absolute value of argument R is larger than the relative Z or X coordinate of 【G84 or G88
command】 and the block before, System will send out [MAR-011 the R level is lower the bottom level of hole]
alarm. If Z or X coordinate is not specified, System will send out [MAR-012 absent bottom level, Z, in canned
cycle] alarm.
1.3.37.4 Example

Suppose M31 is Clamp command of C axis M32 is Unclamp command of C axis

M03 S500 //spindle is initiated to rotate CW 500rpm
G00 X50.0 //positioning to start point by rapid traverse
G98 G84 Z-40.0 C0.0 R-5.0 P10.0 F500 M31 // first hole drilling
//of C axis at 0°
G80 M05 //cancel tapping mode, spindle stops
M30 //program ends
1.3.38 Front/Side Boring Cycle (G85/G89)

G85 X(U)__ C(H)__ Z(W)__ R__ P__ F__ K__ M__;
or
G89 Z(W)__ C(H)__ X(U)__ R__ P__ F__ K__ M__;

X(U) C or Z(W) C : Hole position/coordinate of the hole
Z(W) C or X(U) C : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole/ position of the bottom of the hole (absolute
mode)
R : The distance from the initial level to the point R level
P : Dwell time at the bottom of hole (s)
F : Feedrate
M : M code for C axis clamping, C axis is unclamped when Clamp Code adds 1 (Unclamp Code)
G85/G89 command is Front/Side Boring cycle, used in boring of the CNC lathe. The rotating tool performs front/side
tapping cycle to process the clamped workpiece(fixed).

1.3.38.3 Note
Using G85 or G89, if absolute value of argument R is larger than the relative Z or X coordinate of 【G85 or G89
command】 and the block before, System will send out [MAR-011 the R level is lower the bottom level of hole] alarm.
If Z or X coordinate is not specified, System will send out [MAR-012 absent bottom level, Z, in canned cycle] alarm.
1.3.38.4 PIC
1.3.38.5 Example
Suppose M31 is Clamp command of C axis M32 is Unclamp command of C axis.

S1000 M03 //spindle rotates CW, rotate speed 1000 rpm
G00 X50.0 //positioning to start point
G98 G85 Z-40.0 C0.0 R-5.0 P100 F500 M31
// first hole drilling of C axis at 0
G80 //cycle cancels
M30 //program ends

1.3.39 Coordinate System Setting/Max. Spindle Speed Setting (G92)

G92 X Z
or
G92 S

X ,Z: basic coordinate system position setting (G92) in program coordinate system
S: spindle speed
G92 command has two functions. One is coordinate system setting and another is Max. speed of spindle setting G92
can define any appropriate position to be zero point of workpiece coordinate. The distance from the position of
tool to the machine zero point is used to set a zero point of new coordinate. After setting, tool starts machining
from this point and the absolute command is calculated according to the new reference coordinate. This command
can also be used in the offset of coordinate system. If the old coordinate is (X, Z), the new coordinate will be (X＋ΔU,
Z＋ΔW). When using G96 (constant surface speed control) command, in order to avoid the excessively high speed of
spindle speed due to too small effective diameter of workpiece , G92 is also used to limit the max. speed of spindle.
1.3.39.3 Example
Coordinate system setting

1.3.40 Unit Setting of Feed Amount (G94/G95)

G94 F
G95 F
This command set feed amount unit of F function (tool movement per minute or per revolution). G94 is for feed per
minute (mm/min inch/min), G95 is for feed per revolution (mm/rev, inch/rev).
1.3.40.3 PIC

1.3.41 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96/G97)

G96 S constant surface speed control ON
G97 S constant surface speed control OFF
Description

G96 command specifies the surface speed of the contact point between tool and workpiece. G97 is constant surface
speed cancel command, and also functions to set spindle speed. To control the surface speed while the diameter of
the workpiece varies, a lathe operator uses G96 to specify the constant surface speed. If a constant spindle rotate
speed is to be set, regardless the value of the diameter workpiece has, G97 can be performed. The surface speed
follows the formula shown below:
V: surface speed, (use G96 to specify a value, unit M/MIN or FEET/MIN).

D: valid diameter of workpiece, unit mm or inch
N: spindle rotate speed, specified by G97, unit RPM.
1.3.41.2 Example
• Constant surface speed:
G92 S2000 //limit max. rotate speed of spindle by G92

G96 S130 M03 //cutting speed maintains to be130m/min
Notice: G92 often be used with G96. G92 can limit max. rotate speed of spindle. I Following above example, spindle
rotate speed of the workpiece with 10mm diameter is
By G92, the max. rotate speed of spindle is limited to be no more than 2000rpmtherefore preventing accidental
unclamping due to the excessively large centrifugal force and insufficient clamping force. G92 is sometimes working
in conjunction with G96.

• Constant rotate speed
G97 S1300 M03 //spindle rotate speed maintains to be is 1300 rev/min
1.3.42 Chamfer,Corner Round ,Angle Command
1.3.42.1 Chamfer
• Command (,C ,R ,A)
In the mechanical drawing, we can input the angle of straight lines, chamfering, corner rounding, and other
specification values directly by using the following functions. The system will insert the rounding and chamfering
values in the straight lines under enough space. This program would be effective in automatic operation mode
only.
• Chamfer (C), Corner Round (R) function
In the continuous single blocks, straight and arc commands formed the corner of arbitrary angles user assigned.
System could execute the cutting of chamfering and R rounding by adding“, C_”or“, R_”, in the end of the first
single block. Chamfering C and rounding R commands are available in both absolute value and incremental value
command.

The feedrate of “,C_”及“,R_”can be specified by E_. When user leaves E_ unspecified, the feedrate of “,C_”及“,R_”
in that block is set to be the same as the feedrate in next block.
• Chamfering ( ,C_ )
In the first single block of two continuous blocks (including no arc), specify “,C_” command could execute corner
chamfering. In the case including arc, it will base on the length of arc.
1.3.42.4 Example
(the chamfer of straight line and arc)

1. absolute command:
G28 X0.0 Z0.0 // Chamfering C20.0 between the
G00 X50.0 Z100.0 // movement of these two blocks
G01 X150.0 Z50.0 F100.0 , C20.0
G01 X50. Z0

2. incremental command:
G28 X0.0 Z0.0 // Chamfering C20.0 between the
G00 U50.0 W100.0 // movement of these two blocks
G01 U100.0 W-50.0 F100, C20.0
G01 U-100.0 W-50.0

1.3.42.5 Corner Round R( ,R_)

,R

R: for radius of corner and arc.
In the first single block of two continuous blocks (including no arc), specify “,R_” command could execute corner
corner round R function.
1.3.42.8 Example
(Corner between straight line and arc)
1. Absolute command
G28 X0.0 Z0.0 // Rounding R10.0 between the
G00 X60.0 Z100.0 // movement of these two blocks
G01 X160.0 Z50.0 F100 , R10.0
G02 X60.0 Z0.0 I0.0 K-50.0

2. Incremental command
G28 X0.0 Z0.0 // Rounding R10.0 between the
G00 U60.0 Z100.0 // movement of these two blocks

G01 U100.0 W-50.0 F100, R10.0

G02 U-100.0 W-50.0 I0.0 K-50.0
1.3.42.9 Angle Command ( , A_)

G01 Z (X ) , A //specify the angle and the coordinate of X or Z.
1.3.42.11 Example
1.3.42.12 Geometric Function Command

In continuous linear interpolation command, if it is hard to get the intersection point of two lines. We can use the
sloping angle of the first line, absolute coordinate value of second line and the sloping angle of the first line to be
the command, and then NC controller will compute the end of the first line. The continuous straight line corner
function can be executed.
In continuous linear interpolation command, if it is hard to get the intersection point of two lines. We can use the
sloping angle of the first line, absolute coordinate value of second line and the sloping angle of the first line to be
the command, and then NC controller will compute the end of the first line. The continuous straight line corner
function can be executed.

G01 , A F //specified angle
X Z , A //specified the end coordinate value and the angle of the next block

1.3.42.14 Example
1.3.42.15 Notice
1. This function is effective only under G01. It is not effective under other interpolation or positioning
command.
2. From the + direction of horizontal axis in selected plane, the angle is positive for CCW , negative for CW.
3. The sloping angle can be specified in start point or end point of start side or end side. The sloping angle is
specified in start side or end side is determined by NC automatically.
4. If we use the second way to specify, we need to specify the end point of the second block to be absolute
coordinate.
1.3.42.16 Relative usage
• TYPE I
In the first angle command, we can specify Chamfer command or Angle Round command.

• Format
• Command Format
• TYPE Ⅱ
After Chamfering command ,angle round command (R), we can continue to do linear angle command.

• Format
• TYPE Ⅲ
After linear angle command, we can continue to do linear angle command.
1.3.42.17 Notice
1. Round angle value cannot be inserted in threading area.

2. By directly entering the continuous command in next area according to the drawing size, the end point of
front area is already specified. Stop cannot be executed in single area, but dwell can be executed in the front
area.
3. Allowance range of angle computing is +1∘.
(1) X_ , A_
(when the angle is 0∘+1 , 180∘+1 , the alarm will be issued.)
(2) Z_ , A_
(when the angle is 90∘+1 , 270∘+1 , the alarm will be issued.)
4. If the angle between two lines is in between of +1∘, it will be alarming when we computer the intersection.
5. If the angle between two lines is in between of +1∘, chamfer angle and round angle can be ignored.
• Geometric Function Usage Table




1.3.42.18 Example
Program description: (input diameter by Metric system)

G01 X60.0 A90.0, C1.0 F80 //linear interpolation, the angle
//between the straight line and horizontal axis is “+90°”, and
//chamfering C1.0 angle at the next block, feed rate
//80μm/rev
Z-30.0, A180.0 R6.0 // linear interpolation, the angle
//between the straight line and horizontal axis is “+180°”,
//and rounding R6.0 angle at the next block
X100.0, A90.0 // linear interpolation, cutting to
//specified point, the angle between the straight line and
//horizontal axis is “+90°”
,A170.0 ,R20.0 // linear interpolation, the angle
//and rounding R20.0 angle at the next block, the end point is
//specified in the next block
X300.0 Z-180.0, A112.0, R15.0 // linear interpolation, the angle
//and rounding R15.0 angle at the next block
Z-230.0, A180.0 // linear interpolation, the angle


//cutting to specified position

1.3.43 Tool Compensation Function (T Function)
T ＊＊ (two code form)

T ＊＊＊＊ (four code form)
Tool compensation function is mainly for selecting the using tool, also be called as T function, usually used in
conjunction with tool exchange command (M06). Therefore tool switch can be automatically executed by tool
numbers.
Two code form: the specification is for tool number ,tool length compensation and wear compensation selection.
Four code form: the first two codes are for tool number, the other two codes are for tool length and wear
compensation.
When an user executes T__ command, the compensation value is first selected but the compensation action is not
yet performed. When a block with movement action in it is performed, compensation action is executed.
• Modal Of Tool Length Compensation
Tool length compensation

Execute tool length compensation at the basic position of program.
The basic position of program: center of tool seat or tool nose of basic tool:

Tool nose of basic tool
1.3.43.3
Principle of Tool Length Compensation
• Tool compensation starts
Tool compensation action starts after executing T command and executing movement command.

• Number change of tool length compensation

When number of tool changes, the corresponded tool compensation value of the new tool is added into the
original offset.
• Tool length compensation cancel

Number of compensation is 0.
When number of compensation is “0”in T command, compensation cancels.
Compensation value of command is “0”

When compensation value of tool length compensation number is “0”in T function, the compensation
cancels.

1.3.43.4 Tool Nose Wear Compensation
• Tool nose wear compensation value setting

System can performs compensate function when tool nose wears. The compensation value will be added
into geometric compensation. Geometric compensation = tool length compensation + wear compensation.
When we specify the number of compensation, geometric compensation will be executed.

1.3.44 Spindle Rotate Speed Function : S code command

S_
Description
S function is spindle speed command, specifying constant revolution per minute or constant surface speed per
minute of spindle by G96/G97.
1.3.44.2 Example
G96 S150 M03 //constant surface speed of spindle,150 m/min.
G97 S500 M03 //spindle keeps 500 rev/min
1.3.44.3 Notes
Consider the situation when the tool spindle of processing is shifted among the spindle group. For example, if the
current processing spindle is the second spindle and the first spindle is to be selected at speed of 150RPM
clockwise, “M03 S1=150” should be specified in order to avoid the situation that the speed is specified to the second
spindle due to insufficient time for spindle shifting.
1.3.45 Feed Function: F code command

F__
In cutting mode, the specified movement speed of tool in the program is called feedrate. The axis feed mode to be
used is selected by designating the feed function G code (G94 or G95).G94 is the designation of feed per

minute(mm/min) mode, while G95 is feed per revolution(mm/rev) mode. For example, command F300 in G94 mode
represents for300 mm/min and command F0.5 in G95 mode represents for0.5 mm/rev.
1.3.45.3 Example
G94 G01 X100.0 Y100.0 F300 //linear interpolation, feed rate 300
//mm/min
G95 G01 X100.0 Y100.0 F0.5 //linear interpolation, feed rate 0.5
//mm/rev
1.3.46 Programmable Mirror Image (G68)
G68 Start X axis programmable mirror image

G69 Cancel programmable mirror image

With double turrets in lathe, we can mirror the X coordinate with X0 by G code. It is more convenient with double
turrets because it is not necessary to consider the moving direction of the turret while programming.
1. The reversal or compensation direction of the circular interpolation, tool nose radius compensation and the
coordinate reversal is opposite.
2. Because this instruction is used in local coordinate, the center of the mirror still moves when the counter is
reset or the working coordinate is changed.
3. When execute the instructions (G28, G30) within the G68, programmable mirror image is effective between
the paths through the start point to the middle point, ineffective between path through the middle point to
the origin.
4. When execute the return from reference point instruction (G29) within G68, programmable mirror image is
effective between the paths through the start point to the middle point.
1.3.46.3 Attention
If cancel programmable mirror image when the tool is out of the center of the mirror , the absolute location cannot
match the mechanical location . As figure shown below, this situation lasts until the instruction is set to specify the
absolute location [positioning of G90] or machine zero point return G28 and G30 are set. If we re-assign location of
the center mirror under motionless mode in absolute location, the specified location will be unexpected. So we
should cancel programmable mirror image at the center of the mirror or use G90 after cancelling programmable
mirror image.

1.3.46.4 Example
Program illustration:
T0101 //turret 1
G01 Z180. X40. //position-1
Z120.
T0202 //turret 2
G68 //enable X-axis mirror image
G01 Z120. X80. //position 2

Z60.
T0101 //turret 1
G69 //disable X-axis mirror image
G01 Z60. X120. //position 3
M99
1.3.47 Decimal Point Input
The input parameter with decimal point is interpreted as prevailing unit (mm, inch, sec...etc). On the other hand,
the input parameter without decimal point is interpreted as least input unit (mm, ms…etc) which has been set in a
system.
1.3.47.2 Example
1.3.48 Spindle Synchronization
When two or more spindles of tool are available, user can make some special application by cooperating with the
spindles. For example, in catching workpiece, two spindles have to have the same rotate speed and the phase
angles need to be the same or fixed. Two spindles have to be synchronization. This is Spindle Synchronization.
• Action description
Spindle synchronization position adjust
Spindle has to change the sleeve when cutting different workpieces(cylinder, hexagonal, octagonal pillar…
etc.). When the sleeve on the spindle is set up, it can hardly maintain a fixed angle each time. The difference
of angle phase has to be known before spindle synchronization, thus calibration of the origin is necessary
before synchronization starts. The steps of calibration of the origin are as followed:
1. Set the home offset to be 0 (Pr881~Pr896).
2. Clamps the workpiece by basic spindle and use micrometer gauge to adjust the datum on the
workpiece. Then set the location of basic spindle to the home offset. .
3. Calibrate synchronous spindle by the same way in step 2 to adjust datum.

4. Home positions of two spindles are the workpiece synchronization position.
Format
Enable spindle synchronization
G114.1 R_
R phase difference (When R isn’t set, R stands for the synchronization speed. It is usually used on the
cylinder.)
Disable spindle synchronization
G113
Synchronization success signal

1. “S62 Bit On” indicates the synchronization success and the basic spindle and synchronous spindle
both achieve the same speed/phase.
2. After the synchronization success, if the synchronization error is too high (over 0.5 degrees), system
will turn S62 Bit off.
1.3.48.2 NOTE
1. Two synchronization spindles have to be servo motor. The spindle type only support Type3 (Pr1791~1796). If
user set the wrong type, the alarm (Cor093) will be issued.
2. The motion parameters of two servo motors have to be set the same. EX: acceleration time (Pr1831~1836),
spindle motor speed up to 1000RPM/Sec acceleration time (Pr1851~1856).
3. If the position loop gain (Kp, Pr 181~196) of two servo motor are not the same, user has to check that Kp of
controller and driver are the same. Otherwise, the motion system performed will be unexpected.G114.1 is a
model G-Code. Only when the signal of spindle synchronization is on and both of spindles have positive
(negative) rotate command (M03, M04), spindle synchronization will be start and output the signal of spindle
synchronization success.
4. To start synchronization transfer worlpiece from static condition, set the minimum spindle rotate speed to
be 0.
5. After spindle synchronization, synchronous spindle doesn’t act on M03, M04, M05 and S code but only record
until synchronization is disabled.
6. After spindle synchronization, rotation command will be sent to basic spindle and synchronous spindle.
Synchronous spindle direction of rotation will follow basic spindle and Pr1861~1866 (Spindle Sync. basic
spindle direction). M03 or M04 can’t control the direction.
7. When user pushes emergency stop, both spindle rotation and spindle synchronization stop.
8. If signal of spindle synchronization is on but Pr4021, 4022 is not exist, the alarm (Cor91, Cor92) will be issued.
9. After spindle synchronization success, user can’t orientate spindle.
10. When signal of spindle synchronization success (S62) is on, by pressing down “Reset” button, system will
disable G114.1 synchronization state only after two spindles have stopped.
11. When reading feedback from the encoder, a 8-usec delay exists between the port and the next one. The
more ports in between the longer delay time is. Spindle synchronization has to take care about phase. If
using spindle synchronization to catch workpiece, user has to put two spindles on the port that is next to
each other. EX: P1 and P2 are on the same servo card to decrease the phase error.
12. When signal of spindle synchronization success (S62) is on and G113 is specified to disable spindle
synchronization, system will practically disable synchronization until achieve the speed program specifies.
1.3.48.3 Example
Take the first spindle to be basic spindle and the second spindle to be synchronous as example. M103 and M104 are
command for “spindle rotate in positive direction”. M105 and M205 are command for “spindle stop”. M81 is

command for “wait until synchronization success (S62)”. The above M-Code commands are all needed to be
specified in PLC.
• Dual program example
• Single Program example

1.3.48.4 Reference
1.3.49 M Code Command Description

Auxiliary function is used to control the On and OFF of the machine function. The miscellaneous function (M code) is
specified by a two-digit number following address M.
The specific number and applications of M codes are described below:
M Function Table

• 1.3.49.1 Dwell (M00)
When M00 is executed by CNC, the spindle stops, the feed dwells, and the cutting liquid is off. The dwell enables an
operator to inspect workpiece/tool dimensions, calibrate and make compensation of the workpiec. The “M00 signal
button” on the panel is used to control whether a program should be dwelled or not.
• 1.3.49.2 Optional dwell (M01)
The function of M01 is similar to M00. M01 is valid only when “optional stop button” turns ON, and the program is
therefore dwelled. On the contrary, M01 is invalid while the button turns OFF.
• 1.3.49.3 End of program (M02)
M02 should be specified at the end of a program (if required). When M02 is executed during operation, system If
there is M02 command at the end of program and CNC execute to this command, the machine will stop all action at
the same time. If an user wants to restart the program, it is effective only by pressing the “RESET” and the
“PROGRAM START” button in sequence.

• 1.3.49.4 Spindle rotates CW (M03)
M03 command spindle to rotate CW. When M03 is used in conjunction with S function, spindle is specified to rotate
CW in a given speed. .
• 1.3.49.5 Spindle rotates CCW (M04)
M04 command spindle to rotate CCW.

• 1.3.49.6 Spindle stops (M05)
M05 command spindle to stop. When shifting gears or changing the direction of a rotating axis is required, M05 is
specified to stop the spindle first.
• 1.3.49.7 Tool exchange (M06)
M06 is specified to execute tool exchange. Note that M06 include no tool choosing, thus it must be used in
conjunction with T function.
• 1.3.49.8 Cutting liquid ON/OFF (M08/M09)
M08 is specified to turn cutting liquid ON; M09 is specified to turn cutting liquid OFF
• 1.3.49.9 Spindle locates and stops (M19)
This command can locate the spindle at specified corner
• 1.3.49.10 Program ends (M30)
M30 command is specified at the end of the program. When program executes M30, all actions will stop, and the
memory will be reset and return to the beginning state of the program.
• 1.3.49.11 Subprogram Control (M98/M99)
Subprogram is the parameter that includes fixed cutting procedures or repeatedly used parameters. We should
prepare it in advance and put it into the memory. We call from the main program when we need to use. Calling
subprogram is executed by M98, and it will stop by executing M99.
When running M02 and M30 inthe subprogram, system regards it as the end of the subprograms and returns to the
main program.
Format
(1). M98 P H L Calling of subprogram

P: the number of subprogram called (when P is unspecified, system specifys the program itself, and it is valid only
in memory running or MDI mode)
H: the starting executing sequence number in subprogram called (when H is unspecified, system will execute from
the forefront)
L: count of subprogram repeated times.

(2). M99 P L subprogram ends

P: the sequence number of caller program for returning back after subprogram ends.
• 1.3.49.12 Making and Executing of Subprogram
(1) The normal format as below
(2) Main program use with calling of subprogram, and sequence of executing

• Special usage of subprogram

(3) We can execute subprogram by adding P__ function after M99 in the end of the final block. After finishing this
program, it will return to main program, and execute the block which the sequence number specified by P_
function is in.
(4) Subprogram also can execute P_ command with H_ command in M98. The system will execute the subprogram
(specified by P_) from the sequence number specified by H_. . The subprogram is therefore versatile. With open
only one subprogram to execute muti-purpose function, the system can save more memory space.

(5) If user leaves P_ command unspecified and only specify H_ command in M98, the system will execute from the
sequence number of main program that specified by H_ command. After executing M99, it will return to the next
block of M98 and continue to execute the program.
Example cutting a tank, use “calling of subprogram” to execute repeating machining

(1). First way: P command in block of M98

＊Main program.
T03 //use tool NO.3
G97 S710 M03 //constant rotate speed of spindle, 710 rpm CW
G00 X45.0 Z-12.0 //positioning to the above of first tank
M98 P1234 H102 L4 //call the subprogram of sequence number
//“O1234”, machining from the block of N102
//and repeating 4 times
M05 //spindle stops
M30

＊Subprogram.
O1234
G00 X45.0 Z-12.0
G01 X30.0 F200 ßStart from this block
//linear interpolation to the bottom of the tank, feedrate
//200μm/rev
G00 X45.0 //escaping to start position
W-2.0 //move2mmtoward negative direction of Z
G01 X30.0 //linear interpolation to the bottom of the tank

G00 X45.0 // escaping to start position

W-12.0 // move12mmtoward negative direction of Z, and wait
//for cutting next tank
M99 //return to main program

(2). Second way: without executing P_ command in block of M98

＊Main program.
T03 //use tool NO.3
G97 S710 M03 //constant rotate speed of spindle, 710 rpm CW
G00 X45.0 Z-12.0 //positioning above the first tank
M98 H0010 L4 //execute from the block of main program sequence
//number N0010, and repeat 4 times
M05 //spindle stops
M30 //program ends

N0010
G01 X30.0 F200 ßstart with this block after executing M98
//linear interpolation to the bottom of the tank,
feedrate 200μm/rev
G00 X45.0 //escaping to start point
W-2.0 // move2mmtoward negative direction of Z
G01 X30.0 //linear interpolation to the bottom of the tank
G00 X45.0 //escaping to start point
W-12.0 // move12mmtoward negative direction of Z, and
//wait for cutting next tank
M99 //return the next block N006 of M98

1.3.50 Postscript
1.3.50.1 Description of lathe double program
Description
To save the time of the processing, the SYNTEC lathe’s controllers can drive two programs simultaneously. The two
program can drive two pairs of turret to execute linear interpolation and circular interpolation at the same time.
The system therefore achieves the most effective lathe status while processing workpieces in external diameter and
internal diameter simultaneously.
• The description of the related instructions with double program:
$1→the contents after the instruction in the program is the first group
$2→the contents after the instruction in the program is the second group
The second group in the program must end with M99.
G04.1 P_→synchronous instruction, G04.1 P1 inthe first group and one in the second group would wait for each
other until synchronization succeeds and go to next section.

G04.1 P2 waits for each other until synchronization succeeds and go to next section in the same way.
• The related M code:
M_code The specification
M03 The first main axis rotates in positive direction
M04 The first main axis rotates in negative direction
M05 The first main axis stops
M63 The second main axis rotates in positive direction
M64 The second main axis rotates in negative direction
M65 The second main axis stops
M70 Assign the first main axis to be the main axis of first group.
M71 Assign the second main axis to be the main axis of second group.
• Matters needing attention when compiling program

1. The first group of the program must start with $1 and the second one must start with $2.
2. The quantities of G04.1 P_ in the first group must be the same as that in second group and the number after
P has to be sequentially assigned in increasing order.
3. Put end command M30 or M02 inthe first group when program ends and M99 must be specified in the last
block of the second group.
4. When repeatedly processing several workpieces automatically is required, specify M99 inthe end of the first
group program. But notice that in order to enable the synchronization of first and second groups, the same
G04.1 P_ code must be specified before M99 of the first and second group.

5. With the axis set belonged to the second group, G code can only be specified in the second group. With the axis
set belonged to the first group, if we specify G code in the second group, commands are ineffective.
6. M code ,S code and T code are all available in the first and second group. Therefore M code ,S code and T code
can be properly executed simultaneously in the first and second group.

• Compiling programs:
Start a new file and program the processing file according to the following example.
• Examples for processing program:
$1 //the first group

G92 X50.0 Z160.0 S10000 //set origin, the highest speed 10000 rpm
T01 //use knife No.1
G96 S130 M03 //face speed130m/min, main axis rotates
//in positive direction
M08 //turn on cutting liquid
G04.1 P1
G00 X20.0 Z111.0 //positioning to A0 rapidly
G01 Z90.0 F0.6 //linear cutting A0-->A2
X26.0 //A2-->A3
X30.0 Z88.0 //A3-->A4
Z60.0 //A4-->A5
G04.1 P2
X40.0 Z20.0 //A5-->A6
Z0.0 //A6-->A7
G00 X50.0 //back knife rapidly
Z160.0 //return to origin

G04.1 P3
M05 M09 //stop the main axis, turn off cutting liquid
G04.1 P4
M30 //end program

$2 //the second group
G04.1 P1
T02 // use knife No.2
G04.1 P2
G00 X0 Z120. //position to B0 rapidly
G01 Z60. F0.5 //move knife B0-->B1
G00 Z120. //back knife B1-->B0
G04.1 P3
G00 Z200. //back the knife
G04.1 P4
M99
1.3.50.2 Description of Lathe graph assist G code
Description
Lathe graph assist G code is the special G code specified by inserted cycle in program editing. For example, two
lines have to be specified when using G73 command manually. Only a line is to be specified in the special G code
which inserted cycle automatically generates. Thus system combines two lines in G73 into special G code G73.1.
The following is the instructions of special G code.(Special G code conversational input mode is only available in
DOS version)
Assist G code list

• G73.1 Stock Removal in Turning
• G74.1 Stock Removal in Facing
• G75.1 Pattern Repeating
• G76.1 End Face (Z axis) Peck Drilling Cycle
• G77.1 Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle
• G78.1 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle

G73.1 Stock Removal in Turning
Command Form
G73.1 D(Δd) X(e) P (ns) Q (nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F___ S___ T___
Δd: depth of cut in X axis direction, default can be specified by the system parameter#4013.
e: escaping amount, specified by the parameter#4012
Δu: distance of finishing allowance in X direction
Δw: distance of finishing allowance in Z direction
F: feedrate
T: tool number
Description
G74.1 Stock Removal in Facing
Command Form
G74.1 D (d) E (e) P (ns) Q (nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F___ S___ T___


d: depth of cut in Z axis direction, it can be specified by the parameter#4013 and the parameter is changed by the
program command
e: escaping amount, it can be specified by the parameter#4012
Δu: distance of finishing allowance in X direction
Δw: distance of finishing allowance in Z direction
F: feedrate
T: tool number
Description

G75.1: Pattern Repeating
Command Form
G75.1 X(Δi) Z(Δk) D(d)_P (ns) Q (nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F___ S___ T___

Δi: distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction, this value can be specified by the parameter #4015
ΔK: distance and direction of relief in the Z axis direction, this value can be specified by the parameter #4016
d: the number of division, it can be specified by parameter #4017
Δu: distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction
Δw: distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction
F: feedrate
T: number of the tool

Description
G76.1: End Face (Z axis) Peck Drilling Cycle
Command Form
G76.1 E (e) X(U) Z(W) P(Δi) Q(Δk) R (d) F


e: escaping amount (escaping amount in Z direction when Δk depth is cut) ß it can be specified by parameter #4011
X: X coordinate of point B（diameter）
U: Incremental amount from A to B（diameter）
W: Incremental amount from A to C
Δi: Movement amount each cut in X direction(displayed by radius, positive)
Δk: Movement amount each cut in Z direction(positive)
Δd: Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. (The value is 0 when it returns in original path)
F: Feed rate
Description
G77.1: Outer Diameter/Internal Diameter Drilling Cycle
Command Form
G77.1 E (e) X(U)___ Z(W)___ P(Δi) Q(Δk) R(Δd) F___

e: escaping amount(after cutting Δi distance in X axis direction) ßit can be specified by parameter #4011
X: X coordinate of point C(diameter)
U: increment amount from B to C(diameter)

W: increment amount from A to B

Δi: movement amount in X direction (display by radius, positive)
Δk: depth of cut in Z direction (positive)
Δd: Relief amount of the tool at the cutting bottom. (The value is 0 when it returns in origin path)
F: feedrate
Description
G78.1: Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle
Command Form
G78.1 K(m) C(r) A(a) D(∆dmin) B_(d)_ X(U)_ Z(W)_ R (∆i) P (∆k) Q (∆d) ( F__ or E__ ) __
m: repetitive count in finishing, specified by system parameter #4044.
r: chamfering amount, specified by system parameter #4043.
a: angle of tool tip, the angle from 800, 600, 550, 300, 290and 00 is available. a can also be specified by system
parameter #4042.
Q: minimum cutting depth , specified by system parameter #4045d: finishing allowance, specified by system
parameter #4041
X(U): X coordinate in end point(bottom of tooth)
Z(W): Z coordinate in end point(bottom of tooth)
∆i: difference of thread radius

∆k: height of thread

∆d: depth of first cut
F: lead of thread in metric system(unit : mm/tooth)
E: lead of thread in imperial system(unit : tooth/inch)
H: numbers of thread (ex: H3 three thread type cutting, multiple thread F function is for neighbor thread)
Description
1.3.50.3 Description of lathe parameter
NO Explain Input range Unit Description
4001 Drilling mode [0, 1] 0: high speed 1: normal

4002 Escaping amount of [0, 999999999] LIU LIU is min. input unit, and it
drilling cycle will be affected by Metric or
Imperial system in use.
peck drilling cycle will be affected by Metric or
cutting cycle will be affected by Metric or
4013 Cutting value of cutting [0, 999999999] LIU LIU is min. input unit, and it
cycle will be affected by Metric or
4015 Cutting value of pattern [0, 999999999] LIU LIU is min. input unit, and it
repeating in X direction will be affected by Metric or
4016 Cutting value of pattern [0, 999999999] LIU LIU is min. input unit, and it
repeating in Z direction will be affected by Metric or
4017 Number of repeats of [1, 999] Number of times

pattern repeating
4018 Chamfer angle of [0, 89] degree

thread cutting G21
4041 Finishing allowance of [0, 999999999] LIU LIU is min. input unit, and it
threading will be affected by Metric or
4042 Thread angle of {0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80} Degree
threading
4043 Chamfering value of [0, 99] 0.1 pitch

threading
4044 Times of finishing [0, 99] Number of times

allowance in threading

4045 Min. cutting value in [0, 999999999] LIU LIU is min. input unit, and it
threading will be affected by Metric or
4050 C axis motor is used on [0, 1] This function is used with

spindle or not Marco command M19 C_,
when we use this function, we
need entry M18 /M50 /M51 to
system parameter 360X M
code Marco registry table
4051 Multiple cutting cycle, [0,999999999] LIU is min. input unit, and it
increasing (decreasing) will be affected by Metric or
allowed error range Imperial system in use.
(um)
1.4 200 Series Lathe Operation Manual
1.4.1 Lathe Controller Interface


The screen sections are shown below:

• （1）Work Piece Coordinate No.
• （2）Program Name / Line No.
• （3）Screen Title
• （4）Date
• （5）Time
• （6）User
• （7）Input
• （8）Hint
• （9）Status
• （10）Mode
• （11）Dipole Status (Only visible under Dipole)
• （12）Alarm


The following diagram is the main menu selections for SYNTEC Lathe controller. To operate SYNTEC Lathe
controller, users simply make the selections by pressing function keys, F1～F8 located on the bottom of the screen.
F1: Position
coordinate. Pressing function key, F1, under the main menu to enter this selection
(Note:This is the first screen when the system is booted up)

Screen Layouts:
• X:X axis coordinate.
• Z:Z axis coordinate.
• C:C axis coordinate.
• Feedrate: Cutting Feedrate which unit is mm/min or inch/min.
• Spindle: Spindle speed which unit is RPM.
• Machine coordinate: (Relative coordinate of working platform)
The current position relative to machine zero point is shown as machine coordinate on the display.
• Relative coordinate:
The current position relative to the previous location.
• Absolute coordinate:(Programming Coordinate)
The current position relative to the origin of user defined coordinate is shown as an absolute position on the
display.
• Distance To Go:
The remaining distance relative to the next position with sign +/- to display direction.
Descriptions of Function key selections:
• F1: Switch Coordinate

Function: Switch Coordinate Displays.
Operation: Under the Position submenu, whenever users press F1 key, the values and coordinate on the left
corner of the display will toggle among the four different coordinates with bigger fonts as shown in the

following figure:
• F2: Half Coordinate

Operation: Under the Position submenu, when the message line shows "X Input"(or "Y Input" or "Z Input"),
press "F2 Half Coordinate" and the relative coordinate value will become half in order to easily calculate
center of a workpiece.
• F3: Clear Coordinate

Function: Reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.(No effect on other axis)
Operation: Under the Position submenu, when "X Input" is entered in the Data Input row (or "Y Input" or "Z
Input"), press F3 to reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.
• F4: Clear All Coordinate

Function: Reset all relative coordinate to zero.
Operation: Under the Position submenu, pressing "F4" will reset all relative coordinate to zero.

• F5: Workpiece Coor.

Function: Relative to machine coordinate setting for G54, G55,...,G59, G54P100.
Operation: Under the Position submenu, press "F5" key and the following screen will show up. By pressing
"F1" key, then users can begin to set the auto machine coordinate settings of G54~G59 one by one. (The
system needs to be in manual date input (MDI) mode.)
a. "External Shift": operator can set the all coordinate G54..G59 at the same time .
b. CNC default G54, if user don't set any G54…G59 in the NC file
F2: Program


Descriptions of Program Sub menu Key Selections:
• F1: Execute
Function: Load the current program and jump to Run Menu
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F1 to load current program and jump to Run menu.
• F2: Delete Line

Function: Delete a line at cursor position.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F2 to delete a line where the cursor is located.

• F3: Can Cycle

Function: Enter Can Cycle fenu to add or edit a cycle.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F3 to enter Can Cycle fenu and select Insert Cycle or Edit Cycle.
• F5: SubEdit Menu

Function: Edit sub function "Search" "Replace" "Goto line" "Copy line" "Insert line" "Teach" .
Operation: user can use this menu for more edit sub function
• F1: Search
Function: Search String
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5"SubEdit Menu" and then F1 "Search" to search string.
A dialog box will pop up asking users to input a string as shown in the following figure. After keying in
a string, press F1 to start searching.
• F2: Replace
Function: Replace string.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "SubEdit Menu" and then F2"Replace" to replace
string. An dialog box will pop up asking users to input the replacing string and the new string as
shown in the following figure. After keying in a string, press F1 to start replacing.
• F3: Go To Line
Function: Go to a line number
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5"SubEdit Menu" and then F3"GOTO line" to go to the
line number. A dialog box will pop up asking users to input a line number. After keying in a number,
press F1 to go to the desired line.
• F4: Copy Line
Function: copy a line from current cursor to next line
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "SubEdit Menu" and then F4"Copy line" to go to the
next line.
• F5: Insert Line

Function: Insert a space line above current cursor line

Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "SubEdit Menu" and then F5"Insert line" to Insert a
new space line.
• F6: Block Copy
Function: support functions of "Start Line", "End Line", "Block Cut", "Block Copy", & "Block Paste" to
edit multiple lines.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F5 "SubEdit Menu" and then F6"Block edit" to edit blocks
through available functions.
• F7: Copy/Paste
Function: support functions of "Cut", "Copy", "Paste", "Undo", "Select All" to edit multiple lines.
Operation: Under program menu, press F5 "SubEdit Menu"and F7 Copy/Paste to use available
functions
• F6: Teach
Function: Teach current absolute coordinate to NC files
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F6"Teach"
•
Descriptions of Teach sub Key Selections:
• F1: Rapid Teach
• F2: Linear Cut Teach
• F3: Arc Cut Teach
Function: Add "G02" or "G03" code to NC files
Press(1st time) this key "arc teach ": CNC will automatically put current value to Arc middle point.
Press(2nd time) this key "arc teach ": CNC will automatically calculate G02 or G03, and filled the
complete code to NC files.
• F4: Cancel Arc Middle Point
Function: When arc teach function performs, user can use this key to abort middle point teach.
• F6: Delete Line
Function: When user uses Teach function, user can use this key "Delete line" to delete an entire
command line.

• F7: Next Coor. Page

Functions: Switch the coordinate displays when more than 3 axes exist.
• F8: Point Teach
Function: Add point position to the NC files by the current absolute coordinate.
• F7: Simulation

Descriptions of F7 "simulation" sub Key Selections:
• F1: STEP
Function: To simulate and check NC files STEP by STEP
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F4"Simulation" and then F1"Step".The operator can use
this function ,to check NC file Step by STEP
• F2: Continue
Function: To simulate NC file once.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F4 "Simulation" and then F2"Continue". The operator
can use this function to check NC file whole picture, when push button.
• F3: Zoom
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F4 and then F3.The operator can use the "←","↑","→",
"↓" cursor to move the frame to the determined area. And use "PageUp" "PageDn" to Enlarge this
area .
• F5: Graph Reset
• F6: Abort
Function: To abort simulation action
• F8: Simu. Setting


Simulation Parameter Description:
• Color: Total 15 colors can be used in simulation.
• G01 & G00 Path Color: user can select cutting path color by enter color codes. The RGB code
will change as color code is selected.
• Cursor Color: user can select cutting point color by entering color codes.
• Quadrant: user can define the quadrant to display when simulating path in 3D view.
• Draw Mode: user can select simulation plane by this parameter (XY, YX, XZ,ZX, YZ, ZY, XYZ)
• Simulation Mode:
Simulation: When operator enters "Run" screen, CNC would automatically simulation at that
screen
Direct Rraw: When operator enters "Run" screen, CNC would not simulate the path but start
drawing path after cycle start.
Not SImulation: When operator enters "Run" screen, no simulation path will be displayed.
• View Angle: when XYZ drawing mode, user can rotate 3D View angle verically and horizontally.
• Scope: user an setup simulation window scope. Value 0 means automatic.
Under "direct draw" mode, operator must set drawing scope to match where the simulated
path position.
• Range: Setup the range of program lines to simulate partial of the program path.
• F8: File Manager

Under Program submenu, press F5 and the following diagram will show up. Users can use arrow keys（↑、
↓）to select file to be edited. After pressing【ENTER】, content of the file will show up on the screen


Descriptions of Key Selections:
• F1: New File
Operation: Step 1: A dialog box will prompt users with "New File ". Type in the new file name and
press 【ENTER】. Step 2: An empty screen shows up waiting users to type in a new program.
• F2: Copy File
Operation: After pressing F2, a dialog box will prompt users to type in a file name and press 【ENTER】.
The current file is then copy to the hard disk with a different file name.
• F3: Delete File
Operation: Select a file to be delete by pressing （↑、↓）. A dialog box will pop up to confirm this
operation.
• F4: File Transfer
Function: To do Import/Export file from outer storage.
Operation: Insert a USB disk to the control or connect to a network folder, then press F4→F1 File
Import or F2 File Export. Select a file name by pressing（↑、↓、←、→）. Press【ENTER】to import the
file from a outer storage.

P.S.
• USB drive format must be FAT32, and no larger than 32GB.
• The operation of transfering files on USB disk or network folder are identical.
• F5: Execute
Function: To load the file that cursor is currently on, and jump to Run screen
Operation: Use ↑↓←→ keys to select file, and press F5 to load it and jump to Run screen.
• F6: Select DNC File
Function: To run a large NC file without copying it into controller memory
Operation: Press F6 and use ↑↓ keys to select file on USB disk or network folder, then press F1 to load
the file and jump to Run screen. When opening a DNC file, the title row displays as "DNC:+file name".
F3: Custom Function

Pressing "F3" under the main menu to open the customized interface. Geranally, this button will be empty.

F4: Run
This selection displays machining speed, time, manual data input (MDI) and other machine information such as
• F1: Edit
Function: Open the currently loaded program to edit.
Operation: Under Run submenu, press F1 to open this program and jump to Edit screen.
• F2: Graph Adjust

• F1: Zoom
Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2 and then F1.The operator can use the cursor to move
the frame to the determined area.
• F2: Graph Reset
Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2"Graph Adjust" and then F2"Graph Reset"
• F3: MDI Input

Function: Manual Data Input
Operation: Users can operate SYNTEC Lathe Controller manually in MDI mode.
a. Press F3 under Monitor submenu and type in single-line G or M code.

b. Press F1 (OK) to confirm the input command.
c. The typed-in command line will show on right upper corner of the screen.
d. Press 【CYCLE START】on the machine panel to execute the single-line command.

e. The following figure shows an example of this function.
• F4: Param. Set

Function: Display modal G codes, spindle status, setup part count, and setup required count number.
Operation:
• Users can set the part count number and target number
• When CNC execute M02, M30, or M99, part count would add 1 automatically
• When part count reaches required numbert, CNC would stop executing.
• Manually setup spindle RPM and Feedrte as standard F and S.
• Displays all modal G Codes that are currently running.
• Display instantaneous load of spindles.

• Setup and display ynchronize angles between 1st and 2nd Spindle.
• F5: Tool Set

Function: To set the tool compensation value, including tool length , tool wear , tool nose , describe as
below :
Tool length: G43/G44 tool length Hn compensation
Tool Length wear: for small length dimension adjust
Tool nose: G41/G42 tool radius Dn compensation (not diameter)

Operation procedure:

a. Main screen press F4 "monitor "

b. Press F5 "Tool Setting"
c. F1 " Tool Wear Set"
d. F2 " Tool Length Set "
e. F3 " Tool Nose Set"
f. F4 "Working Shift"
g. Use " Page Up "," Page Down ","↑", "↓ ", "← ", "→ "select tool No ,and X,Z item
• F8: Work Record

Function: This table can record 300 sets executed NC file ,this is very helpful to know end user working
history .

Operation Procedure:
a. Press F4 "Run" at Main screen.
b. Press F8 "Work Record".
F5: Alarm
following figure.

• F1: Pending Alarm

Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F1 to show current alarm situation.
• F2: History Alarm

Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F2 to show the alarm history of the system.
• F5: Save Alarm

Function: Save Alarm History To File.
Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F5 to save alarm history to a file as shown in the following
figure. A dialog box will prompt users to type in file name to be saved. After selecting a disk drive by using
(↑、↓、←、→), users press【ENTER】to confirm this operation.

F6: Parameter
Under the main menu, press F6 and then F1 to enter this function as shown in the following figure.
Function:
Parameter setup for all settings of system such as servo parameters, mechanical parameters, programmable travel
range, maximum machining speed and so on.
Operation:
User can change parameters anytime, but will not become effective until RESET is pressed. Some parameter with
start sign* needs reboot system to become effective.
Function keys are described below:
• F1: User Param.

This parameter group lists out all maching and cycle related settings.
• F5: Go To Param
If the operator or engineer wish to jump to a specific parameter number, press F5 to cakll pop-out window.
Enter parameter number then press F1 to jump.
F7: Diagnosis
This selection provides users with direct access to the memory area for parameter checking, parameter settings
press F6 and then F2 to access this function as shown in the following figure.

Key Selections:
• F1: PLC State

Display states and information of individual PLC internal-devices such as IOCSA bits, Registers, and Ladder
diagram.
• F2: Display System Data

Function: Display current system data. (For the definitions of each data, refer to the application manual)

• F3: Display Global

Function: Display the values of Global Data (Global Variables, @ variables). The use and availability of each
variable can be found in application manual.
• F4: Display Coord.

Function: Display the values of Coordinate Data (Local Variables, # variables).
• F8: System Manager

Function: Manage all system settings. Including backup/restore system, install software updates and so on.
• F1 Program Install
Function: Install software update package from external storage.
• F2 Backup System
Function: Backup system setting data (parameters, ladder, etc ...) to external storage.
• F3 Restore System
Function: Restore system setting data (parameters, ladder, etc ...) from a backup file in external
storage..
• F4 Export/Import System Files

Function: Export/Import individual system setting data and Macros.
F8: About
Function: Display controller information including software version, image version, PLC version, CPU board, serial
number, and machine type.


This section list out important keys on the control panel. The actual panel can have more keys depending on
machine builder.
POWER ON
Turn on main power
POWER OFF
Turn OFF power
Emergency STOP
For safety reason, press this button ,CNC would stop all motor movement and break up all servo drive main circuit
to guarantee safety of operator and machine.
Home Mode and Home Function
Description : For Machines with absolute encoder, Home mode has a fast-return function.
Operation :
1. Select HOME mode
2. Set Pr1001~ =1 to enable fast-return funcion for each axis.
3. Press any axis manual key X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z-:
4. CNC would move the select axis back to Machine zero with G00 speed(Pr461~).
Continus JOG (Rapid JOG)
Description : User can use this function to move the machine by press JOG key
Operation :
1. Select JOG mode
3. Operator can use JOG% or G01% adjust Jog federate
6. Operator can use G00% Rapid Jog federate
G00 % : Adjust G00 % (F0 .25% .50% .100%)
G01 % : Adjust G01/G02 /G03 feedrate override %:

Incremental JOG
Operation:
1. Select INC JOG mode
3. Operator can set the incremental distance by G00 rotary switch 1 : 1um *,10 : 10um *,*100 : 100um
MPG
Description: User can use this function to move the machine by MPG(Manual Pulse Generator )
Operation:
1. Select MPG mode
*100:100um , *1000 : 1000um
AUTO Mode

Operation:
3. Set workpiece coor.(G54..G59) ,CNC default G54 ,if user don't set any G94..G59 in the NC file
4. Set Tool setting to select tool radius and tool length.
6. Press "Feedhold" key to feedhold the NC program ,if necessary
MDI Mode Single Block Execute

Operation:
4. Press F3 "MDI Input" ,screen would pop up a window.
5. After key in date ,Press "ENTER" key to input the data


7. If MDI block SYNTAX is correct ,data in MDI menu would disappear
MPG Simulation

Operation:
1. Select AUTO mode
2. Press this button ,and button led ON
7. MPG rotate more fast ,machining speed is more fast
8. MPG stop, CNC stop too .
9. This function can "Enable" " Disable" immediately
P.S. this function is very user friendly for test runs.
Dry Run

Operation:
Single Block

Operation:

Option Stop
Operation:
6. This function use to change tool or check workpiece
Option Skip
Description: User can use this function to decide NC file '/' skip or not
Operation:
4. When CNC execute "/" ,CNC would Skip this block
Spindle Control
Spindle CW rotates

Spindle stop
Spindle CCW rotates

Spindle low speed: When spindle is rotating, press this key and then spindle will rotate in low speed

Spindle speed increase by 10%
Spindle speed decrease by 10%
1.4.3 How to Operate SYNTEC 200TB

This chapter is written for user task by task ,when user operates this controller ,operator can follow task description
as below STEP by STEP ,So very easy to use this controller ,TASK description as below :
• Manual function(JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG)
• HOME
• Open a file (Program / USB / Network )
• Tool setting (G40/G41/G42 ,G43/G44/G49)
• Tool Length measurement (G43/G44/G49)
• Setting the Workpiece origin offset value(G54…G59)
• Manual Data Input(MDI )
• Assigned an executing NC file (AUTO)
• Graphic Simulation
• How to check NC file in SYNTEC controller
• Network Setting
• Bit Function in PLC Parameters
1.4.3.1 Manual Function (JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG)

When power on SYNTEC CNC, there are 3 mode to manual machine
1st CON_JOG:
4. operator can use JOG% adjust JOG speed
5. operator can press axis direction key and rapid key "～ "at the same time ,machine will move by rapid speed
6. rapid JOG speed can be adjusted by G00%
Incremental JOG:
4. operator can select incremental distance by G0% (*1,*10,*100)
MPG incremental JOG (MPG):



1.4.3.2 HOME
Because tool setting, workpiece coordinate setting is based on Machine zero point, it is necessary to make sure
machine is homed. Machines with absolute encoders has a fast-retun function under Home mode.
Procedure:
3. Make sure Axis Fast Return Home Pr1001~ =1 to enable fast-retun for all axes.
4. Press axis direction key(X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) ,axis would start returning Machine home with G00 max speed
(Pr461~).
5. Fast-return function can run 3 axis at the same time
1.4.3.3 Open a File (Program / USB / Network)

Procedure:
1. Press F2 "Program" → F8 "File manage"

2. screen display file system screen
3. Press F1 "New file" to open a new file

4. Press F2 "copy file" to copy current focused file to a new file
5. Press F3 "delete file " and check files top delete.
6. Press F4 "File Transfer" to import/export files from/into a USB or network folder.
7. Press F5 "Execute" to load focused file.
8. Press F6 "Select DNC" to open a NC file from external storage
9. Press F7 "Folder Manager" to manage folders in controller. (10.116.36 or newer version)
1.4.3.4 Tool Setting

Procedure for setting Tool offset value :
2. Press function key F5 "tool setting "
4. Type "A" or "I" key to selected input type is "Absolute" or "Incremental"

1.4.3.5 Tool Length Measurement

After NC code select T code, then G43 is enables automatically, so, operator must set tool length data before
cutting.
2. Press F5 "Tool setting" to this screen
3. Press F2 "Tool len" to set tool length
4. Move the cursor to the compensation number for the target tool
Z Axis Tool Length Measurement Procedure

1. Use manual operation to move the tool to be measured until it touches the z axis work zero point.
• Absolute : enter work zero point machine coordinate ,by "A*** " ,tool length would be replaced by this value
• Incremental : enter Incremental value ,by "I*** " , use this function to shift current tool length by this value

• Teach : enter current position relative to work zero point by "Z**" ,for example "Z0" means current position
is work zero point ,and after this ,tool length would be the same with machine coordinate .
X Axis Tool Length Measurement Procedure

1. Use manual operation to move the tool to be measured until it touches the X axis work zero point.
• Absolute : enter work zero point machine coordinate ,by "A*** " ,tool length would be replaced by
this value
• Incremental : enter Incremental value ,by "I*** " , use this function to shift current tool length by this
value
• Teach : enter current position relative to work zero point by "X**" ,for example "X0" means current
position is work zero point ,and after this ,tool length would be the same with machine coordinate .
3. Teach by cutting : procedure as below
• Cut a distance along Z axis
• Retract tool along Z axis , don't move X axis
• Input this value by teaching input "X+/-D"
• The plus/minus sign is decided by tool tip position ,if tool tip is located at X+(tip is located above
central line) , sign is "+" ,else if tool tip is located at X- sign is "-"
Tool Wear Setting

Use tool wear setting to adjust cutting dimension, procedures are as below

1. After tool length setting ,tool wear value is set to zero automatically
2. measure cutting result ,if there is an error ,use tool wear setting to compensate tool length ,actually tool
length = tool length + tool wear
3. There are 2 methods to input tool wear
• Absolute : enter tool wear absolute value by "A##" , then the tool wear is changed to the entered
value
• Incremental : enter tool wear incremental value ,by "I## " the the tool wear will add the entered
value to the current one.
• Modal setting: only enter "A" or "I" single character, then "absolute " or " incremental" setting would
be kept ,after this user can directly input value only .
4. plus/minus sign +/- :
• Input value can have "+/-" signs.
• The plus/minus sign is decided by tool tip would be adjusted direction
• if tool tip is modified to move "Plus" direction ,then key in tool wear value by plus sign"+"
• if tool tip is modified to move "minus" direction ,then key in tool wear value by minus sign"-"
Example:
If cutting result is 10um oversize in diameter, and tool tip needs to compensate toward X-. Enter " I-0.01 " to tool
wear value, then a negative 10um would be added to the next cutting path in X direction.
Tool Nose Setting:

Because tool nose is circular, tool length measurement only measure tool length when precision cutting, use tool
nose setting to compensate tool nose dimension error, procedures are as below
1. Press F4 "Run"
2. Press F5 "Tool Setting"
3. Press F3 "Tool Nose Set" to select tool nose compensate
4. There are 3 kinds tool nose data to input Radius : tool nose radius R.wear : tool nose radius wear ,actually
the real tool nose is (Radius+R.wear) Nose : tool nose direction ,there are 8 tool nose directions to be
elected ,it depends on tool nose shape ,please see SYNTEC programming manual more detail(G41/G42)
5. Use G41/G42 in NC files, to enable tool nose compensation .
6. please see SYNTEC programming manual more detail(G41/G42)

1.4.3.6 Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value (G54…G59)

Procedure:
2. Press sub selection soft key "Workpiece coor."
.
3. The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists multiple pages. Display a desired page
by Press PageUp/PageDn key
4. Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed
5. "External shift" input the value, which can shift the whole coordinate (G54…G59.8) simultaneous
6. F1"coor. Latched": user can press this function key ,and CNC would latch current machine coordinate to the
screen where cursor is located .
Note:
1. This function is enable by setting CNC parameter 3229 : disable workpiece coordinate by " 1 "
2. System default is G54 ,and values are zero every axis
3. After change G54...G59 ,please reset tool length again ,this is very important

Procedure:
2. Press group function key "Monitor "

.
5. Key in MDI data at input bar and PRESS "ENTER"
7. If current block SYNTAX is correct, the data in the window would be disappeared.
1.4.3.8 Assign an Executing NC File (AUTO)

Procedure:
1. Switch to AUTO mode
2. From Main screen press F2 "Program" to open NC file in editor. Or go to F8 "File Manager" to open another
NC file.

3. Then press F1 "Execute", the NC file is now assigned automatically.

Procedure:

1. Press group F2 "Program ",select NC file what user want to simulate and press fenu "Simulation"
2. User can use "Step" to check NC file STEP by STEP

3. use "Continue" to simulation whole picture
5. Use "simulation setting" set simulation parameter
6. CNC status is "READY", Press group function key "Monitor" that is the available status to assigned executing
NC file.
1.4.3.10 To Check NC File on Controller

1. Switch to AUTO mode
2. MAke sure status is READY

3. Press function key "Run"
4. Press "MPG simulation "key to enable this function (LED on)

5. Press "Cycle Start "on control panel, CNC status from "READY" to "BUSY"
6. Machine remains static.
7. Rotate MPG handwheel, then the machine starts moving along cutting path
8. The faster MPG wheel is rotated, the fater the machine moves. Machine stops moving if MPG wheel is not
rotating. From monitor screen ,operator can see the cutting cursor move along simulation path
9. Operator also can Press "Single Block" key to enable single block function when "MPG simulation " function
is ON ,then user can use test two function simultaneous ,check NC file STEP by STEP ,with" MPG simulation "
function .
10. "MPG simulation" can control table forward ,also can control backward too ,but NC file would stop at M,S,T
DNC Function
DESCRIPTION:
SYNTEC controller can run a program that is saved on an external storage such as USB or network folder. This
allows user to save controller memory or save time to transfer large files.
Operation:
1. Insert USB disk or setup network folder on PC
2. Go to main menu, and press F2 "Program", and then select F8 "File Manager".

3. Press F6 "Select DNC File" in fenu then a pop-up window will appear to show all files in external storage.
4. Once selected, press F1 to load this file and jump to Run screen.
1.4.3.11 Network Setting

Description: This procedure allows user to setup a file sharing connection between a PC abd SYNTEC Controller.
The devices can be connected via direct cable or a switch hub.

Controller Setup
• Path:
• F5 Maintain->F2 Network setting
• Description
• Set system network setting
• Related infor.
number is different from PC setting) and Subnet mask(same with PC setting)
• IP address
• Only applied for "use the following IP address" option.
• Sunet mask
• Enter the IP address for subnet mask (the same with PC subnet mask).
• PC name
• Enter the full computer name
• Need to be the same with PC
• Dir name
• Enter the sharing folder name (the same name with PC sharing folder )
• If the shared folder is not set the password, user do not need to enter user name, if yes, please enter
the same password.

Set Kernel Server
• Path:
• Description
• Setting function related to kernel server
• Related infor.
• Start server while boot
• Setting whether server is started when booting
• Timeout(Milisec)
• Set the acceptable time out when connecting to the Kernel server unsuccessfully
Start Server
• Path:
• Description

PC Setup
XP OS
Log in as an Administrator and select "start"-> "control panel"->"user account"-> Guest

here"

change my files".


"Start"-> "control panel"->"System"-> "change" to set "Computer Name" and "Workgroup", and remember
these setting contents to use later on when setting controller.

5. TCP/IP setting

"Start" => "Setting" => "Network connections" and right click on "Properties", and select "Internet Protocol
[TCP/IP]"
• Jumper cable (without HUB), select "use the following IP address" and enter IP address (the forth
number is different from controller setting) and Subnet mask (same with controller setting)


VISTA OS
Log in as Administrator and select "Start" "Control Panel" "User Account" Guest
2. Sharing Resource Setting

a. Click on "advanced sharing"

b. Click on "share this folder"
c. Click on "permission"
d. Click on "add"
e. Enter "GUEST" as the new group name, click "OK" to complete setting
3. Security setting
Right click on folder to share-> properties-> security-> Edit-> add "Guest" as a new group, then open group

permissions to maximum.

5. TCP/IP Setting

a. "Start" -> "control panel" -> "Network and Internet"->"Network and Sharing Center" -> "Properties"
b. Select "internet protocol(TCP/IP)" as shown below:

• Jumper cable (without HUB), select "use the following IP address" and enter IP address (the
forth number is different from controller setting) and Subnet mask (same with controller
setting)


Win 7 OS
• Right-click on folder wants to share, select "share with" and "specific people"

• Left-click on "advanced sharing" and select "share this folder" to everyone.

• Select "permission" and select "full control" "only read" and "change"
• Open "Network and sharing center", select "turn off password protected sharing" and "Open
sharing….."



"Start"-> "control panel"->"system and security"-> "System"-> "change " to set "Computer Name" and

"Workgroup", remember these setting contents to use later on when setting controller.

3. TCP/IP Setting

Controller FTP
Controller Setup
ARM System: F5 Maintain → F2 Set Kernel Server
X86 System: F6 Parameters → F10 Next → F3 Set Kernel Server
Follow the instruction of section above to setup controller's network.
NOTICE:
1. make sure to select "Specify an IP Address".
2. Net Status does not have to be "0 No Error/Success" to setup a FTP server.
PC Setup
Open a folder and enter "ftp://controller IP", and then windows will automatically connect to controller's NcFiles
folder. All programs can be found here.

1.4.4 Use of Multi-Path Interface
1.4.4.1 Summary
Controller version 10.116.35, 10.117.35 and newer version provide multi-path user interface that display
separate path coordinate and machining information. The following is the display
1.4.4.2 Screen Layout

Description:
• （1）Screen Title
• （2）Time
• （3）Date
• （4）User
• （5）Work Piece Coordinate
• （6）Program Name / Line No.
• （7）Path Label
• （8）Input
• （9）Hint
• （10）Status
• （11）Mode
• （12）Dipole Status (Only visible under Dipole)
• （13）Alarm
1.4.4.3 Main Screen

The main screen of different path numbers are show below, press the fenu keys to enter corresponding function
screen.
Dual Path
Screen layouts: Left area display 1st path and right area displays 2nd path information.
• X: X axis coordinate
• Y: Y axis coordinate
• Z: Z axis coordinate
• C: C axis coordinate
• Feedrate (F): Speed of machine motion, unit mm/min.
• Spindle(S): Spindle RPM.
• Loading Percentage: Spindle real time load info

• Note: Axes that are NOT within Main System Paths (axis groups) will be displayed in $1 coordinate
screen. (ver 10.116.36R, 10.116.47, 10.117.47)
Axes that are NOT within Main System Paths (axis groups) will be displayed in coordinate screen.ver
Triple Path
Description:
• Area: 1st, 2nd, and 3rd paths are displayed in areas from left to right.
• Machine Coordinate: Fixed coordinate system referring to machine structure.
• Speed(S): Spindle RPM.
screen. (ver 10.116.36R, 10.116.47, 10.117.47)
Quad Path

Description:
• Area: 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th paths are displayed in areas from left to right.Area:1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
paths are displayed in areas from left to right.
• Machine Coordinate: Fixed coordinate system referring to machine structure.
• Speed(S): Spindle RPM.
screen. (ver 10.116.36R, 10.116.47, 10.117.47)
F1: Position
Display all coordinates information of current position. This section explains the difference between multi-
path and single-path interfaces.Display all coordinates information of current position. This section explains
the difference between multi-path and single-path interfaces.
Dual Path

Function Keys are identical to single-path interface:

• F1：Swithc Coordinate
Function: Switch displayed coordinate systemOperation: Under Position screen, press F1 to swtich
coordinate display between Machine, Absolute, Relative, and Dist. to Go.
• F2：Half Coordinate
Operation: Under the Position submenu, when the message line shows "X Input"(or "Y Input" or "Z Input"),
press "F2 Half Coordinate" and the relative coordinate value will become half in order to easily calculate
center of a workpiece.
• F3 Clear Coordinates
Function: Reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.(No effect on other axis)Operation:
Under the Position submenu, when "X Input" is entered in the Data Input row (or "Y Input" or "Z Input"),
press F3 to reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.
• F4：Clear All Coordinate
Function: Set all value of Relative Coord to zero.Function: Set all value of Relative Coord to zero.Operation:
Under Coordinate(Position) screen, press F4 to clear all Relative Coord.
F2: Program
The main program editig interface of controller, user can edit all paths in this interface.The main program
editig interface of controller, user can edit all paths in this interface.
Dual Path

• F1: Execute
Function: Load the current program and jump to Run Menu
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F1 to load current program and jump to Run menu.
• F2: Delete Line
Function: Delete a line at cursor position.Operation: Under Program submenu, press F2 to delete a line
where the cursor is located.
• F3: Can Cycle
Function: Enter Can Cycle fenu to add or edit a cycle.
Operation: Under Program submenu, press F3 to enter Can Cycle fenu and select Insert Cycle or Edit Cycle.
• F4: Select Program
Function: Switch cursor between paths to edit programs.
Operation: In Program submenu, press F4 to switch cursor between programs.
• F5: Half/Full Screen Switch
Function: To switch single path display or dual path display.
• F6：Sub Edit Menu
Function: To perform edit functions such as edit, copy, paste, search, and so on.
• F7: Simulation
• F8: File Manager
Function: To manage all programs including copy, paste, import/export, and so on.Description: To manage
all programs including copy, paste, import/export, and so on.
F4: Run
Displays Coordinates, Program, Simulation, Feedrate, Run Time, MDI, and all useful information during
machining.Displays Coordinates, Program, Simulation, Feedrate, Run Time, , and all useful information during
machining.

Dual Path
Screen Description
1. Coordinates
screen. (ver 10.116.36R, 10.116.47, 10.117.47)
2. Spindle RPM & Spindle Load, Feedrate.
3. Spindle Override %, Start Block Number, Tool No.
4. Simulation Display
5. Program Display
Auxiliary Functions
1. Cursor at Start Block will switch to active path automatically.
• Version: 10.116.36J、10.116.42、10.117.42
• Description:
• When only one path is activated, cursor will switch to the Start Block of the actived path.
• When multiple paths are activated:
• Cursor does not move position if current path is also activated. (E.g. Cursor is currently
at $1, if $1 & $2 are activated, cursor is still at $1.)
• If activated path does not include the path that cursor is currently at, then the cursor
will jump to the first path among newly activated paths. (E.g. Cursor at $1, if $2 & $3
are activated and $1 is not, then cursor moves to $2)
• Cursor remain its position if screens are switched.
2. Jump to Line
• Description:
• Enter the content to search in Start Line box, and it will display content while searching.
• If N# (sequence no.) is entered, the N numer in all activated paths will be found.
• If number, L#, string, G code, M code are entered, system will only search the path which
the cursor locates.
3. Additional Jump to Line Function
• Version: 10.116.36P、10.116.45、10.117.45

• Description:
• Use slash "/" to separate the contents to search in different paths.
• Example: Entering "N1/L2" means seach N1 in $1 and L2 in $2.
• Example: Entering "/L2" means seach L2 in $2 only.
• To seach contents in n pathes at the same time, n-1 "/" must be used. It is not irrelevant to
number of activated paths.
• If no slash "/" is entered, then suystem regard it as regular jump to line operation.
• Compatibility:
• Can no longer seach strings with "/" symbol.
• If some content is not found, the message will appear after all paths finish searching.
• The not found message will specify the path number.
4. Refer CNC and PLC Interface section of Application Manual for the definition of R21.
Function Keys
• F1: Edit
Function: Open the currently loaded program to edit.
Operation: Under Run submenu, press F1 to open this program and jump to Edit screen.
• F3: MDI Input
Function: Manual Data Input. MDI window can display multiple paths in split window, the regulation is:
1. When R21.11 is OFF:
• R21=0: displays two paths
• R21=1: displays 1st path only
• R21=2: displays 2nd path only
• R21=3: displays 3rd path only
• R21=4: displays 4th path only
2. When R21.11 is ON:
• R21.1 on: displays 1st path only
• R21.2 on: displays 2nd path only
• R21.3 on: displays 3rd path only
• R21.4 on: displays 4th path only
• The cases above are mutual exclusive, MDI split window will display all paths if more than
one bit is ON.
• F4: Parameter Set
Function: Switch screens to display various machining information.
- Press F4 to switch to screen below

Display Devices:
1. Spindle Override %, G00 & G01 Override %, Tool No.
2. Modal G Codes
- Press F4 again to switch to ext screen
Display Devices:
1. Displays mutual information of a paths. Including total run time, interrupted line no., part count, and
etc. It also shows spindle load status.

- Press F4 again will return to the initial Run screen.

• F5: Tool Set
Function: Display tool dimension setup including Tool Length, Tool Wear, Tool Nose.
Operation: Identical to Single Path interface
• F7: Work Record
Function: Shows the table of work record, including program name, run time, total part count, and
comments.
Operation: Under Run submenu, press F7 to open Work Record. NOTICE: This is different from Single Path
interface.
• F8: Clear Accumulated Cycle Time
Function: Clear all accumulated run time.
1.4.5 Appendix
Hsinchu Los Angeles, California, USA

SYNTEC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. Syntec Technology Inc
(Headquarters) 1370 Valley Vista Dr Suite
No. 21 Industry E. Rd. 4, Hsinchu Science Park, Hsinchu City 30077, Taiwan, ROC 200, Diamond Bar, CA
TEL：+886-3-6663553 91765
FAX：+886-3-6663505 TEL：+1-909-979-9723
E-Mail：
sales@syntecclub.com.twcustomerservice@syntecclub.com.tw

2 EndUser_Mill
2.1 6D/6D-H/21/21-H/22/220 Seies_Serial Bus Mill Operation Manual
2.1.1 Function Key and System Configuration

3. Title of interface(Current interface)
4. Date
5. Time
6. Data input
7. Display(Hint)
8. Status
9. Mode
10. Alarm
11. Function Key
EndUser_Mill – 399


2.1.1.3 Coordinate
• Command
• F1 Coordinate
• Function
• Use the function key【POS】, can switch to the current page quickly.
PS: By pressing 【POS】 Key, you may jump from other page to this page interface.
Coordinate Display
F(Feedrate)
• User input Feedrate (mm/min).
• Percentages of Feedrate.

S(Rotating Speed of Spindle )

• User input Spindle speed (RPM).
• Percentages of Spindle speed.
Run Time
• Machining Duration.
Part counter
T(Tool No.)
Switch Coordinate
• Command
• Function
Half Coordinate
• Command
• Function
• Relative coordinate divided by 2.
• Combined with 「Clear Rel. Coord.」function , this function will calculate the middle point of the
object.
• Key in the axis that you want to calculate and then press「Half Coordinate」.
• Example
• Current Rel. Coord. of X axis is 10.000.
• Key in 「X」,and then press 「half coordinate」.
Zero Rel. Coord.

• Command
• F1 Coordinate→F3 Zero Rel. Coord.
• Function
• Key in the axis that you want to calculate and then press 「Zero Rel. Coord.」
• Example
• Key in 「X」,and then press 「Zero Rel. Coord.」.

• Current Rel. Coord. of X axis Will be set to 0.000.

• Command
• F1 Coordinate→F4 Zero All Rel. Coord.
• Function
• Example
• Press「Zero All Rel. Coord.」function key.
• Relative Coordinate of X and Y will be set to 0.000.
2.1.1.4 Program
• Command
• F2 Program
• Function
• Users can use【↑】【↓】【←】【→】 on the key pad to move the cursor to anywhere on the screen for editing
purpose.
• With 【Page Up】【Page Down】to switch the pages.
• With【Home】【End】can let the cursor jump between the top and end of the line.
• With the function key【Prog/File】can quickly switch between「Program」and「File Manager」.

Execute
• Command
• Function
• Execute current program and also change the screen to 「Monitor」 page.
• Note
• This function will be disabled during machining.
Delete Line
• Command
• Function
Search/Replace
• Command
• Function
• Quick search for every occurrence of a specific word or phrase and automatically replace text.
• Press 「Search/Replace」function key, then Replace box will appear, just enter the text that you want
to search and replace for.

Find Next
• Command
• Function
• Find next.
Replace
• Command
• Function
• Replace with input text
• Press F2「Replace」to replace highlight string with new string.
• If you want to skip the current highlighted string, press F1「Find Next」.
Replace All
• Command
• Function
• Replace all search text with input text.
Modify Setting
• Command
• Function
• Reset 「Search/Replace」 string.
• Press F4「Modify Setting」to reset the「Search/Replace」content.

Can Cycle
• Command
• Function
• Because SYNTEC system provides many kind of G code and different G code has each function. When
editing the program, this function can help user to edit G code easily.
Insert Cycle
• Command
• Function
• Insert the required G code.
• Under the program edit mode, move the cursor to the desired location and press 「Insert Cycle」.
• Follow the instruction and press 「OK」, the desired G code will insert into the next line of current
cursor.
Edit Cycle
• Command
• Function
• Edit the current cycle.

• Move the cursor to the cycle and press 「Edit Cycle」,a modify page will show up. Modify the contents
and press「OK」, the contents of the current cycle will change.
Block Copy
• Path
• Function
• Select, cut, copy and paste more than one line of programs.
Start Line
• Command
• Function
• Define the start line of block.
End Line
• Command

• Function
• Define the end line of block.
Block Cut
• Command
• Function
Block Copy
• Command
• Function
Block Paste
• Command
• Function
• Move the cursor to the desire line and press「Start Line」and function key「End Line」enable.
• Press【↑】【↓】【Page Up】【Page Down】 to select desired area.
• Press「End Line」,block between「Start Line」and 「End Line」will be selected.
1. →Function key 「End Line」disable.
2. →Function key 「Block Copy」enable.
3. →Function key 「Block Cut」enable.
4. →If 「Block Cut」being use, the whole block that had been highlight will be cut off.
5. →Function key 「Block Copy」/「Block Cut」disable.
6. →Function key 「Block Paste」enable.
• If 「Block Copy」is used, the block that had been selected will not disappear.
• Note
• If 「Block Cut」is use, and do not paste the content immediately, the cut program will disappear.
• The contents of「Block Cut」can be pasted for only one time but the contents of 「Block Copy」 can be
pasted for many times.

Teach
• Command
• Function
• Move the machine table with 『MPG』/『JOG』/『INJOG』 to the destination and use 『Teach』function,
input the current absolute coordinate value to NC program.
Rapid Teach
• Command
• Function
program.
Line Cut Teach

• Command
• Function

Arc Cut Teach

• Command
• Function
• Add current absolute coordinate as the input value of 「G02/G03 Circular Cutting」function in current
program.
• Move the worktable to the arc center and press 「Arc Cut Teach」, current absolute coordinate will be
define as the arc center.
• Move the worktable to the ending of the arc and press「Arc Cut Teach」, current absolute coordinate
will be define as the ending of the arc. Controller will automatically calculate the relation between
middle and end point and determine whether to use G02 or G03. The calculation result will be
regarded as the input value of 「G02/G03 Circular Cutting」function.
Cancel Arc Middle

• Command
• Function
• Clear the arc middle that had been set.
• If the arc middle are not being set, this function will not enable.
Point Teach
• Command
• Function
input into current cursor location.

Simulation
• Command
• Function
• Program simulation for the actual machining route.
• Capability of debug.
• Default display range will be the span of the full program.
• Simulation setting can be modified by F5「simulate Setting」..
Step
• Command
• Function
• Simulate the program block by block.
• Monitor the variation of the coordinate for single block.
Continue
• Command


• Function
• System will scan all of the programs and then do the simulation.
Zoom
• Command
• Function
• Zoom in/out the simulation window.
• Press F3「Zoom」,there will be a block show up. Use【↑】【↓】【←】【→】can move the window up, down, left
and right.
• Use【Page Up】【Page Down】to change the zooming area.
• Press【ENTER】to check the result.
Graph Reset
• Command
• Function
• Reset the simulation result to default.
Simu. Setting
• Command


• Function
1. Color
• Provide 16 different colors (Setting 0~15).
2. Path Color
• Simulation path color.
3. Cursor Color
4. RGB Value
• Except the 16 default color, user can define the color by them self.
5. Draw Mode
• Plane can define are as below.
• XYZ • YX
• XY • ZY
• YZ • XZ
• ZX
6. Setting quadrant
• User can define the quadrant of simulate plane.
• First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
7. Simulate Mode
• Simulation
• When user go to the 『Monitor』 page, simulation will show up automatically.
• System will scan the whole program and detect the simulation boundary, and then
simulation will execute. No need to define the simulate boundary.
• Direct Draw
• When user go to the 『Monitor』page, cursor will show up but simulation will not execute
automatically.
• User need to define the simulation boundary first.
• When the machining starts, cursor will follow up as well.
• Not Simulation
• Under XYZ draw mode, by setting this parameter, simulation will show up with 3D simulation.
• Vertical
• Horizontal
9. Scope


• Minimum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
• Maximum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
File Manager
• Command
• Function
• This function key can manage all of the NC files within the data storage device. The device can be
setting with Pr3213.
• Use【↑】【↓】on the key pad to move the cursor to anywhere on the screen for editing purpose.
• With 【Page Up】【Page Down】to switch the cursor between pages.
• Press【ENTER】on the key pad, to assign the current cursor file as the execute file, screen will show up
with the program content and can enable to edit the program.
New File
• Command

• Function
• Open a new file, that file will be the current edit file.
• Note
• Default file name has no file extension. If user want to create a new file with file extension such
as .NC, just enter the extension (.NC) as well.
• The length of file name cannot be longer than 32 characters (include file extension)
Copy File
• Command
• Function
• Use【↑】【↓】to move the cursor to the file that want to copy.
• Press「Copy File」function key.
• Note
Delete File
• Command
• Function
• Delete file that remarked by cursor.
• Press F3「Delete File」, check box will show up in front of the NC file within the「File Manager」monitor
page. Use【↑】【↓】to select the delete file.
• Cancel Select: Deselect all files.
• Note
File Import
• Command
• Function
• Import outer file into controller
• The upper block shows the outer devices selection with the following choice.

• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
• Left column shows data structure of the outer device.
• Right column shows data structure of the inner storage of the controller.
• Copy: Copy the remarked file from the outer device to the controller.
• Select: Select or deselect each file. (Not available for folder)
• Select All: Select all files.
• Device Change: Change outer device selection.
• Default outer device is USB Disk.
• If you want to change the outer device, press F5「Device Change」,switch the cursor to the desire
device and press【Enter】, then the left column data structure will change and show the data structure
of selected device.
• Move the cursor to the import file and press F2「Select」or 【Space】to remark file.
controller.
File Export
• Command
• Function
• Export file within controller to outer device.
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
• Default outer device is USBDisk.
• If you want to change the destination device, press F5「Device Change」, switch the cursor to the
desire device and press【Enter】, then the below left column data structure will change, according to
the selected device .
• Move the cursor to the export file and press F2 「Select」or【Space】to remark file.

controller to outer device.
Execute
• Command
• Function
• Execute current program. and also change the screen to the 「monitor」 page.
• Use【↑】【↓】to select file, and then press「Execute」the selected file will be the executive file.
• Note
• This function is invalid when machining.
Choose DNC File

• Command
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→Next→F6 Execute
• Function
• Execute program stored in external devices, such as USB/Network.
• Use【↑】【↓】to select file, and then press「Confirm」the selected file to be executed.
• Title of selected file will be showed : DNC + file name
• Note
• Valid from - 6MDs/6s：2.2.0(10.116.10) 11s：2.2.1(10.116.10A) 21s：2.2.0(10.116.10) 20s：10.116.24
• When a file reading fail, the control will retry 100 times before pop up a error message
• A DNC program must use M30 as the end of program
• USB DNC function does not support MACRO function
• USB DNC function supports O888800, O999900, and Pr3851=0 functions (after 2.2.5)
• When M98, G65, or G66 is used, the subprogram must be stored in controller

• Command
• Function
• User can set up the coordinate system and tool offsets with this function.
• With the function key 【Offset/Setting】can switch the page quickly to the Offset/Setting page.

Workpiece Cord.
• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Workpiece Coord.
• Function
• For workpiece coordinate setting purpose.
• System default will be G54 if there are no specific declaration with G54~G59.10 in the NC code.
• The External Shift will include into all the workpiece coordinate.
• Operation Method:
• Move the cursor with【↑】【↓】【←】【→】.
• Use【PageUp】【PageDown】to switch the pages.
• Note
• After setting the workpiece coordinate, user need to check the tool length again.
Mach. Coord. Teach

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Work Piece Coord.→F1 Mach. Coord. Teach
• Function
• Set current mechanical coordinate value into work piece coordinate.
• Move the worktable to the target location.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate and press 「Mach. Coord. Teach」
• Original value of workpiece coordinate will be replaced by the corresponding mechanical coordinate.
• Example
• Current value of X axis of G54 is 0.000

• Press 「Mach. Coord. Teach」, the value of X axis of G54 becomes 5.000
Rel. Coord. Teach

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Work Piece Coord.→F2 Rel. Coord. Teach
• Function
• Set current relative coordinate value into work piece coordinate.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate and press 「Rel. Coord. Teach」
• Original value of workpiece coordinate will be replaced by the corresponding relative coordinate.
• Example
• Current relative coordinate of X axis is 5.000
• Press 「Rel. Coord. Teach」,the coordinate of G54 X axis become 5.000
Aux. Coord. Teach

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Work Piece Coord.→F3 Aux. Coord. Teach
• Function
• Set the current cursor located work piece coordinate value as the aux. coordinate value.
• Aux. value appears after using middle function.
• Using middle function to calculate the aux. coordinate value.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate and press 「Aux. Coord. Teach」
• Original value of workpiece coordinate will be replaced by the corresponding Aux. coordinate.
• Example
• Press 「Aux. Coord. Teach」, the value of X axis of G54 become 5.000
Inc. Input
• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Work Piece Coord.→F4 Inc. Input
• Function
• Add the work piece coordinate value with the manual input value and restore into work piece
coordinate again.
• Move worktable to the target location.
• Input increment value.
• Move the cursor to the work piece coordinate and press 「Inc. Input」
• Work piece coordinate will be replaced by the cursor located coordinate +input value.
• Example
• Move cursor to the workpiece coordinate G54 of X axis
• Key in 10.000
• Press 「Inc. Input.」
• The coordinate of G54 X axis become 15.000

Middle Func.
• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Work Piece Coord.→F5 Middle Func.
• Function
• This function can help to correlate the middle point of the work piece.
• Input the number that Middle Func caculate result to G54~G59 work piece coordinate.
• Including manual and auto setting method.
Manual
• Function
• Set the Middle Func. as 0
• User controls the machine by MPG, and then moves the tip of 3D machine to the X&Y end point of the
workpiece. This system will calculate the center point of the workpiece automatically.
• Operation method
• Move the machine by MPG, touching Px1 point in tis figure and then press PX1 Set. The system will
record the current mechanical coord. to Px1. It will also compute the middle point of Px1 and Px2
and puts the result on Pxm and Aux. X position.
• Move the machine by MPG, touching Px2 point in this figure and then press PX2 Set. The system will
• Move the machine by MPG, touching Py1 point in tis figure and then press PY1 Set. The system will
record the current mechanical coord. to Py1. It will also compute the middle point of Py1 and Py2
and puts the result on Pym and Aux. Y position.
• Move the machine by MPG, touching Py2 point in this figure and then press PY2 Set. The system will
• Now, the values of Pxm and Pym are the middle point of the workpiece.

• In the WorkPiece Coord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 「Aux. Coord.
Teach」 insert the Aux. Coord value then this system will set the value according to the Aux Coord.
Auto
• Function
• Auto middle func. is different form Manual func. User only needs to enter the dimension of the
workpiece and enter the boundary coordinate. Move the machine to the start point, system will find
out the middle point automatically.
• Parameter description
• Length I: Workpiece X dimension length
• Width J: Workpiece Y dimension length
• Safe Distance H: This is the distance between start point P2 and the workpiece no matter X or Y
direction.
• Feedrate F: Auto. center detect speed.
• Z Coordinate: This is the safety distance prevent the contact between the tool and work piece while
moving.
• Move the tool to the Z height, the safe distance between tool and work piece. After that, press Z
Coordinate Set, then system will record the present Z coordinate value as the safe distance.
• Move the tool down to P2 under the work piece, the start point for auto center.
• Press Auto center start, system will move the tool according to the setting data to contact with work
piece and show the coordinate on the screen. It will also calculate the X Y center point of the work
piece.
• Go back to WorkPiece Coord. Move the cursor the workpiece coordinate position, press F3 「Aux.
Coord. Teach」insert the Aux. Coord. value then this system will set the value according to the Aux
Coord.
Mach. Coord Inc. Teach

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F1 Work Piece Coord.→F6 Mach. Coord Inc. Teach
• Function
• By the Mach. Coord Inc. Teach, set the current cursor located work piece coordinate value as the new
start coordinate value.
• Move the cursor to the relate work piece coordinate and press 「Mach. Coord Inc. Teach」
• Current cursor located work piece coordinate will be replaced by the cursor coordinate+input
number.
• Example
• Current workpiece coordinate G54 of X axis
• Key in 10,000
• Press 「Mach. Coord Inc. Teach」
• the coordinate of G54 X axis become 15.000
Tool Set


• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F2 Tool Set
• Function
• Switch to compensate setting page.
• Actual G41/G42 compensation value = Geometry + Wear diameter
• Actual G43/G44 compensation value = Geometry + Wear length
• Geometry: G41/G42 tool radius Dn compensation setting(not diameter)
• Wear of geometry: Tiny geometry modification of tool.
• Length: G43/G44 tool lengths Hn compensation.
• Length wear: Tiny length modification of tool.
• With 【↑】【↓】【←】【→】key to move the cursor.
• 【PageUp】【PageDown】 to switch the page.
• Key in method: Absolute, Increment, Measure method
• Absolute method:
• Press 「A」 and press 「Enter」
• The value where the cursor is will be set as the input value.
• Increment method
• Press 「I」 and then press 「Enter」.
• The value where the cursor is will be set as input value + cursor value.
• Measure method
• Press 「Z」 and then press 「Enter」, the value where the cursor is will be set as current Z axis relative
coordinate value.
• Press F2 Set Tool Mach. Coord., the value where the cursor is will be set as current Z axis machine
coordinate value.(effective version from 2.2.0)
• Press F3 Set Tool Rel. Coord., the value where the cursor is will be set as current Z axis relative
coordinate value. (effective version from 2.2.0)

• Note
• This Setting is disabled during machining condition.
Clean Z relative coordinate

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F2 Tool Set.→F1 Clear Z Coord
• Function
• Clean the relative value of Z coord.
Tool No.
• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F2 Tool Set→F7Tool No.
• Function
• Refer the chapter 3.3.3.5
Tool Life Manag.

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F2 Tool Set→F8 Tool Life Manag.
• Function
Tool Tip Measure

• F3 Offset/Setting→F3 Tool Tip Measure
• Function
• When the machine is equip with tool detection equipment, via the parameter setting, can move the
machine table to the detective location and execute the top tip measure.
• According to different situation, here are three different method
-Single tool, single workpiece
-Single tool, multi workpiece
-multi tool, multi workpiece
-Refer the chapter 3.3.3.3.

• Command
• Function
• SYNTEC controller provided user to set the related machining parameter by them self.
• Detail explanation please reference「Mill Parameter Manual」.

2.1.1.6 Monitor
• Command:
• F4 Monitor
• Function
• This page monitors key machining information during machining process.

Machine Status Monitor

• Machine information
• Distance to go
• Feed rate
• Spindle
Program Monitor Block

• This block will display current machining program
• Yellow bar indicate to the current running block.
Machining Information
• Function
• It is overlap with 「Process Setting」.
• Press 「Parameter Set」 can switch display information.
• Description
1. G Code
• It will show the G code under machining
2. Run Time Accum
• Processing time for this workpiece now
3. Run Time
• Total machining process time

4. Percentage ratio
• G00 percentage
• G01 percentage
• Spindle speed percentage
5. Total Acum Par
• Total work pieces that had been finished.
• System won't do any initialized action automatically.
• If you want to do the initialization by manual, press 「Parameter Set」 switch to 「Part count」,
set the 「Total Acum Par」 as 0.Part Count
6. Part Count
• Count no. will begin from zero when the program is running.
• Total work pieces number machined by CNC
7. Start Block
• We can set the start block of machining process.
• n: Set the start line number as n. (Ex. 20)
• L+n: Set the start line number as n. (Ex.L20)
• N+n: Search N+n located line number and then assign that line as the start line (Ex. N3).
• T+n: Search T+n located line number and assign it as the start line (Ex. T01).
• If line number is out of max line number, then it will assign to the last line.
• Please refer to 3.4.3.4 break point initialization about start block go back.
8. Tool Data
• T
• 4 numbers
• The first two code are the tool no..
• The last two code are the tool compensate no.

• Description
• This area is overlap with 「Machining Information」, press F4「Parameter Set」to change the displays.
• Explanation of Display:
1. Interrupt Line No.
• Display the last interrupted serial number (N)
2. Interrupt Colum No.
• Display the last interrupted line number (L)
3. Spindle speed
• Speed of spindle.
• It is allow to setting when system is busy. Moreover, it will be enabled immediately
• Feed rate
• Set the speed of the feed rate.。
• It is allow to setting when system is busy, but the value will be updated after completely executing
processing block.
• Total AcumPar
• Total work pieces number machined by CNCSystem cannot automatically reset this value to zero
• Part count
• Setting current work pieces no.
• Count no. will begin from zero when the running program is change.
• When CNC executes M code defined by parameter 3804, part count would be added 1 and run time
will be reset to 0. When required part number is reached, system will change to halt status.
• Required part
• Set the upper limit of part count number.
• Once part count number is reached, an alarm will be pop up and system will change to halt status.

Simulation Area
• Description
• Display the tool trajectory of current program.
• Related setting, please see F2-program-> F5-simulaiton-> F5- Simu. Setting.
• Use F2「Simulation Switch」 to change the display content
Open File to Edit

• Command:
• Function
• Note:
Simulation Switch
• Command:
• Description
MDI Input
• Command:
• Description
• Operation:
• Select MDI mode
• Note:
Parameter Set
• Command:
• Function
Tool Wear Set

• Command:
• F4 Monitor->F5 Tool Wear Set
• Description

• Actual Tool length= Tool length +Tool wear
• Parameter Setting
• Tool Wear Set: Tiny tool length modification.
• Note
• If the tool length is setting by measure method tool wear setting will become 0 after the tool length is
set.

1. Command:
• F4 Monitor-> F6 Start MPG Coordinate
2. Description
• Detail descriptions please refer to 3.4.3.3.
Work Record
• Command:
• Description
Clear Acum Cycle Time

• Command:
• Function
Graph Adjust
• Command:
• Description
• Operation
2.1.1.7 Maintain
• Command:
• F8 Maintain
• Description

Alarm
• Command:
• Description
Pending Alarm
• Command:
• Description
History Alarm
• Command:
• Description
• Note:
Save Alarm
• Command:
• Description

Network Setting
• Command:
• Description
• IP Address
• Sunet Mask
• PC name
• Dir name

Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• Description
• Related infor.
• Timeout(ms)
Start Server
• Command:
• Description

Fast Diagnostic
• Command:
• Description

System Data
• Command:
• Description

Axes Data
• Command:
• Function

PLC Param Setting
• Command:
• Description
specific functions.
• Operation

System Setting
• Command:
• Description
• Operation

System Time Setting

• YYYY: year
• MM: month
• DD: day
• HH: hours
• MM: minute
• SS: second


Backup System
• Command:
• Description
About
• Command:
• Function

• POWER ON


• POWER OFF
• Turn off controller's power
• Emergency Stop
guaranteed.
• Home Mode

• JOG Mode (Rapid JOG)
• Operators can use JOG to control axis movement with 「X+/X-/Y+/Y-/Z+/Z-」 on panel.
• Operators can use JOG to control axis movement.

• MPG Mode
• User can use MPG (Manual Pulse Generator) mode to control axis movement.
• AUTO Mode

• MDI Mode

• MPG Simulation
• Enable this function under 「AUTO」 and 「MDI」 Mode, the percentage of moving speed is depend on
the MPG turning speed . This function used to check NC file.
• Single Block
• Enable this function under 「AUTO」 and 「MDI」 Mode, after finished one block action hold on the 「B-
STOP」 mode. To continue, users need to do the 「Cycle start」 action again. This function used to
check NC file.

• Optional Stop
• Users can use this function to decide whether CNC is stop or not when encounter with 「M01」within
NC (Numerical Control) program, while executing NC program.
• Optional Skip
• Users can use this function to decide whether program skips or not when program is encountered
with 「/」 sign in NC file.
• Auto Tool Change in clock wise direction
• Auto Tool Change ATC in counter clock wise direction
• Spindle Control
Spindle CW rotation
Spindle stop
Spindle rate deceleration: Spindle speed will decelerate 10%.
Spindle rate 100%: Spindle will rotate with 100%.

Spindle rate acceleration: Spindle speed will accelerate 10%.
• Working LED
• Turn ON/OFF working LED

• G01 Rank

Decrease G01 rate 10% Increase G01rate10% G01 rate100%
• G00 Rank

G00 rate x1 G00 rate x10 G00 rate x100 G00 rate x1000
• Those function key can be regard as G00, MPG or INJOG rank.
• Blowing
• ON/OFF blowing air.

• Cutting coolant system
• Turn ON/OFF working liquid.

• Auto cutting coolant system
• This function will be enable, when encounter with relate coolant on/off M code in NC program.
• Chip conveyor machine move in clockwise direction
• Chip conveyor machine move in counter clockwise direction

• Augment key(User define)
• Machine builder augment key, combine with PLC ladder.

• Direction of linear Axes &Rotation Axes & fast travel key
• Move the axes with fast travel speed key when press the axes and fast travel key at the same time.
2.1.2.2 Keyboard Description
： Numerical keys
： Delete key
： Switch keyboard to use subscript key on keyboard
： Space key

： While working with text, use this key to delete characters to the left of the
insertion point.
： For optional skip key input
： End of block
： Change to program edit page.
： Change to monitor page.
： Change to customize teach page. (Disable function key with no customize action)
： Insert word when edit program.

： Delete word when edit program.
： PAGE UP
： PAGE DOWN
Not Ready
Conditions:


Ready
Conditions:
Busy
Conditions:
Feed Hold
• Condition
Status.
• Notice
B-Stop
Conditions:
Manual Function
JOG
• Function:
• Condition:


• Operation:
Rapid JOG
• Function:
• Condition:
• Operation:
• Note:

• Function:
distance)
• Condition:
• Operation:
MPG
• Function:
• Condition:
• Operation:
movements as below:

Machining Process
AUTO
• Condition:
• Operation:
• Press 「CYCLE START」 button
finished
Single Block
• Function:
• Condition:
• Operation:
finished
Home
• Operation:
machine too fast

2.1.3.3 Workpiece Preparation
Workpiece Cord set
• Command:
• F3 Offset/Setting -> F1 Workpiece Coord. Set
• Use and 、 move the cursor to the coord. you want to key in。
• Can use the Latch Machine Coord. to insert the value.
• Can use the Relative Machine Coord. to insert the value.
• Can use the Aux. Coord. to insert the value
Middle Func.
• Function:
Middle function is used for finding middle point of the workpiece. Use the middle point as the start point. As
a result, we need to touch the edge of the workpiece by too or detector. After controller gets the coordinate,
it will calculate the middle point itself. We only need to set this point as the machining start point. Please
confirm that your maching has automatic alignment tool and then you can use this function.
• Operation:
In the 8 botton system, user can use this function by press F3 Offset/Setting ->F1 Workpeice Cord. ->F6

Middle Func.
Manual 4Pts Center

• Function
• Move the maching by MPG, touching Px1 point in this figure and then press PX1 Set. The system will
record the current machnical coord. to Px1. It will also compute the middle point of Px1 and Px2 and
puts the result on Pxm and Aux. X position.
• Move the maching by MPG, touching Py1 point in this figure and then press PY1 Set. The system will
record the current machnical coord. to Py1. It will also compute the middle point of Py1 and Py2 and
puts the result on Pym and Aux. Y position.
• In the WorklPiece Cord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 insert the Aux.
Coord value then this system will set the value accordind to the Aux Coord.

Manual 3Pts Center
• Operation:
• Set the Middle func. as 0, the left upper side will show Manual Center
• Set the second line, the middle method, as 1. You can see the screen as this figure.
• Move the tool or detector to the round workpiece edge.
• Press P1 set, system will record the current X and Y coordinates to Px1 and Py1.
• Move to another edge point, press P2 set. System will record the current X and Y coordinates to Px2
and Py2.
and Py3.
• After setting these, press Calculate the Center. System will calculate the center point Pxm, Pym and
R.
• The Aux. Coordinate will become Pxm and Pym.
• If you set the same point or this three point is inline, it will have a warning window pop out.
• Now you can press go back to previous page to reset the coordinate.

OUTAutoCenter
• Operation:
• Set the Middle func. as 1, the left upper side will show Manual Center.
• Key in Length I and Width J for workpiece real length and width.
• Set Z coordinate, this value is for the the automatical measurement that tool can touch the
workpiece edge plane
• Set Safe Distance H, this distance is that the tool will not hit with workpiece.
• Set Feedrate F, this Feedrate is the measuring tool velocity during auto center process.
• Press Auto center start, system will move the tool according to the setting data to contact with
workpiece and show the coordinate on the screen. It will also calculate the X Y center point of the
workpiece
• The center point will be saved at Pxm and Pym.
R.
• Now you can press go back to previous page to set the coordinate.
• In the WorkPiece Cord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 insert the Aux.
Coord value then this system will set the value according to the Aux Coord.

INAutoCenter
• Operation:
• Set Z coordinate, this value is for the auto measurement that tool can touch the workpiece edge
plane
• Set feed rate F, this feed rate is the measuring tool velocity during auto center process.
• Press Auto center start
Tool Prepare
Tool Set
• Purpose
• We can set the length and the diameter geometry and wear
• Operation condition
• Can be used at Manual or Auto mode
• Wear value increment upper limit is 1.0, warning will appear if exceed 1.0.
• Use direction key 【↑】【↓】【←】【→】move the cursor.
• Use【PageUp】【PageDown】switch the page.
• Key in method: Absolute, Increment, Measure method.
• Absolute: for radius and length compensate.
• Increment: for radius wear and length wear.
• Radius compensate + radius wear = real G41/G42 compensate.

• Length compensate +length wear = real G43/G44 compensate.
Manual Measurement of Tool Length

• Purpose
• Describe how to use manual measurement to set tool length and work piece coordinate in order to
set the machining tool.
• Function
• We usually set the tool length and offset in the External Shift if we only use one tool in this machine.
• If we have more than one tool, we need to set every tool length we can use relative length or absolute
length.
• Manual mode.
• Manual Operation method
-Relative method.
• Use manual function moving the reference tool to the Z-coordinate code 0 position of the workpiece
(Ex. surface), set the value at G54.
• Clean all the relative coordinate value.
• Install the measured tool, move the tool to the same position as before (reference surface).
• The tool length is the different between measured tool and reference tool.
• Key in this number to the corresponding tool No.
• If tool break during machining and replace a new tool, we need to change to a new tool. If the Z-cord
0 position already disappear, we can use the standard tool to touch anywhere of the machine and
then use new tool to touch the same position. The relative cord. is tool length.
-Absolute method
• Use manual function moving the measuring tool to a reference point (Ex. Work piece table).
• Measure every tool repeatedly.
• Move the machining tool to the reference position, clean all the relative coordinate.
• Move the tool to the Z-coord code zero position, set it to G54.
• If tool break during machining so we need change a new tool, we must touch the reference position
first, and then the Z coordinate value is tool length.
Tool Tip Measure

• Function
• Measuring different tool No. tip position. Because the trigger position of tool alignment equipment is
fixed, user can use different tool tip position key in the workpiece coordinate system for the
reference of tool length offset. You must check this machine has tool alignment equipment.
• Offset/Setting→Tool Tip Measure

Auto Tool Function

• Function
Z coord. Auto Tool Function is to measure different tool No. by tool alignment equipment. Because the
trigger position of the tool alignment equipment is almost the same. User can key in different tool No. tip
position into workpiece coordinate for the tool length offset setting, please this machine is equipped with
tool alignment equipment.
• Operation description
Offset/Setting→Tool Tip Measure

• One Tool One Workpiece
• Set the Auto Tool number as 1(left-upper corner).

• Set the WorkPiece No. P as the workpiece coordinate.
• Table X- Coordinate table
Workpiece coord No. P Workpiece coord Workpiece coord No. P Workpiece coord
0 Aux. Coord 1 G54
2 G55 3 G56
4 G57 5 G58

• Set the Feedrate F for the first time alignment and pull back everytime.
• Please skip to next step setting XY Ref. Coord. Teach if tool alignment equipment already has fixed
mechanical coordinate. If current position is the same with tool alignment equipment, please set Use
Reference as 0.
• While setting the XY Ref. Coord. Teach, you will need code "520", enter it and choose yes. These
vaules will be entered in to Ref coord.X and Ref coord.Y.
• Move the cursor to Start Coord. Z, setting the start point for the auto alignment. Press F10 and then
press Z Mach. Coord. Teach, you can insert the current Z coord. value into Start Coord. Z.
• Move the cursor to the Min. Z Mach. H, setting the minimum height for the alignment. System will pop
out warning masseage and stop if the tool is lower than it.
• Please switch to auto mode after setting these and then press Start.

• After finishing alignment, this tool height value will be saved into Aux. Coord. and External Shift.
• Move the tool tip (Manual) to the surface of workpiece, press Z Delta Set, the distance between
alignment tool and workpiece surface will be calculate and set into this workpiece Z coordinate.
• One Tool One Workpiece is finished
• One Tool Many Workpieces
• Set the Auto Tool number as 2.(left-upper corner)

• Set the feed rate F for the first time alignment and pull back every time.
Reference as 0.
values will be entered in to Ref coord.X and Ref coord.Y.
out warning message and stop if the tool is lower than it.
• Move the tool tip (Manual) to the surface of next workpiece, press Z Delta Set, the distance between

1 G54 2 G55
3 G56 4 G57
5 G58
Z Delta set table

• If you have another workpieces need to set do the previous step again.
• Many Tool Many Workpieces

• Set the Tool No. T for the tool you want to align.
Reference as 0.
press Z Mach. Coord. Teach, you can insert the current Z coord. values into Start Coord. Z.

• If you have another workpieces and tools need to set do the previous step again.
• Finish alignment.
Tool No. Setting

This Chapter will describe how to set the tool No.
• Purpose:
• We need to confirm the relation between Tool No. and real tool in order to change tool correctly.
• Condition:
• Both Auto mode or Manual mode are OK..
• Tool Set→Tool No.
• You will see the table about Tool No. and Tool MG.
• MG5—T = 7 means we install tool No.7 at Tool case No.5
• This table will renew during change a new tool.

• Time to Modify
• First initialized when it is made from factory.
• Need to confirm the MG No. and T No. Manually when it is disordered.

• Purpose:
Record the status of all cutting tool on machine, make users know whether cutting tool reached to Max. Life,
avoid machining in case cutting tool is broken. This function needs a related PLC setting. In case, customer

• Condition
• Both auto and manual can be used.
• Operation
• Description
• Turret
• Group
the second one, when the second one is lock or「Tool life」is end, will use the third one, and so
on.
• Tool information (Status)
number of time.

• When lifetime of tool is greater than lifetime prediction, alarm will be show up.
(0)Without management: Set values are not effective.
(1) Without use: Lifetime of tool is zero.
(2) Usable:0< Tool Life Time <lifetime prediction
(3) End prediction: Lifetime prediction < Tool Lifetime < Maximum Lifetime
(4) End of Life: Maximum Lifetime < Tool Lifetime
(5)ware of tool

• Condition
• Operation
• Confirmation:
Simu. Setting
program.
• Condition
• Operation
press F7-Simulation
-Simulation screen
checking purpose.

Machining Test
MPG Simulation
• Condition
• Operation
• Confirm
Single Block
• Condition
• Operation

• Condition
• Confirmation
• Note

• R606 must be 1
• Time to disable
• Limit
to MPG simulation.
Break Point
• Condition
• Under Auto mode
• Execute.
Machining Monitor
Part Count Manager

• Description
1. Total accum part
3. Part count
reset

• Description

status
Alarm Processing
Emergency Stop
Alarm Display
Pending Alarm
History Alarm
reason.
• Command:
Save Alarm
• Operation
• File Name

Network Setting
1. On the interface screen, press down"F8 Maintain" => "F2 Network Setting" to access IP address setting.
2. IP Address Setting: select "Specify an IP Address" when the PC connects with controller directly. And select
"Obtain an IP Address via DHCP" if using network connection via Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
3. IP Address: if you select "Specify an IP Address", enter the free IP address
4. Subnet Mask: Enter the IP address for subnet mask (the same with PC subnet mask).
5. PC Name: Enter the full computer name of your PC.
6. Dir Name: Enter the sharing folder name (the same name with PC sharing folder )
7. User Name: Enter GUEST
8. Press「F1 OK」, and then reboot controller to finish installation.

PC Setting
XP OS

here"

change my files".



5. TCP/IP setting

[TCP/IP]"


VISTA OS


d. Click on "add"
3. Security setting


5. TCP/IP Setting


setting)


Win 7 OS


sharing….."





3. TCP/IP Setting


File Import
• Operation
File Export
• Operation
• Note:

2.1.4 Appendix

Fax：+886-3-6663505 TEL：+86-512-69008860
Taichung Taichung
TEL：+886-4-25337731 TEL：+886-4-23102626
FAX：+886-4-25349224 FAX：+886-4-23102636

FAX：+886-6-2796705 TEL：0512-69560828
Address： FAX：0512-69560818
Branch Ningbo City.
TEL：+86-571-82751187 TEL：+86-574-87750305
FAX：+-86-571-82751186 FAX：+86-574-87750306
TEL：0576- 86138372 TEL：+86-20-34583040
FAX：0576-86119106 FAX：+86-20-34583220
Branch Xi'an Office
TEL：+86-769-81660318 TEL：029-88287423
FAX：+86-769-81660328 FAX：029-88287423
TEL：18700712118 FAX：+86-53185905708

FAX：+86-592-7220536 TEL：+86-22-87134111
501
TEL：0379-65110352 TEL：023-67913296
FAX：0379-65110352 FAX：023-67634382
Henan
TEL：0512-69008860-300 TEL：027-87638876
TEL：024-25821398 TEL：15951989576
Shenzhen Thailand
TEL：0755-84584085 FAX：+66-27575476
10540


TEL：+603-61577632 Lebanon Beirut, Jdeideh - Ammaieh - Kessmeyan
FAX：+603-61574632 Group Build.DamascusTEL: +963 11 6731602Mob.: +963
Address： 988 211407E-Mail : info@rockwell.tw
E-Mail：
France Turkey
TEL：+33 2 35 06 07 83 TEL：+90-224-4434684
FAX：+33 2 35 06 07 83 FAX：+90-224-4434685
vaque.j@online.fr18 Address：
Address： Besevler K.S.S. 17 BLOK NO:72 Nilufer/BURSA/TURKYIE
6, Rue l'arché de Copigny, 76630 BAILLY, FRANCE
ISTANBUL/TURKEY
AKSIS MAKINA
TEL：+90 212 613 87 83
FAX：+90 212 613 87 85
E-Mail：
Address：

2.2 Mill Operation Manual
2.2.1 CNC Milling Controller Interface


The screen of controller is shown as followings:

（1）Program Number
（2）Title
（3）Time
（4）Date
（5）Data Input
（6）Hint
（7）Status
（8）Function Key Switch


The following diagram is the main menu selections for SNC Mill controller. To operate SNC Milling controller, users
simply make the selections by pressing function keys, F1～F8 located on the bottom of the screen.
F1：Position
coordinate. Pressing function key, F1, under the main menu to enter this selection (Note：This is the first screen
when the system is booted up)

Meaning of fields on the display------

• X：X axis coordinate.
• Y：Y axis coordinate.
• Z：Z axis coordinate.
• Feedrate：Feedrate of cutting tool at each machining, mm per minute (mm/min).
• Spindle：RPM of spindle speed.
• Machine(Relative coordinate of working platform)
• The current position of cutting tool relative to working platform is shown as machine coordinate on the
display.
• Relative
• The current position of cutting tool relate to the previous location.
• Absolute(Programming Coordinate)
• The current position of the origin of user defined coordinate is shown as an absolute position on the display.
• Distance To Go：The distance of the cutting tool that need to move to the next position show on position
and negative direction.
Function key selections：
F1：Switch Coordinate
• Function：Switch Coordinate Display。
• Operation：Under the Position submenu, whenever users press F1 key, the values and coordinate on the
left corner of the display will toggle among the four different coordinates with bigger fonts as shown in the

following figure:
F2：Half Coordinate
• Function: Set the center point of work piece as coordinate origin.
• Operation: Under the Position submenu, when the message line shows "X Input"(or "Y Input" or "Z Input"),
press "F2 Half Coordinate" and the origin of the coordinate will move to the center point of work piece.
F3：Zero Coordinate
• Function：Reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero. (No effect on other axes)
• Operation：Under the Position submenu, when the message line shows "X Input"(or "Y Input" or "Z Input"),
press F3 to reset the value of X(or Y or Z) axis relative coordinate to zero.
F4：Zero All Coordinate

• Function：Reset XYZ relative coordinate to zero.(No effect on other coordinates)
• Operation ：Under the Position submenu, pressing "F4" will reset XYZ relative coordinate to zero.
F5：Set Work Piece

• Function：Relative to machine coordinate setting for G54~G59.
• Operation：Under the Position submenu, press "F5" key and the following screen will show up. The users
can begin to set the auto machine coordinate settings of G54~G59. (The system needs to be in Ready Status)
1. "External Shift": operator can set the all coordinate G54..G59 at the same time.

2. CNC default G54, if user don't set any G54..G59 in the NC file
F1：Latch Machine Coord.

Set the current machine coordinate to the cursor box.
F2：Latch Relative Coord.
Set the current relative coordinate to the cursor box.
F3：Latch Aux. Coord.
Set the current auxiliary coordinate to the coordinate system in which cursor places. An axis is set at a time.
F4：Next Coord. Page
When the number of axis is more than 4-axis, user can use this key to switch absolute coordinate of other axis. The
main page could only shows five coordinates. When user has more than five coordinates, user could use F4 to turn
the page to see the rest of coordinates.
F5：Middle Func.
Refer to section 3.11 for option description.
F6：Tool Tip Measure
Refer to section 3.12 for option description.
F7：Mach Coord. Teach
Set the summary the current machine coordinate and the value of blue input box to the cursor box.
F8：Coord. Incremental Input
Add the value of blue input box to the cursor box
F2：Program

Program Sub menu Key Selections:
F1：Insert Cycle
• Function：Insert a block or cycle by conversation

• Operation：Under Program submenu, press F1 to insert a line or cycle before cursor position.(See Graphic
Input Interface(900ME) User Guide)
F2：Delete Line
• Function：Delete a line at cursor position.
• Operation: Under Program submenu, press F2 to delete a line where the cursor is located.
F3：Edit Cycle
• Function：Edit an old block or cycle by conversation input
• Operation: Under Program submenu, press F3 to edit a line where the cursor is located.

F5：Sub Edit Menu

• Function: Edit sub function " Search", "Replace", "Goto line", "Copy line", "Insert line."
• Operation: User can use this menu for more edit sub function.

Sub Edit Menu "F1: Search"

• Function：Search String.
• Objective: Search a specific string in the file in order to edit or ensure the existence of the string.
• Operation：
1. Under Program submenu,press F5 to enter "Sub Edit Menu" (Note: If interface has five function keys,
press right click to switch into next layer. and then F1 "Sub Edit Menu".)
2. Under Sub Edit Menu, select F1"Search" to search for the string. A dialog box will pop up asking users
to input a string which will be searched as shown in the following figure.

3. After keying in a string, press F1 to start searching. System will start search from the place at which
cursor is. The cursor will be placed at the string found after search.
Sub Edit Menu "F2: Replace"

• Function：Replace string.
• Objective: Replace specific string in the file by the string user enters.
• Operation：
1. Under Program submenu, press F5 to enter "Sub Edit Menu" (Note: If interface has five function keys,
press right click to switch into next layer. and then F1 "Sub Edit Menu.")
2. Under Sub Edit Menu, select F2"Replace" to replace the string. A dialog box will pop up asking users
to input the replacing string and the new string as shown in the following figure. After keying in a
string, press F1 to start searching. System will start search from the place at which cursor is. The
cursor will be placed at the string found after search
3. Afterwards, select F2"Replace" to replace the indicated string with the new one. If selecting F1 "Find
Next", system will not replace the indicated string, continue to search for the string and wait for the
replace confirm.
4. Select F3"Replace All" to replace all the strings in the program.

5. Select F4 "Cancel" to stop Replace function.
Sub Edit Menu "F3": Goto Line"

• Function：Go to a line number
• Objective: Enable to jump to a specified line of file for editing. Operation：
1. Under Program submenu, press F5 to enter "Sub Edit Menu" (Note: If interface has five function keys,
press right click to switch into next layer. and then F1 "Sub Edit Menu.")
2. Under Sub Under Sub Edit Menu, select F3 "Goto Line". A dialog box will pop up asking users to input
the desired line to jump to, as shown in the following figure. After keying in a string, press F1 to start
searching. System will start search from the place at which cursor is. The cursor will be placed at the
string found after search

3. After specifying the desired line, select F1" Enter". System will place the cursor at the specified line. If
specified line number is over the total file line, the cursor will be placed at the last line..
Sub Edit Menu "F4": Copy line"

• Function：Copy a line from current cursor to next line
• Operation：Under Program submenu, press F5 "Sub Edit Menu" and then F4"Copy line" to Copy the line
from current cursor to the next line.
Sub Edit Menu "F5": "Insert line"
• Function：Insert a space line above current cursor line
• Operation：Under Program submenu, press F5 "EDIT" and then F5"Insert line" to insert a new space line.
Sub Edit Menu "F6":"Block Copy"
• Function：Block selecting, copy, move and deletion are available (line as a unit)
• Operation：Under Program submenu, press F5 "Sub Edit Menu" and then F6"Block Copy" to enter Edit
Block function page.
Subfunctions under "Block Copy"

Through "Block Copy"j functions editing page, "cut and paste" function which resembles that in Windows system is
available. Actions of block selecting, copy, move and deletion are performed in line. "Block Copy" key is in "Sub Edit
Menu" under program editing page.
• F1：Start line
Function：Specify the start of a wanted copy block.
• F2：End line
Function：Specify the end of a wanted copy block.
• F3：Block Cut
Function：Cut the selection program.
Operation：

1. Under "Program" page, press F5 "Sub Edit Menu" and then F6"Block Copy" to enter Edit Block
function page.
2. Press F1 "Start line" to specify the start of a wanted copy block. Press F2 "End line" to specify the end
of a wanted copy block.
3. Move the cursor to the place to which selected block is to copy. Press F3 "Block cut" to cut currently
selected block to the cursor place. (The bottom right figure shows the result of a cut program.)
• F4：Block Copy
Function：Copy part block of current program
Operation：
function page.
2. Press F1 "Start line" to specify the start of a wanted block to be moved. Press F2 "End line" to specify
the end of a wanted block to be moved.
3. Move the cursor to the place to which selected block is to move. Press F4 "Block Copy" to copy
currently selected block to the cursor place. (The bottom right figure shows the result of a copied
program.)
• F5：Block Patse
Function：Paste part block which was cut or copied. Operation：
function page.

2. Move the cursor to the place need to be pasted. Press F5 "Block Patse" to paste.
F6：Teach
F1：Rapid Teach
• Function: Add "G00" code to NC files, G00 to current absolute coordinate,
F2：Line Cut Teach
• Function: Add "G01" code to NC files, G01 to current absolute coordinate,
F3：Arc Cut Teach
• Function: Add "G02" or "G03" code to NC files
• 1st time press this key "Arc Cut Teach " ,CNC auto put current value to Arc middle point
• 2nd time press this key "Arc Cut Teach " ,CNC auto calculate G02 or G03 ,and filled the complete code to NC
files
F4：Cancel Arc Middle
• Function: When arc teach, user can use this key to abort middle point teach.
F6：Delete Line
• Function: When user use Teach function , user can use this key "Delete line " to delete line
F7：Next Coord Page
• Function: When the number of axis is more than 4-axis, user can use this key to switch absolute coordinate
of other axis. The main page could only shows five coordinates. When user has more than five coordinates,
user could use F7 to turn the page to see the rest of coordinates.
F8：Point Teach
• Function: Add current absolute coordinate to NC files.
F7：Simulation
• Function: Simulating the work piece program can prove the accuracy of the editing program.

• Operation：Under Program submenu, press F7
F7 "simulation" sub Key Selections：

F1：StepFunction: To simulate NC files step by step
• Operation: Under Program submenu, press F7"Simulation" and then F1"Step".The operator can use this
function ,to check NC file step by step
F2：Continue
• Function: To simulation NC file one time.
• Operation: Under Program submenu, press F7 "Simulation" and then F2"Continue".The operator can use
this function to check NC file whole picture ,when button is pushed.
F3：Zoom
• Function: To enlarge the work piece graph.
• Operation: Under Program submenu, press F7 and then F3.The operator can use the "←","↑","→", "↓"
cursor to move the frame to the determined area. And use "Page Up" "Page Dn" to nlarge this area.
F5：Graph Reset
• Function: To recover the zoomed workpiece graph.
F6：Abort
• Function: To abort simulation action
F8：Simu. Setting
• Function: To set simulation parameter

•
Simulation Parameter descriptions:
• Path: User can select cutting path color by this parameter
• Cursor : User can select cutting point color by this parameter
• Drawing mode: User can select simulation plane by this parameter
• Vertical / Horizontal: when XYZ drawing mode ,user can select 3D View angle by these 2 parameter
Window range:
• Simu Mode (Simulation /Direct draw/no Simulation)
• Simulation: When operator change his main screen to F4"Monitor" ,CNC would automatically simulation at
that screen
• Direct draw: When operator change his main screen to F4"Monitor" ,CNC would not simulation at that
screen but direct drawing the cutting cursor .
• No Simulation: when operator change the main screen to F4""Run", CNC will not show any drawing in the
screen.
Xmin/Xmax, Ymin/Ymax, Zmin/Zmax :

When "direct draw" mode, operator must set draw window by these parameter, the best way: after simulation use
simulation result which is located at the top of this screen to X, Y, Z range.
F8：File Manager
Under Program submenu, press F5 and the following diagram will show up. Users can use arrow keys（↑、↓）to
select file to be edited. After pressing【ENTER】, content of the file will show up on the screen

Key Selections：
F1：New File
• Operation：
Step 1: A dialog box will prompt users with "New File". Type in the new file name and press 【ENTER】.
Step 2: An empty screen shows up waiting users to type in a new program.
F2：Copy File
• Operation: After pressing F2, a dialog box will prompt users to type in a file name and press 【ENTER】. The
current file is then copy to the hard disk with a different file name.
F3：Delete File
• Operation: Select a file to be delete by pressing （↑、↓）. A dialog box will pop up to confirm this operation.
F4：File Import
• Function：Input file from selected place.
• Operation：Press F4"File Export". Then pressing F5 to choose the disk where the file should be
placed（←、→）. After pressing enter, using Select a file name by pressing（↑、↓）. Press【ENTER】to input
the file from disk

F5：File Export
• Function: Output file to selected place
• Operation: Press F4"Sile Export". Then pressing F5 to choose the disk where the file should be placed（←、
→）. After pressing enter, using Select a file name by pressing（↑、↓）. Press F6"Switch focus to im/export"

to change the cursor place. Press【ENTER】to input the file from disk
F3：DlgInput (ONLY for 940M)

Pressing "F3" under the main menu to begin dialog box input as shown in the following figure. After users follow the
prompts shown on the dialog box to key in every needed parameter, the CNC milling controller can start milling a
work piece immediately.
F4：Run
This selection displays machining speed, time, manual data input (MDI) and some machine information such as
Key Selections：
F1：Select File
• Function: Select a file from Disk.

• Operation: Under Run submenu, press F1 to choose the file that user want to run.
F2：Graph Adjust
Key Selections：

F1：Zoom
• Function: To enlarge the work piece graph.
• Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2 and then F1.The operator can use the cursor to move the
frame to the determined area.
F2：Graph Reset
• Function: To recover the zoomed work piece graph.
• Operation: Under Monitor submenu, press F2"Graph Adjust" and then F2"Graph Reset"
F3：MDI Input
• Function：Manual Data Input
• Operation：Users can operate SNC Milling Controller manually in MDI mode. Press F3 under Monitor
submenu and type in single-line G or M code. Press F1 (OK) to confirm the input command. The typed-in
command line will show on right upper corner of the screen. Users simply press 【CYCLE START】on the
machine panel to execute the single-line command. The following figure shows an example of this function.
F4：Parameter Set
• Function：To set the part count and also set required current
Operation：From this screen users can set the part count what he needs.When CNC execute M02, M30 and
M99, part count would add 1 automatically. When part count reach required part count, CNC would stop

executing..
F5：Tool Set
• Function：To set the tool compensation value
• Operation：
Radius: G41/G42 tool radius Dn compensation (not diameter)
Radius wear: for small radius dimension adjust
Length: G43/G44 tool length Hn compensation

Length wear: for small length dimension adjust
F6：Tool Manager
F6：Start MPG Coordinate

• Function：
Modifying the coordinate system while processing. In a certain block, if user inserts a displacement by hand
wheel, the remained blocks will process with this displacement vector until process finishes. When Tool
wear and error in tool setting occurs, tool may cut too deep or cut nothing.
[This function is available in version 10.114 and later versions.]
• Operation：
After pressing, current state of hand wheel displacement coordinate system will be shown. While turning the
wheel, the displacement will be add into hand wheel displacement coordinate system and program
coordinate remains unchanged.

"Esc" closes the function.

F8：Work Record
• Function：This table can record 300 sets executed NC file, this is very helpful to know the end of user
working history.
F5：Alarm
following figure.

Key Selections:
F1：Pending Alarm
• Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F1 to show current alarm situation.
F2：History Alarm
• Operation: Under the Alarm submenu, press F2 to show the alarm history of the system.
F5: Save Alarm

• Function：Save Alarm History To File.
• Operation：Under the Alarm submenu, press F5 to save alarm history to a file as shown in the following
figure. A dialog box will prompt users to type in file name to be saved. After selecting a disk drive by using

( ↑、↓、←、→), users press【ENTER】to confirm this operation.

F6：Parameter
Under the main menu, press F6 to enter this function as shown in the following figure.
Descriptions of sub functions are as below:
F1：User param
• Function：
Drive the parameters of server system, for example: server parameter, mechanism parameter, range of
program stroke, and max. feedrate speed..etc.
• Operation：
When system is in manual data input mode (MDI), user should press stop button before setting any
parameter ("unready" shown on the state). Whenever the parameter is changed, system must be restart to
effect the changes.

F2：Service Param
F3：Maker Param
F4：Pitch Table
F5：Goto Param
F6：System Setting
F7：5 Axis Param
F6：Restart CNC
F10：Next Page
• F4：High speed high precision parameter setting.
• Function：
One default parameter, P10000, and five other parameters, P1~P5, are provided for users to execute cutting
command. G90/G91 decides whether absolute or increment mode is used. Feedrate is decided by F code for
high speed & high precision interpolation.
• Operation：

1. Enter human-machine interface=> select parameter setting (F6) => select F10 => select F4 to enter high
speed high precision setting modes. Pr407 setting is not available in DOS system.
2. Available G code mode：G62, G62.9, G05. G05 is not available in DOS system.
3. Command form：
G05 P ；//Start high speed high precision mode

…
G01 X_ Y_ Z_ F__；
G02 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ ；
G00 X_ Y_ Z_ ；
…
G05 P0；// cancel high speed high precision mode
P：high speed high precision mode setting
X、Y、Z：specified coordinate
F7：Diagnosis
7This selection provides users with direct access to the memory area for parameter checking, parameter settings
press F7 to access this function as shown in the following figure.

Key Selections:
F1：PLC Status
• Function: Display the component states of PLC and state of staircase chart.

F2：Display System Data

• Function：Display current system data (refer to application manual for each corresponding meaning of the
serial number.)

F3：Display Global
F4：Display Coord
F4：Display Coord
F8：System Admin
F1：Install Software
F2：Backup System
F3：Restore System
F4：Export/Import
F5：Install Image
F6：System Info.
F7：Update Boot Picture

F8：About
This function offers user to obtain system information.
2.2.2 Machine operation panel
2.2.2.1 2nd machine operation panel
POWER ON
Turn on main power
POWER OFF
Turn off power
Emergency STOP
For safety reason, press this button, CNC would stop all movement, and also stop all main power. So people and
machine safety is guarantee.

Home mode and Home function

Description: When CNC power is on, please do the home function
Operation:
1. Mode select to HOME mode
2. Press axis manual key X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+,Z-:
3. CNC would start the machine home function
JOG (Rapid JOG)

Operation:
1. Mode select to JOG mode
3. Operator can use JOG% or G01% adjust Jog federate
6. Operator can use G00% Rapid Jog federate
G00 %: Adjust G00 % (F0 .25% .50% .100%)
G01 %: Adjust G01/G02 /G03 feedrate override %:
Inc JOG
Operation:
1. Mode select to INC JOG mode
3. Operator can set the incremental distance by G00 rotary switch
4. , * 1 : 1um ,*10 : 10um ,*100 : 100um
MPG
Description: User can use this function to move the machine by MPG (Manual Pulse Generator)
Operation:
1. Mode select to MPG mode
*100:100um , *1000 : 1000um
AUTO mode
Operation:
3. Set work piece Coord.. (G54..G59), CNC default G54, if user don't set any G54..G59 in the NC file
4. Set to "Tool Setting",to select tool radius and tool length .

6. Press "Feedhold" key to feedhold the NC program ,if it's necessary
MDI mode
Operation:
4. Press F3 "MDI Input", screen would pop up a window.
5. After key in data ,press "ENTER" key to input the data
7. If MDI block syntax is correct ,data in MDI menu would disappear
MPG Simulation

Operation:
1. Mode select to AUTO mode
7. MPG rotate faster ,machining speed is faster
8. When MPG stop, CNC stop.
P.S. this function is very friendly for user to check his programs
Dry Run

Operation:

Single block

Operation:
Option Stop
Operation:
6. This function uses to change tool or check workpiece
Option Skip
Description: User can use this function to decide NC file '/" is skip or not
Operation:
4. When CNC execute "/" ,CNC would skip this block
Spindle control
Spindle CW rotate

Spindle stop
Spindle CCW rotate
Spindle low speed: When spindle is rotate, press this key, spindle would rotate with low speed
Working led
ON/OFF working led
Working Liquid
Flush working liquid
Aux table backward
Aux table forward
2.2.2.2 Text key description:
： English 26 character key
： numerical key

： delete a character
： Insert /replace mode switch
： for select keyboard the other text key
： for select keyboard the other text key
： "Backspace" delete a character
： "RESET " abort the CNC status ,so please be careful to use this key
： to input current data to input box
： press this key ,user can get help message about this screen
： for optional skip key input
： end of block
： decimal fraction

Above symbols are used for "Program Edit" mode.
： edit cursor Page Up /Page Down
： edit cursor control key
2.2.3 How to operate SYNTEC 900ME

This chapter is written for user task, when user operates this controller ,operator can follow task description as
below STEP by STEP ,so very easy to use this controller ,TASK description as below :
1. Manuel function(JOG ,INC_JOG ,MPG)
2. HOME
3. Import /out port Files
4. Tool setting (G40/G41/G42 ,G43/G44/G49)
5. Tool Length measurement (G43/G44/G49)
6. Setting the Work piece origin offset value (G54..G59)
7. Manual Data Input(MDI)
8. Assigned an executing NC file (AUTO)
9. Graphic Simulation
10. How to check NC file in SYNTEC controller
11. Auto center
12. Auto Tool
13. Return of breaking point
14. PLC bit parameter function
2.2.3.1 Manual function (JOG, INC_JOG, MPG)
When SYNTEC CNC power on, there are 3 mode to manual machine
JOG:

4. Operator can use JOG% adjust JOG speed
5. Operator can press axis direction key and rapid key "～" at the same time, machine will move by rapid speed
6. Rapid JOG speed can be adjusted by G00%
Inc JOG:
4. Operator can select incremental distance by G0% (*1,*10,*100)
MPG incremental jog (MPG):

2.2.3.2 HOME
Because tool setting, work piece coordinate setting is based on Machine zero point .So, it is necessary to make sure
where machine zero (HOME) is. When CNC bootup, execute HOME function is very important ,otherwise SYNTEC
CNC controller would not be allowed to start AUTO NC files
Procedure:
3. Press axis direction key(X+,X-,Y+,Y-,Z+…) ,axis would start HOMING
4. Home direction is defaulted in the CNC parameter
5. Home function can run 3 axis at the same time
6. After home function, machine coordinate would be zero.

7. After home function completed, software limit protection is available .Therefore, please don't run machine
too fast, before HOME function.
2.2.3.3 New/ Import /out port Files

Procedure:
1. Press Group function key "Program"
2. Press submenu function key "File manager"

3. Screen display file system screen
4. Press F1 "New file" ,to open a new file

5. Press F2"copy file" ,to copy current highlight file to target file
6. Press F3 "delete file" ,to delete current highlight file
7. Press F4 "Import" ,to import a new file from selected place

8. Press F5 "Export " ,to export highlight file to selected place
2.2.3.4 Tool setting (G40/G41/G42, G43/G44/G49)

Procedure for setting Tool offset value:
1. Press Group function key "Run"
2. Press function key "Tool Set"
4. Type "A", "I" or "Z" key to selected input type is "Absolute", "Incremental" or "Measure Input"
2.2.3.5 Tool Length measurement (G43/G44/G49)

Procedure:
1. Use manual operation to move the reference tool until it touches the specified position on the machine.
2. Press Group function key "Position" and clear relative coordinate to zero
3. Press Group function key "Run" and press "Tool Set" to this screen
4. Use manual operation to move the tool until it touches the same specified position that have been
measured. The difference of measured that is between the length of the reference tool and the tool is
displayed in the relative coordinates on the screen.
5. Move the cursor to the compensation number for the target tool(the cursor can be moved in the same way
as for setting tool compensation values)
Example：

• Input：A10. Input pattern is changed into "absolute input", the column value will be "10.000"
• Input：A-10. Input pattern is changed into "absolute input", the column value will be "-10.000"
• Input：I10. Input pattern is changed into "incremental input", the column value will be "current value
+10.000"
• Input：I-10. Input pattern is changed into "incremental input", the column value will be "current value
-10.000"
• Input：X or Z tool compensation value is "current machinery coordinate of X or Z axis"
2.2.3.6 Setting the Work piece origin offset value (G54...G59)

Procedure:
2. Press sub selection soft key "Set Work Piece."
3. The screen for displaying the work piece origin offset values consists two pages. Display a desired page by
Press PageUp/PageDn key
4. Move the cursor to the work piece origin offset to change the values.
5. "External shift" input the value, which can shift the whole coordinate (G54..G59.8) simultaneous
6. F1"coor. Latched": user can press this function key, and CNC would latch current machine coordinate to the
screen where cursor is located.

Procedure:
2. Press group function key "Run"


5. Key in MDI data at input bar and press "F1"
7. If current block SYNTAX is correct, the data in the window would be disappear.
2.2.3.8 Assigned an executing NC file (AUTO)

Procedure:
2. Make sure CNC status is "READY"

3. Press group function key "Program", select NC file what user want to execute
4. Press group function key "Run", then executing file is assigned automatically.
5. Please make sure CNC status is "READY", that is the only available status to assigned executing NC file.


Procedure:
2. Press group function key "Program ",select NC file what user want to execute ,press sub menu "Simulation"
3. User can use "STEP" to check NC file step by step

4. Use "Continue" to simulation whole picture
6. Use "Simulation setting" set simulation parameter
7. CNC status is "READY", Press group function key "Run" that is the available status to assigned executing NC
file.
2.2.3.10 How to check NC file in SYNTEC controller


2. Press group function key "Run"
3. Press "MPG simulation "key enable this function (led on)

4. Press "Start " key ,CNC status from "READY" to "BUSY"
5. Machine table current status is static
6. Operator rotate MPGs ,then table is start moving along cutting path
7. MPG rotates more fast ,table moves more fast ,MPG stop ,table is stop from monitor screen ,operator can
see the cutting cursor move along simulation path
8. Operator also can press "Single Block" key ,enable single block function when "MPG simulation " function is
ON, then user can use two function simultaneous ,check NC file STEP by STEP ,with" MPG simulation "
function .
9. "MPG" simulation "can control table forward ,also can control backward too ,but NC file would stop at M,S,T
2.2.3.11 Auto Center

Specification:
It is usually used to look for the center of the coordinate which is the origination of the executing procedure. So it
needs to touch both sides of the tool. The center work piece can be calculated by system after getting their
coordinate, then the operator chooses a group of work piece coordinate (G54~G59.9) as the origination of the
executing procedure.
Here we supply the operation introduction of manual center and auto center as follows.
Manual Center
Operator moves tool to touch the edge of the work piece by rotating MPG, the center coordinate can be calculated
by system after pressing function key.
Operation:
1. To enter center submenu, press F1"Positon"=>F5"Set Work Piece"=>F5"Middle Func".

2. To change middle function to manual center, input 0(manual center) in center submenu, then press enter,
manual center submenu can be displayed as follows.
3. Take the tool to touch Px1 spot in the figure by handwheel, press F1"Px1",the X machine coordinate value of
Px1 can be noted in the screen and calculate X intermediate machine coordinate with Px2, the value can be
displayed in Pxm and X-axis of Aux coordinate.
4. Take the tool to touch Px2 spot in the figure by handwheel, press F2"Px2",the X machine coordinate value of
Px2 can be noted in the screen and calculate X intermediate machine coordinate with Px1, the value can be
displayed in Pxm and X-axis of Aux coordinate.
5. Take the tool to touch Py1 spot in the figure by handwheel, press F3"Py1",the Y machine coordinate value of
Py1 can be noted in the screen and calculate Y intermediate machine coordinate with Py2, the value can be
displayed in Pxm and Y-axis of Aux coordinate.
6. Take the tool to touch Py2 spot in the figure by handwheel, press F4"Py2",the Y machine coordinate value of
Py2 can be noted in the screen and calculate Y intermediate machine coordinate with Py1, the value can be
displayed in Pxm and Y-axis of Aux coordinate.
7. Press "Esc" to exit "Auto Center" and return to "Set Work Piece" submenu.
8. In "Set Work Piece" submenu move cursor to the location of the work piece coordinate which will be set,
press F3 "Latch Aux.cord". At this time the system will set the value of the AUX coordinate into the filed in
accordance with the axis where the cursor stop.
Auto center operation (require to be used in conjunction with auto sensor)

Auto center function is different to manual center function .The operator only need to input the size of the work
piece and set the border coordinates of the work piece. Move the tool to the start point and press startup, the

system will find the center coordinate automatically.
• Operation：
1. To enter center submenu, press F1"Positon"=>F5"Set Work Piece"=>F5"Middle Func".
2. To change middle function to auto center, input 1(auto center) in middle function submenu, then
press enter, auto center submenu can be displayed as follows.
3. Choose the quadrant to process and input work piece data, the description of the field to input as
follows.
• Length I: the work piece actual length in X-axis direction
• Width J: the work piece actual width in Y-axis direction
• Safe distance H: this is the length more than the distance between the start point of the tool P2 and work
piece, regardless of X-axis direction or Y-axis direction.
• Feed rate F: detection rate of auto center.
• Z-a Coordinate: this is the height that the tool will not encounter the work piece when it moves above the
workpiece, P1 in the figure as follows.
1. Move to Z-axis Safe Height Teach, the location of P1 as displayed in the figure. Press F8 "Z safe height
teach", the value of Z-axis machine coordinate will be noted simultaneously as the safe height when
tool moves above the work piece.
2. Move the tool down to P2 under the surface of work piece as the start point of auto center.
3. Press F2"Start", the tool will be moved to touch the work piece according to the data which has been
set and the value will be displayed on the screen. Finally the center coordinate of the work piece in
XY-axis direction can be calculated.
4. Press "Esc" to exit "center function" back to work piece coordinate submenu.
5. Move the cursor to the location of the work piece coordinate which will be set in work piece
coordinate submenu. Press F3"AUX Latched" and the system will set the AUX coordinate Pxm or Pym
into the work piece coordinate system according to the axis that the cursor stops.

2.2.3.12 Z-axis Auto Tool
Specification:
Z-axis auto tool function measures the location of tool point of different tool number through the tool calibrator on
the machine, then operator makes the distance that the location of the tool point to the datum plane of the work
piece is fixed to amend the processing datum plane. Operator can teach the distance into work piece coordinate
system as the gist of the tool offset when processing.
Operation:
After starting, F1"Positon"=>F5"Set Work Piece"=>F6"Tool Tip Measure"
Measurement mode
Auto tool function provides the following four modes:
1. One Tool One Work piece
After selecting work piece number and auto tool, save the tool length into work piece coordinate system.
According to delta Z setting, save delta Z into the external work piece coordinate system
The origin of program coordinate in Z direction can be obtained through union operation.
2. One Tool Many Work piece

After auto tool, save the tool length into external displacement of work piece coordinate system.

3. One Tool Many Work piece

4. Five axes (It needs to enable option12 and option13.)

Please execute gauge Z coordinate teach first, and then measure the tool length.
After selecting tool number and auto tool, save the tool length into corresponded tool compensation table.
(This value of auto tool is the real length of the setting tool. The value must be positive.)
Auto tool length measurement

It needs to measure the length of the tool again when change another tool in order to compensate the correct tool
length to the processing path.
• Coordinate work piece number P:0: auxiliary point,1: 1:G54, 2:G55, 3:G56, 4:G57, 5:G58, 6:G59, 7:G59.1 …；
• Measurement rate F: set auto tool bottom detection of the first time and rebounding speed of every time.
• Use reference point coordinate: set whether to re-move to the reference point and then auto tool or not.
"0"-> the current location, as the start point of auto tool and directly do bottom detection.
"1"->The system will first complete the following steps and then do auto tool.
1. Z-home
2. XY-axis move to the location of the second reference point
3. Z-axis down to the start point of auto tool.
• Reference point X in X-axis direction: this field can first move spindle to new auto tool position coordinate
and then through【XY machine coordinate teach】to correct the location of the auto tool reference point in X-
axis(if no correction system, the previous value will be set as the preset value);
• Reference point Y in Y-axis direction: this field can first move spindle to new auto tool position coordinate
and then through【XY machine coordinate teach】to correct the location of the auto tool reference point in Y-
axis(if no correction system, the previous value will be set as the preset value);
• Start point Z in Z-axis direction: this field can first move spindle to the new location of auto tool start point
in Z-axis and then through【Z machine coordinate teach】to set Z-axis start point of auto tool ;
• Z-axis lowest machine coordinate H: the height to down Z-axis that the spindle will not hit the tool
calibrator, press function key 【Z machine coordinate teach】to set the value;

• Operations:
• Delta z set:
Delta z set is mainly used to measure the distance between the surface of the work piece and the tool
calibrator when change another work piece and the system will note the value to external shift. The value
can automatically combine and calculate with the tool length measured to produce the correct path.
• Delta z value: display the height delta value between the surface of the work piece and the tool calibrator,
correspond to Z-axis set value in external shift.
• Operation: first do tool length measurement then set delta
Step 1: take tool tip to top of work piece

Step 2: press F3,【delta z set】
Tool calibrator action specification:

1. First move the spindle to XY-axis tool calibrator reference point
2. Z-axis moves to start point at 7000mm/min
3. Z-axis moves to【Z-axis min coordinate】that the operator input at measuring speed and stops immediately
while touching tool calibrator.(if don't touch the tool calibrator after arriving at the lowest coordinate, there
will be an alarm[Z min coordinate set error alarm] immediately)
4. Back Z-axis 5mm at the speed measured
5. Z-axis moves down 6mm at 50mm/min and will stop moving and note Z-axis machine coordinate if touch
the tool calibrator in the process.( if don't touch the tool calibrator after moving 6mm, there will be an
alarm[Auto tool length measurement error alarm] immediately)
6. Back Z-axis 3mm at the speed measured
7. Z-axis moves down 4mm at 50mm/min and will stop moving and note Z-axis machine coordinate if touch
the tool calibrator in the process.( if don't touch the tool calibrator after moving 4mm, there will be an
alarm[Auto tool length measurement error alarm] immediately)
8. Judge if the error noted in 0.01mm,input the min unit integer into Z-axis coordinate that operator chooses
after averaging; if the error exceeds 0.01mm,there will be an alarm [Auto tool length measurement error
alarm] immediately
9. G90 G53 Z0. back tool to Z-axis original point of machinery.
Operations
• One Tool One Work piece：
1. Enter auto tool set screen, select measurement mode 0 or 1
2. Input work piece coordinate number P
3. Input the operational parameters

4. F1 starts tool set

5. Move tool nose to the surface after execution
6. Press F3 to accomplish Z axis drop setting

7. The tool set result will be saved into corresponded coordinate system. The above figure sets p=1,
result will be save to G54P1.Ｚ axis drop set will be saved in external displacement coordinate.
• Single tool Many work piece：


7. The tool set result will be saved into corresponded coordinate system. The above figure sets p=1,
result will be save to G54P1.Ｚ axis drop set will be saved in external displacement coordinate.
• Many tool many work piece：



7. The result of tool set will be saved in corresponded tool compensation table.
8. Z axis drop setting will be save in corresponded work piece coordinate system.

• Five axes (It needs to enable option12 and option13.)

There are two steps. First, please gauge Z coordinate teach; second, please measure the tool length. If the
spindle-side mechanisms of the tool setter have been modified or changed, it needs to gauge Z coordinate
teach again, or users only need to execute measuring the tool length after changing the tool.
Gauge Z coordinate teach
1. Enter auto tool set screen, select measurement mode 4.
2. Input selecting tool number T.
3. Input the operational parameters.
4. F7 starts gauge Z coordinate teach without tools.
5. The result of tool set will be saved in gauge Z machine coordinate system.
Measure the tool length.

1. Please confirm that it has already been executed to gauge Z coordinate teach.
2. Enter auto tool set screen, select measurement mode 4.
3. Input selecting tool number T.
4. Input the operational parameters.

5. F1 starts tool set.
6. The result of tool set will be saved in corresponded tool compensation table.
2.2.3.13 Broken tool Return Function
Time for Usage

1. Partial program is required to perform independently.

2. Processing is interrupted due to an unexpected or uncontrollable event, ex tool break or power failure.
Operations
1. Move Z axis to a safe position to prevent collision.
2. As figure shown below, input start line number of broken tool point in the red frame. (under process screen)
• N10：represents starting to execute from program N10. System will automatically transform it into
the line number and display the value in blue frame.
• L10：represents starting to execute from line 10.
• 10：Without N/L before the number, system regards it as L10. System starts to execute from line 10
3. Start hand wheel simulation function. Start process and turn the hand wheel slowly, check if the starting
point is correct. If everything is correct, cancel hand wheel simulation and return to normal process.
Broken tool Return Function

1. Syntec provides three break point return functions. An user can set through No.3851. The descriptions of
these 3 functions are described below：
No.3851 Specify the lines in program and initiate process action decription
a. The program before the specified block will not be performed. Thus an user
0 (Default value)
should be noted that MSTG code will remain at the broken tool return restart
state. If modification is required, use MDI to re-establish initial mode.
b. After broken tool return starts, system directly execute the specified block by
G90G01F1000state. Therefore the process efficiency of this moede is the best.

a. Human- machine scans whole content of process program, thus MSTG code
888800
will be refreshed.
b. After broken tool return starts, system moves XY axis to specified coordinate by
(The auto-
G00. Then move Z axis to specified coordinate by G01.
generated broken
c. The mode simply scans the program content through human-machine. The
tool return
core is not respinsible for error explination. Therefore the efficiency is posterior
subprogram in the
to Pr3851=0 but prior to Pr3851=999900.
controller)
a. Human- machine scans whole content of process program, thus MSTG code
999900
will be refreshed.
b. After broken tool return starts, system moves XY axis to specified coordinate by
(The preset
G00. Then move Z axis to specified coordinate by G01.
broken tool return
c. The mode thoroughly scans the program content through human-machine.
subprogram in the
Also the core is respinsible for error explination. Therefore the efficiency is the
controller)
poorest
2. If tool length modification is required, please follow the function keys F4(execute process)=>F5(tool setting),
and modify “tool wear value”. Once the wear value is modified, the change is effective immediately.
2.2.3.14 Bit Function Operations in PLC Paremeters
Specification
MLC configuration parameters (Pr3401~3460) are often used as flag On/Off switch for customized function. In order
to ecnomize the use of parameter, a flag is represented by a bit. Since decimal representation is currently used,
calculation is considerably inconvenient. Therefore a parameter page is provided to support binary system and
modifications can also be made in binary system.
Usage spceifications
1. How to switch to R-bit setting page.
Eight-key Fenu is located in the path F6=>F10=>F8.

2. Introductiob of R-bit page
3. Edit comments of R-bit page
CE version

Comments can be modified in the following 3 files:

『C:\OpenCnc Shared\OCRes\Common\String\MLCRBitCmt_COM.xml』
『C:\OpenCnc Shared\OCRes\CHT \String\MLCRBitCmt_CHT.xml』
『C:\OpenCnc Shared\OCRes\CHS \String\MLCRBitCmt_CHS.xml』
Muti-country language ID is MLCRBitCmt::RX.Y

The green letter X and Y among the ID are the numbers representing the Yth bit of comment in RX.
Each string corresponding to the ID is pre set to be『bit register RX.Y』
Figure below is the file example of MLCRBitCmt_COM.xml.
DOS version

Comments can be modified in the following 2 files:

『C:\CNC\App\AppCHI.str』
『C:\CNC\App\AppENG.str』
The following is the comparison table of R-bit and ID.
ID of R81.0~R81.15 comment is 40000~40015.

…
ID of RX.Y comment is (X-81)*16+Y+40000, in which X is 81~100
…

…
ID of RX.Y comment is (X-801)*16+Y+40320, in which X is 801~840
…
Comment display string is pre set to be『bit register RX.Y』.

The following is the example of AppENG.str file.

Example of Applications
Modify R81.1 comments in document file MLCRBitCmt_CHT.xml.
The result i s shown below when focus to R81.1.

2.2.4 Dos System

This operation Manual is based on CE system. When the Operation is different from Dos system. It could be found in
this chapter.
2.2.4.1 F8：About
If users have any problem about SNC Mill controller, in addition to user manual, users can also use this function for
on-line help. Under the main menu, press "F8" for on-line help.
2.2.4.2 RS232 Import/Export
S232 Import
• Function: use RS232 communication function to import NC files

• Operation: Follow the prompts in the dialog box and type in needed data.
F7 RS232 Export
• Function: Use RS232 communication function to Export NC files

• Operation: Follow the prompts in the dialog box and type in needed data.

RS232 communication parameter setting

CNC parameter settings from: 3901 to 3949
2.2.4.3 RS232 FUNCTION
RS232 File Transfer
DNC SOFTWARE <->CONTROLLER (SYNTEC NC CONTROLLER SOFTWARE)

• DESCRIPTION：
Users can uses software of CAD/CAM transfer data to controller by RS232 cable. Let user can select be
transferred NC file to working.
• Operation：
Step I：The hardware line link to COM1
Step II：Parameter of SYNTEC software system setting (Suggest value of default)
Param. Controller Meaning of parameter
3901 0 Dc protocol role, 0：CNC, 1：Device or PC

3921 2 Com1 baud(0:24;1:48;2:96;3:192;4:384..)
Step III：Turn on the controller power. The RS232 file input is ready.
The Operations are stated as follow

1. Press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu. And then to press [=>] show up as follow:
2. press [RS232 Import].show up as follow：
3. After input the file name, Press [Ok] . Then the program will wait for receive state. The transfer state
will has shown on transfer process.
Step IV：Executing DNC software. Does the RS232 transfer setting adjust is the same controller, or controller
adjust is the same of DNC software. Executing the send function of DNC software. It can be transferred into
• Attention：
When operating. The file input should be doing firstly. Let controller stay on the receive file state. And then
to set up transfer file function of DNC software. It can be sure transfer correctly.
DNC Function
DNC SOFTWARE <->CONTROLLER (SYNTEC CNC CONTROLER SOFTWARE)

• DESCRIPTION：
When user is use the CAD/CAM software. The controller doesn't capacity in saving the too large size program
in working. Use this function to execute that aside transfer and aside working.
• Operation：
Step II：Parameter of SYNTEC software system setting (Suggest value of default)

3921 2 Com1 baud(0:24;1:48;2:96;3:192;4:384..)
Step III：Executing DNC software. Does the RS232 transfer setting adjust is the same of controller, or
controller adjust is the same of the DNC software. Executing the send function of DNC software. It can be
transferred into the file of output.
Step IV：Turn on controller power. Into system by press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu.
Select the RS232 DNC Program is a working file. It is shown as follows.

Step Ⅴ：Press "monitor". Controller will read into file to working by RS232
• Attention：
When operating. It should be doing that the working file from DNC software output wait controller to
reading firstly. And select RS232 DNC Program is working file on controller. Finish, Setup working. It can be
sure transfer correctly.
The software of SYNTEC controller replace the software of DNC to execute RS232 function
PC(SYNTEC software end of PC) <-> controller

• DESCRIPTION：
The SYNTEC controller software made user transfer into controller working by RS232 that CAD/CAM
generate or writing file. But the SYNTEC controller software can't offer the DNC software that aside transfer
and aside working function.
• Operation：
Step II： Parameter of SYNTEC software system setting (suggest setting value. Exception of 3910 other all
the same)

3921 2 Com1 baud(0:24;1:48;2:96;3:192;4:384..)
Step III：Turn on the controller power. The RS232 file input is ready. Operation has been stated as follows.
Operation has been stated as follows.
1. Press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu, And then to press [=>]show up as follow：

2. press [RS232 Import].Show up as follow：
3. After input the file name. Press [Ok].Then the program will enter into waiting for receive state. The
transfer state will be shown on transfer process.
Step IV：Upper End of PC. Executing c:\cnc\cnc into the controller simulation software. Does RS232 file
output. Operation has been stated as follows.
1. Press [program] [file manage] to file manage submenu. Than to press [=>] key to appearing. And
press up/down key select that want output of file. Such as O1000.
2. press[RS232 Import].show up as follow：
3. After press [Ok] .Start transfer program. And appearing state of transfer.

• Attention：
1. When operating. The file input should be doing firstly. Let controller stay on the receive file state, and
to setup transfer file function of DNC software. It can be sure transfer correctly.
2. Be careful. SYNTEC controller software can offer RS232 file transfer function. But can't offer DNC
software that aside transfer and aside working function.
3. The most our must be careful. When PC executing. We suggest that add up /M /P parameter behind
batch of CNC. Let controller software can execute simulation controller of function on PC. The /M is
operate plate of simulation. User can setup working from keyboard. The /P will simulate ISR and
cover off Interrupt. Convenient software can execute upper the Windows. But will be invalid of
transfer function if behind batch of CNC add up /P parameter.
2.2.4.4 Dos Ftp Server
Controller Setting
1. F6 (Param. Setting) => The right most key (Next Page) => F3(Internet Setting) => F2(Ftp Svr Setting), enter 1
into the cell of Ftp Server to turn ON Ftp Server.
2. According to the description shown below, specify the input controller, IP address, subnet mask and
gateway..etc.
• Ftp Server(0:Off, 1:On)：

When 0 is set, system Internet will use Internet disk (drive n .
When 1 is set, system will turn off the Internet disk and turn on Ftp Server.

• IP Address Setting：
When Controller Ftp Server is turned on, the input IP Address has to be in the same area network with the
PC.
• Subnet mask：
The corresponding subnet mask to controller IP address has to be the same as that of PC.
• Pr-specified gateway：
The corresponding pre-specified gateway to controller IP address has to be the same as that of PC.
PC Setting
1. Install program "Ftp Client". FileZilla3.3.5.1 is recommanded. The program can be downloded at website:
http://filezilla-project.org/
• Host：
Fill in the IP Address of controller Ftp setting menu. Only IP connection is available in DOS.
• User name and password：
Current default user name and password are both "cnc". "NcFiles" is the access folder.
The user name is case sensitive.
• By clicking "Link", system connects to the controller.
When errors occur during connection, click disconnection before connect again.
2. Multi fixed sites setting:

• Open the site manager
• Input site information: input "controller IP" in host setting, select "normal" in logon type setting and
input "cnc" in user/password setting

• The site will appear in dropdown list.
• If one PC will connect to multi-controller, repeat step 1 and step 2. The new sites will appear.
Dos Ftp Server Usage Limitation

1. Only one of Dos Ftp Server and web-folder (drive n can be turned on at the same time. Rebooting is
required whenever modifications are made.
2. Current available for Dos controller system with Fram.
3. User name and password for connection is case sensitive.
4. When system is in the processing mode (busy), Ftp Server will be turned off.
5. S99 is turned on while file transmission. S99 is turned off when file transmission finishes.

6. Average speed of file uploading (PC => CNC) in an area network is 140k bytes/sec.
7. Average speed of file downloading (CNC => PC) in an area network is 13k bytes/sec.
8. FileZilla3.4.0 has currently being verified to be unavailable for connection. Do not use FileZilla3.4.0 at the
moment.
9. In addition to FileZilla, ultrafxp107 has been tested and verified to be valid for connection.
10. The file name of file transmitted needs to be in Dos format: 8 characters for main file name without special
characters.
11. While file transmission, if user starts processing by mistake, the file will be transmitted continually until
transmission completes. Next connection is unavailable if user re-executes the file transmission.
The above is the system state when user starts processing by mistake.
Disconnection in transmission occurs when transmission is executed again after file transmission complete.
Connection will be re-established after processing complete or end of processing.
Dos Ftp Server Message Description

The controller system is without Fram, therefore Ftp Server is unavailable.
(I/O card is too old and does not support Ftp Server.)

• Ftp Server is off：

Ftp Server is not turned on or Ftp Server is processing.
• WATTCP.CFG environment variable has to be set：
The Setting of WATTCP.CFG=c:\net is not complete when controller turns on.
Check if the command exists in c:\netftp.bat.
• WATTCP.CFG Access Failure：
Ftp Server reads c:\net\wattcp.cfg unsuccessfully.
Check the existence of c:\net\wattcp.cfg.
• Packet Driver error：
When Ftp Server turns on, Packet Driver is not found.
Check the existence of c:\net\ E100BPKT.COM.
Check if c:\net\ NetFtp.bat has driver E100BPKT.COM.
• IP Address has been used：
When Ftp Server turns on, system discovers the set IP has been used in area network.
F10：Next page
• F1：Install PLC program
• F6（F2 in CE system）：Install Macro
Description：
In application aspect, usually PLC or MACRO realizes special function or specification to work in conjunction
with the machine. PLC or MACRO Editing is usually developed on PC. After development, PLC or MACRO
should be installed into system for test and verification. This function allows operator install the customized
MACRO into system MACRO catalog, without plugging the system card.

Operations：
1. In accordance with hints, press "enter" after plugging in CF card or disk as sown below.
2. According to the size and number of MACRO, a certain time is required to copy. After copy complete,
press "ESC" to close the complete window as shown below.

Notes：
a. If the remaining disk memory is inadequate, or any error occurs in the disk, a copy-failed
message will be issued.
b. Install MACRO from external box of CF card or disk into system MACRO catalog.
c. Specify source disk code by parameter 3213.
d. The files whose file name beginning with alphabet M, S, T, O.
e. The encrypted MACRO program whose filename extension is MAS or without filename
extension.
f. Exclude special MDIBLOCK file from installing.
g. System copies all the files that corresponds to the above conditions from source disk.
2.3 CAD/CAM Operating Manual

• CAD/CAM Panel Operation instructions (see page 573)
• Controller Operation Panel (CNC Monitor) (see page 573)
• CAD/CAM Function tree diagram (see page 574)
• CAD/CAM Home Screen (see page 574)
• CAD/CAM Function panel (see page 575)
• F1：File Mang (see page 575)
• F2：CAD Edit (see page 577)
• F3：CAM Parameter (see page 578)
• F4：CAM Simulation Display (see page 583)
• CAD Edit function operation description (see page 583)
• Teach Mode (see page 583)
• Teach mode frame function-Line (see page 584)

• Straight line end point XYcordinates (XY) (see page 585)

• Circular arc radius. Direction angle (RA) (see page 587)
• Line end X Coordinate、Direction angle (XA) (see page 589)
• End line Y Coordinate. Direction angle (YA) (see page 591)
• Teach mode screen function-Arc (see page 592)
• Centre vector (IJ), End point coordinate (XY) (see page 593)
• Centre vector(IJ), Arc angle(θ) (see page 595)
• Starting point coordinate(XY). Arc radius(R) (see page 597)
• Teach mode screen function-Circle (see page 599)
• Centre coordinate(XY)、Arc radius(R) (see page 599)
• Round - Square matrix arrangement (see page 600)
• Round - Circular matrix arrangement (see page 602)
• Delete graphic function (see page 604)
• Edit graphic function (see page 605)
• Processing program setup (see page 606)
• Process program storage location (see page 608)
• CAD/CAM application description (see page 608)
• CAD/CAM MACRO Post-processing description (see page 608)
• CAM Post-processing flow : (see page 608)
• CAM MACRO Storage location and file name (see page 609)
• CAD/CAM Post-processing application parameter description (see page 609)
• CAD/CAM Post processing parameter example (see page 609)
• CAM Parameter screen design description (see page 610)
• Tool in tool out mode setting (see page 611)
• CAD/CAM Post processing parameters XML setup (see page 614)
• Post processing parameter XML Funciton description (see page 614)
• XML Post processing format setup (see page 614)
• XML Post processing storage location (see page 617)
• CAD/CAM Post processing MACRO Example (see page 617)
• Feed MACRO example (see page 617)
• Retract MACRO Example (see page 619)
Set the unit Version number Publication date Author 审查核准
Taiwan technology center v1.4 2012/04/06 许晃源
Serial Version Implement Edited content Author

No. number date
1 v1.0 2012/02/24 First edition finalized 许晃源
2 v1.1 2012/03/01 1. Modify the file management system 许晃源

2. Modify Fenu bar function buttons
3. Increase the archives description

3 v1.2 2012/03/09 1. Increase CAM parameters screen 许晃源

design
2. Fixed feed some instructions
3. Fix the machining program Setting
Description
4 v1.3 2012/04/03 Increased dialogue CAD graphics 许晃源

instructions
5 v1.4 2012/04/06 1. Change retract MACRO argument 许晃源

2. Increase Dialogue : round - ring
arranged in a matrix
2.3.1 CAD/CAM Panel Operation instructions
2.3.2 Controller Operation Panel (CNC Monitor)

Operation Panel：
(F1)Custom function key CAD/CAM Operation panel

Fig Controller home screen

2.3.2.1 CAD/CAM Function tree diagram

Fig CAD/CAM Function Tree
2.3.2.2 CAD/CAM Home Screen

Fig CAD/CAM Home Screen
Screen Description：
1. CAD graphical simulation and CAM graphical simulation area

2. DXF file loading graphical information

3. CAM processing parameter display area
4. DXF filename loading information
2.3.2.3 CAD/CAM Function panel
F1：File Mang
In the CAD/CAM Home screen, after pressing F1 it will display below screen, User can select loading DXF file loading
(F1) or the existing DXF file can be converted to NC file(F2) and saved.

Related funcitons are explained below：
F1：Open File (To load a DXF file)
Operation：Pressing【F1】will display below screen, the user can use arrow keys（↑、↓）to select the file to be
loaded, press【ENTER】key or determine【F1】later, contents of the file will be loaded into the controller and displayed
on screen.


F2：DXF to NCFile (Store NC file)

Operation：After pressing F2，a dialogue type window will be displayed in the screen, type a new filename and
then press【ENTER】, it will convert the DXF file into NC file and save it directly in the deafult NC file folder of the
controller.


Fig Converting DXF into NC file and storing
F2：CAD Edit
In the CAD/CAM Home Screen, pressing 【F2】 will display below screen, user can choose the graphics contour
Edit or delete files or edit graphics and other functions using the arrow keys（↑、↓）to select the file for editing.
Insert a graphics or remove graphics.


Fig Teach screen in CAD Edit
Related functions description：
• F1：Teach Mode
Operation：Use this key to insert shapes，for straight line : Line, for circular arc : Arc , for circle : Circle，
after selecting input data corresponding graphical data will be displayed，file graphics information will load
data from DXF file.
• F2：Delete graph
Operation：By pressing（↑、↓）select a file to be deleted，selection will display a dialogue window to
confirm if the selected file should be deleted.
• F3：Edit graph
Operation：By pressing（↑、↓）select a file to be edited，selection will display a dialogue window，
window will be based on graphical data(straight、arc or circle ) graph to be modified can be edited in the
screen.
F3：CAM Parameter
In CAD/CAM under the Home screen，pressing 【F3】 will display following figure，The user can choose according
to【F1】Set or feed point【F2】CAM parameter setting.


Related functions are mentioned below：
• F1：Change start point setting
Operation：Using DXF file load the graphic information to select start point, press [ F1 ]. After entering a
new start point, the graphics will rearrange the processing sequence in accordance with the start point
position.

Fig Change start point screen setting

Note：
1. If you choose a different start point on the closed curve,it will be selected in accordance with the final
chosen segment for the feed point.
2. If not closed path , then just choose start and end point.
3. Multiple closed curve need to choose according to the different closed group of feed points.
4. After the feed point setting is done, user can load the DXF file to check the setting result within the graphic
list of graphic data, feed point will be labelled as {}{} for feed point.
F2：CAM Parameter setting

Operation：User can use the arrow keys（↑、↓、←、→）to select the input parameter to be edited, after pressing
the【F1】key, it will change the parameter of the file and will be displayed on the screen.


Fig Insert graphics screen
User can define above parameters as per his requirements. If any conflict with PLC and MACRO occurs, you need to
use EHMI modifying the variables including MACRO
F3：Process List Setting

Operation：The user can choose [F1] - [ F3 ] to insert machining program setup，insertion order will be displayed
inside the editor block, finally the order will be set in accordance with the machining program, and select insert
feed or insert retract also can further input MACRO parameters，finally when everything will be set, a NC file will be
created.
F4 Delete Process setting : Can choose to delete by processing program edit block program.


Fig Process List Setting screen

Fig Insert Feed point screen

Note：
1. Only feed and retract program have parameter input page

2. If in the parameter input page pressing Cancel will cancel the inserted program
3. Inserted contour not ok or cancel option
For detailed description please refer machining program setup.
F4：CAM Simulation Display

In the CAD/CAM home screen, Press F4 can switch load the DXF graphics display or CAM tool path，Graphical
simulation screen will be displayed in the graphics。

Fig Graphic simulation screen switches
2.3.3 CAD Edit function operation description
2.3.3.1 Teach Mode

By【F2】 CAD editor, choose to insert a new graphic pattern at the list of locations. Press【F1】Teach mode(Must load
the DXF graphics to use this feature)，if you have loaded the graphics will be displayed as below，then choose the
desired graphic pattern you wish to insert (line, circle, arc)，followed by pressing [ ENTER ] to enter the desired
pattern，or press【ESC】to return，select Teach mode, Press [ENTER] to enter the teach screen.
• In the below example, we first load a rectangle and if we choose to insert new pattern at 1st segement from
the DXF coordinate information display，the graphics will be inserted in between 1 and 2 .

Fig Teach mode setup
Teach mode frame function-Line

A rectangle pattern has been loaded in the following examples and various kinds of shapes have been added into
it.

Straight line end point XYcordinates (XY)

1. Teach mode graphics
2. The endpoint of the previous figure will be considered as the starting point of the new figure
3. Enter the endpoint coordinate for the Toolpath
4. DXF Coordinate information
Operation：Input box to enter the end point coordinate (X,Y), the modified graphics will be displayed once the
coordinates are entered.
Result :


※Note：
• Segment for closed curve：
1. For the new pattern, the starting point is the end point of the previous pattern.
2. For circular arc, if the entered radius length is too small，then it will adjust the radius length to 0.7 of
the distance between start and end point.
3. Next for circle, starting point is the end point.
• Non- closed curve is not processed.

Circular arc radius. Direction angle (RA)

2. The endpoint of the previous figure will be considered as the starting point of the new figure
3. Enter the Radius (R) and Angle (θ) for the Toolpath
Operation：Input box to enter radius and angle, radius is the distance from the end point coordinate, angle is
measured from the end direction angle.
Result :


Note：
2. For circular arc，if the entered radius length is too small，then it will adjust the radius length to 0.7 of
3. Next for circle，starting point is the end point.

Line end X Coordinate、Direction angle (XA)

1. Teach modegraphics
2. The endpoint of the previous graph will be considered as the starting point of the new graph
3. Enter the endpoint X and Angle (θ) for the Toolpath
Operation：Input box to enter the end point coordinate X coordinate, angle is measured from the end direction
angle.
Result :


※Note：
3. For circle，starting point is the end point.

End line Y Coordinate. Direction angle (YA)
3. Enter the endpoint Y and Angle (θ) for the Toolpath
Operation：Input box to enter the end point coordinate Y coordinate, angle is measured from the end direction
angle.
Result :


Note：Segment for closed curve：
Teach mode screen function-Arc


Centre vector (IJ), End point coordinate (XY)

3. Enter the input parameters of the arc
Operation：Input box to enter the centre coordinates IJ，end point coordinate (X,Y), at this point the system will
determine if the radius of the arc is less than half of the distance from the endpoint, if it is too small it will send an
alert ( below) must re- enter the parameter , if it is a closed curve system will decide the direction of the arc
direction in accordance with the process , for non- closed curve, user can set the curve in clockwise or counter
clockwise direction.


※Note：

Centre vector(IJ), Arc angle(θ)

3. Enter all the input parameters for the arc
Operation：In the input box , enter the center coordinates I , J, Arc angle θ. At this point the system will
determine if the radius of the arc is less than half of the distance from the endpoint, if it is too small it will
send an alert ( below) must re- enter the parameter , if it is a closed curve system, it will decide the direction
of the arc direction in accordance with the process , for non- closed curve, user can set the curve in
clockwise or counter clockwise direction.


Result :

※Note：


2. For circular arc, if the entered radius length is too small, then it will adjust the radius length to 0.7 of
Starting point coordinate(XY). Arc radius(R)

3. Enter the input parameters for the arc
Operation：In the input box, enter the end point coordinate (X,Y), Arc radius R. Set the direciton as 1 for
counterclockwise. At this point the system will determine if the radius of the arc is less than half of the distance
from the endpoint, if it is too small it will send an alert ( below) must re- enter the parameter , if it is a closed curve
system, it will decide the direction of the arc direction in accordance with the process , for non- closed curve, user
can set the curve in clockwise or counter clockwise direction.


Result :

※Note：


3. Next for circle，starting point is the end point.
Teach mode screen function-Circle
Centre coordinate(XY)、Arc radius(R)
2. Starting point coordinate
3. Enter the input parameters for circle
Operation：In the Input box, enter center coordinates (X,Y)，Arc radius R, after entering the CAM processing
direction, contour direction will be decided.
Result :

※Note：Circle acts as an independent closed curve so do not insert any graphics.
Round - Square matrix arrangement

1. Teach mode Graphics

3. Enter the input parameters for circles

• Operation：In the Input box, enter center coordinates (X,Y)，Arc radius R，after entering the CAM
processing direction, contour direction will be decided
• Input matrix：Enter the number of rows and columns to determine no. of circles，finally determine the row
and column spacing(X Y distance from one center to another center).
Result :

Note：Circle acts as an independent closed curve so do not insert any graphics.


Round - Circular matrix arrangement

3. Enter the input parameters for circles
5. Once the parametes are entered, diagnostic parameters such as direction angle and radius are set
• Operation：Input box to enter center coordinates (X,Y)，Arc radius R，after entering the CAM processing
direction, contour direction will be decided, this circle will be the main circle，rest of the circles will be
copied from the main circle.
• Input matrix：
1. Enter the center point of the larger circle, provide radius and angle so it can calculate no. of rings/circles
2. Enter angle between 0~360 deg.
3. The direction for creating circles in desired direction.
4. Number of circles/arrangement
Parameter input schematic diagram as shown in the figure below :


Result :
Note：Circle is an idependant closed curve so do not insert any graphics.

2.3.3.2 Delete graphic function

In the CAD Edit screen, Press [F2] to delete from the graphic information list of DXF file. The user can use the arrow
keys（↑ ↓）to delete the desired graphic pattern to be deleted, press【ENTER】key to delete it, contents of the file
will be displayed in the list.

Fig Delete graphics screen setting
Graphics will be automatically deleted after deleting the selected graphics as well as its coordinate informaiton, as
shown in the figure.


Fig Delete graphic screen results
Note：
1. If current curve is deleted and the next pattern is arc then it will determine whether the arc radius is
too small , if the radius is too small it will adjust it to 0.7 of distance from the end point.
2. A closed curve needs minimum three points , after deleting points if they are less than three points
then it becomes a non closed curve.
2.3.3.3 Edit graphic function

In the CAD Edit screen，Press [F3] to edit the displayed DXF file which will be loaded by the standard graphical
interactive screen, the user can use the arrow keys（↑、↓）to select the parameter which is to be edited.
Note：
1. Line ：Popup edit window → Line end coordinateXY coordinate (XY)
2. Arc ：Popup edit window → End coordinate(XY)、Arc radius(R)
3. Circle：Pop up Edit window → Center(XY)、Arc radius(R)


Fig Edit graphic screen
Explaination
2.3.3.4 Processing program setup

Process flow：Finally CAM will generate NC file which is basic processing for tool in→contour processing→ retract,
If need to change the order please change according to the following method.
Default：Tool in→ Contour processing →Tool out


Fig Process schematic diagram
• Operating process example：
• Example：Tool in→Contour processing →Tool out
1. 【F1】Insert Tool
2. Enter tool parameter#30 := 2; @10103 := 10; //Tool in machining parameter
3. F1】Confirm
4. 【F3】Insert contour
5. 【F2】Insert Tool out

6. 【F1】Confirm
7. Finish
Example：Tool in→ Contour processing →Tool out→ Tool in→ Contour processing→ Tool out
1. 【F1】Insert Tool in
2. Enter tool in parameter#30 := 2; @10103 := 10; //Tool in process parameter
3. 【F1】Confirm
6. 【F1】Confirm
7. 【F1】Insert Tool in
8. Enter tool in parameter #30 := 2; @10103 := 10; // Tool in process parameter
9. 【F1】Confirm
12. Enter tool out parameter #30 := 2; @10103 := 10; // Tool out process parameter
13. 【F1】Confirm
14. Finish
2.3.3.5 Process program storage location

• Process program parameter storage location：
CE System：DiskCOCResCommonCADCAM
• Tool in parameter description file storage location ：
File：FeedHelp.txt
CESystem：DiskCOCResCommonCADCAM
• Tool out parameter description file storage location：
File：RetractHelp.txt
CESystem：DiskCOCResCommonCADCAM
2.3.4 CAD/CAM application description
2.3.4.1 CAD/CAM MACRO Post-processing description
CAM Post-processing flow :

CAM Post-processing flow：

• Tool in MACRO：User can design process used to tool in within MACRO，MACRO Provides tool in standard
flow as in below image.
• Tool out MACRO：User can design process used to tool out within MACRO，MACRO Provides tool out
standard flow as in below image.


Fig Post processing flowchart
CAM MACRO Storage location and file name

• Tool in Tool out MACRO corresponding filename：
Tool in MACRO：corresponding MACRO G0201(O900201)
Tool out MACRO：corresponding MACRO G0202(O900202)
• Tool in Tool out MACRO for storage location：
CE System：DiskC:OpenCNCMACRO
2.3.4.2 CAD/CAM Post-processing application parameter description
CAD/CAM Post processing parameter example

• Tool in Tool out MACRO user parameters as follows：


※Note：

1. CAM processing parameter screen can be based on user defined R value
2. System Customization area is input box screen which does not correspond to any relevant system
variables , the system automatically grabs internal value of input box , is automatically filled in the
value to 0。
CAM Parameter screen design description

• CAM Parameter screen storage location：
CE System：DiskC: OCResCommonAppData
• CAM Parameter screen filename：
CE System：CAMParameterScr.xml
• CAM Parameter screen design description：
1. eHMI Maximum Screen size design：
1. (Width)：800
2. (Height)：470
• Cutting depth、Step cutting depth、Cutting direciton (InputBox) Property setting：

1. Cutting depth：
1. (Name)：Depth Input
2. Input format：Please don’t leave it empty
3. If no design then automatically process the depth0
• Step processing depth：
1. (Name)：Step Depth Input
3. If no design then automatically process the depth 0
• Cutting direction：
1. (Name)：Cutting Direction Input
3. If cutting direction is no defined then it should be Clockwise
• Other than the above three parameters (Cutting depth、Step processing depth、Cutting direction)
remaining parameters can have custom defined names and input format(@、R….)
Tool in tool out mode setting

• Tool in tool out operation
1. Feed point is determined by the system needs to segment or click on the graphic data feed。
2. Click starting point feed segment , tool out point group segment as the end of last segment。
When the NC file transfer , the corresponding parameters are automatically added to the MACRO for
operation.
Line：G101X0Y0U10V0S10T50 Q3;
ARC：G101X0Y0U10V10A5B6R7C250D290S10T50 Q3;
Circle：G101 X-10 Y0.0 R10 Q3;
※Customizing G Code argument：Segment information will be used to automatically function arguments
made and added back when the NC Code text files are transferred.
· Line argument

※Note：
1. Stepping cutting depth flag：When the depth setting step process (nonzero value) This flag is set to 1, The
other is 0.
2. Cutting quadrant：This is changing a system to calculate the cutting of quadrant，If the system calculates
the forward ( back) for the third quadrant quadrant, If the feed parameter setting W4，Will change into
(back) knife quadrant for the fourth quadrant。(Orientation diagram as shown in the figure below)


Fig Tool in tool out segment path

Fig Tool out quadrant schematic

2.3.4.3 CAD/CAM Post processing parameters XML setup
Post processing parameter XML Funciton description

This model provides an example for the cutting tool post processing parameter function, the template name to use for
cutting function, after shutdown, once system is restarted it will automatically read parametes from the
storage.
XML Post processing format setup

• XML file：
1. Format：Cycle Schema(necessary)
2. Cycle Name="CAMParameter"(necessary)
3. Cycle Schema
Syntax
<Schema>
<Cycle Name="CycleName">
<Field >
<Name>Field Name</Name>
<Storage>Storage Location</Storage>
<Format>Data Format</Format>
<Default>Default Value</Default>
<Length>Maximum Data Length</Length>
<Repeat>Repeat Count</Repeat>
<Step>Storage Step Interval</Step>
</Field>
</Cycle>
</Schema>
4. CAMUse the name parameter definitions and storage space： (Field Name) Please arbitrarily defined user
but not the same，Storage in accordance with the CAM Storage interface screen fill in the input box with
related parameter name, can be shut down after storage.
Ex：Screen function example table


• Example：
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<CycleSchema>
<Cycle Name="CAMParameter">
<Field>
<Name>ToolCorrection</Name>User definable
<Format>Long</Format>
<Storage>R4050</Storage>
<Default>40</Default>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>ToolCorrectionVal</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>ToolLengthCompensationVal</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>CutterFeedRate</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>FeedProcessRate</Name>

</Field>
<Field>
<Name>RetactProcessFeedrate</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>RapidTraversePosition</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>FeedMode</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>SpindleSpeed</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>SpindleMode</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>CircleProcessMode</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>ToolNumber</Name>
</Field>
<Field>
<Name>FeedRetractPathLength</Name>
</Field>
<Field>

<Name>FeedRetractangle</Name>
</Field>
</Cycle>
</CycleSchema>
XML Post processing storage location

• Processing parameters XML storage location ：
CE System：DiskCOCResCommonCADCAM
• Processing parameters Cycle Schema file name：
CE System：CAMParameter.xml
• Processing parameters Cycle Schema after storage file name：
CAMParameterSettimg.cyc

2.3.4.4 CAD/CAM Post processing MACRO Example
Feed MACRO example

%@MACRO
IF (@14050=40) THEN
G40;
ELSEIF (@14050=41) THEN
G41D@14051;
ELSEIF (@14050=42) THEN
G42D@14051;
END_IF;
IF (#20 <> #0) THEN // T Code
T#20;
ELSE
T@14063;
END_IF;
G43 H@14052;
IF (#13 <> #0) THEN // M Code
M#13;
ELSE
IF (@115211 = 3) THEN
M03;
ELSEIF (@115211 = 4) THEN
M04;
END_IF;
END_IF;
IF (#19 <> #0) THEN // S Code
S#19;
ELSE
S@14060;
END_IF;

M08;
G04X3.;
#40 := ((#21 - #24)(#4 - #22)) - ((#22 - #25)(#11 - #21)); //Determine direction of cutting
IF (#11 = #0 AND #4 = #0) THEN //Circle
#40 := -1;
END_IF;
IF (#23 <> #0) THEN // Cutting tool quadrant changes
#17:=#23;
END_IF;
IF (#17 = 1) THEN
#50 := 1; // x multiplication factor
#51 := 1; // Y multiplication factor
ELSEIF (#17 = 2) THEN
#50 := -1; // x multiplication factor
#51 := -1; // Y multiplication factor
END_IF;
#41 := PARAM(17); //Decide BLU
IF (#41 = 1) THEN//Arc in arc out
#41:=100;
ELSEIF (#41 = 2) THEN // Inclined feed
#41:=1000;
#41:=10000;
END_IF;
#60 := @14064/#41; // Feed path conversion
#61 := @14065/#41; // Feed angle conversion
IF (@14059 = 2) THEN// Arc in arc out
#53 := #60 / ((#61*3.14159265358979323846)/180);
#30:= #24 + #50*#53*COS(#61); // Calculate the X coordinate
#31:= #25 + #51*#53*SIN(#61); // Calculate the Y coordinate
ELSEIF (@14059 = 1) THEN // Inclined feed
#30:= #24 + #50*#60*COS(#61); // Calculate X coordinate
#31:= #25 + #51*#60*SIN(#61); //Calculate Y coordinate
END_IF;
F@14054; //Feed rate
#40 := ((#24 - #30)(#22 - #25)) - ((#25 - #31)(#21 - #24)); //Determine direction of cutting
#40 := 1;
END_IF;
IF (@14059 = 0) THEN// Cutting tool
G00 X#24 Y#25 Z@14058;
IF (#16 <> 0) THEN // Determine if the machining is done in stepwise order
G01 Z-(#6);
ELSE
G01 Z-(#5);
END_IF;

G00 X#30 Y#31 Z@14058; // Feed position

G01 X#24 Y#25 Z-(#6);
ELSE
G01 X#24 Y#25 Z-(#5);
END_IF;
ELSEIF (@14059 = 2) THEN // Arc in arc out
IF (#40 > 0) THEN // Anti-clockwise
G00 X#30 Y#31 Z@14058; // Feed position
G03 X#24 Y#25 Z-(#6) R#53;
ELSE
G03 X#24 Y#25 Z-(#5) R#53;
END_IF;
ELSEIF (#40 < 0) THEN // Clockwise
G00 X#30 Y#31 Z@14058; //Feed position
G02 X#24 Y#25 Z-(#6) R#53;
ELSE
G02 X#24 Y#25 Z-(#5) R#53;
END_IF;
END_IF;
END_IF;
G01
F@14053; // Cutting rate
M99;
Retract MACRO Example

%@MACRO
#40 := ((#24 - #21)(#4 - #25)) - ((#25 - #22)(#11 - #24));
IF (#11 = #0 AND #4 = #0) THEN /Circle
#40 := -1;
END_IF;
IF (#23 <> #0) THEN //Feed/retract quadrant change
#17:=#23;
END_IF;
IF (#17 = 1) THEN
END_IF;
#41 := PARAM(17); //Decide BLU
IF (#41 = 1) THEN// Arc in arc out
#41:=100;


#41:=1000;
#41:=10000;
END_IF;
#60 := @14064/#41; // Feed path conversion
#61 := @14065/#41; // Feed angle conversion
IF (@14059 = 2) THEN
#53 := #60 / ((#61*3.14159265358979323846)/180);
#30:= #24 + #50*#53*COS(#61); // Retract X coordinate point for a circle to leave segment start point
#31:= #25 + #51*#53*SIN(#61); // Retract Y coordinate point for a circle to leave segment start point
ELSE
#30:= #21 + #50*#53*COS(#61); // Calculate retract X coordinate point for leaving the segment endpoint
#31:= #22 + #51*#53*SIN(#61); //Calculate retract Y coordinate point for leaving the segment endpoint
END_IF;
#30:= #24 + #50*#60*COS(#61); // Retract X coordinate point for a circle to leave segment start point
#31:= #25 + #51*#60*SIN(#61); //Retract Y coordinate point for a circle to leave segment start point
ELSE
#30:= #21 + #50*#60*COS(#61); // Calculate retract X coordinate point for leaving the segment endpoint
#31:= #22 + #51*#60*SIN(#61); //Calculate retract Y coordinate point for leaving the segment endpoint
END_IF;
END_IF;
F@14055; // Retract rate
#40 := ((#24 - #30)(#22 - #25)) - ((#25 - #31)(#21 - #24)); // Condition for tool leaving direction
IF (#11 = #0 AND #4 = #0) THEN // Circle
#40 := 1;
END_IF;
IF (@14059 = 0) THEN// Cutting tool
G01 Z@14058;
ELSEIF (@14059 = 1) THEN //Inclined feed
G01 X#30 Y#31 Z@14058;
ELSEIF (@14059 = 2) THEN // Arc in Arc out
IF (#40 > 0) THEN // Anti-clockwise
G03 X#30 Y#31 Z@14058 R#53;
ELSEIF (#40 < 0) THEN // Clockwise
G02 X#30 Y#31 Z@14058 R#53;
END_IF;
END_IF;
M05;
M09; //Coolant off
G04X3.;
G40; // Cutter compensation
M99;

2.4 Mill Machine Program Manual
2.4.1 Cycle perform function:
G Code Cutting Bottom of the hole Escape Application
G73 Intermittent cutting ---- Speedy High speed peck drill

feed movement cycle
G74 Cutting feed After stopping, spindle Cutting feed Left hand taping cycle
rotate clockwise
G76 Cutting feed Spindle location stop and Speedy Fine boring cycle
offset a displacement movement
value
G80 ---- ---- ---- Cycle cancel
G81 Cutting feed ---- Speedy Drilling cycle

movement
G82 Cutting feed Dwell Speedy Drilling cycle of dwell

movement on the hole bottom
G83 Intermittent cutting ---- Speedy Peck drill cycle

feed movement
G84 Cutting feed Spindle reverse after dwell Cutting feed Tapping drilling cycle
G85 Cutting feed ---- Cutting feed Drilling cycle
G86 Cutting feed Spindle dwell Speedy Boring cycle

movement
*G87 Cutting feed Spindle rotate CW Speedy Fine boring cycle of

movement back side
*G88 Cutting feed Spindle stop after dwell Manual Fine boring cycle of
movement half automation

G89 Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle of dwell

on the hole bottom
2.4.1.1 Fixed cycle address and meaning:
Address Address meaning
G Selection of fixed cycle
X Selection position of drilling point(increment or absolute)
Y Selection position of drilling point(increment or absolute)
Z Selection position of hole bottom(increment or absolute)
P Dwell time when hole is in the bottom
Q Cutting value in G73、G83, or specified movement value (increment) in G76、G87
R Selection of R position(absolute or increment)
F Selection of federate
K Specify fixed cycle times 0~999
2.4.1.2 G17, G18, and G19 can set axis of drilling, list as below:
G Code Plane Axis of drilling
G17 X-Y plane Z axis
G18 Z-X plane Y axis
G19 Y-Z plane X axis
Return to R point:
When tool perform to the bottom of the hole, the tool can return to initial position or R point. And that is decided by
G98/G99, G98 is back to initial position, G99 is back to R point.


Number of repeats K:
If we want to perform many holes in the same distance, we can specify number of repeats K, range of K 0～9999,
but the first hole need to use increment mode(G91) to specify, or it will repeat drilling in the same place.
When K=0, drilling data will be set, X, Y movement command cannot be executed in block, drilling cannot be
execute too.

Cancel cycle:
G80 or G code of 01 group(G00/G01/G02/G03…etc.) can cancel cycle.

Increment (G91)/ absolute(G90) mode:
2.4.2 G00: POSITIONING

G00 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
X、Y、Z: Specific position.
2.4.2.2 Description
Each axles move to appointed point in no interpolation status, X、Y、Z is the final position, use G90/G91 to design
absolute or increment value.

2.4.2.3 Notice
the movement mode can decide by parameter #411
(0: linear, 1: each axle move in max speed independently)
2.4.2.4 Example
PIC:
Program description:
1. first way(absolute): G90 G00 X90.0 Y40.0; //use difference value between appointed point and zero point to
do straight interpolation to appointed point
2. second way(increment): G91 G00 X70.0 Y20.0; // use difference value between appointed point and initial
point to do straight interpolation to appointed point
2.4.3 G01 LINEAR INTERPOLATION

G01 X Y Z F__；
X、Y、Z: Specified point
F: Feed rate, Unit: mm/rev (inch/rev) for G95
mm/min (inch/min) for G94 < default mode

2.4.3.2 Description
G01 executes linear interpolation, it can be used G90/G91 to decide absolute or increment mode, use feed rate
provided by F to go to the specified position.
2.4.3.3 Notice
• The max. feed rate of G01 is defined by PR405-maximum cutting feed rate or (PR621~PR636)-each axis
maximum cutting feed rate
• Default value F: 1000mm/min(inch/min) for G94 mode and 1.mm/rev(inch/rev)22 for G95 mode
• Default mode G94/G95 can be changed by parameter Pr3836 (reboot controller to activate setting).
2.4.3.4 Example 1
PIC:
1. Absolute command: G90 G01 X90.0 Y40.0；
//do linear interpolation from zero point to the specified point(90,40)
2. increment command: G91 G01 X70.0 Y20.0；
// the tool does linear interpolation X + 70 and Y + 20 to specified point
22 http://1.mm/rev(inch/rev)

2.4.3.5 Example 2
PIC:
1. absolute way:
N001 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z10.0；//positioning to above of P0
N002 G90 G01 Z-10.0 F1000；//straight interpolation to bottom of workpiece, speed1000mm/min
N003 Y38.0；//P0 à P1
N004 X20.0 Y45.0；//P1à P2
N005 X55.0；//P2 à P3
N006 Y10.0；//P3 à P4
N007 X45.0 Y0.0；//P4 à P5
N008 X0.0；//P5 à P0
N009 G00 Z10.0；//positioning back to above of P0
N010 M30；//program end
2. increment way
N002 G91 G01 Z-20.0 F1000；//straight interpolation to bottom of workpiece, speed1000mm/min

N003 Y38.0；//P0 à P1
N004 X20.0 Y7.0；//P1à P2
N005 X35.0；//P2 à P3
N006 Y-35.0；//P3 à P4
N007 X-10.0 Y-10.0；//P4 à P5
N008 X-45.0；//P5 à P0
N009 G00 Z20.0；//positioning back to above of P0
N011 M30；//program endN001 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z10.0；//positioning to above of P0

2.4.4 G02/G03: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

1. X-Y plane circular interpolation:
2. Z-X plane circular interpolation:
3. Y-Z plane circular interpolation:
X, Y, Z: Specified point
I, J, K: the vector value that starting point of arc to the center of a circle(center of a circle－starting point)
R: Radius of arc
F: Feed rate
G90/G91 decide absolute or increment
Description
G02、G03 do circular interpolation according to appointed plane、coordinate system、size of arc and speed of
interpolation, and the rotate direction decide by G02(CW)、G03(CCW). Description of the command format as
below:
Setting Data Command Definition
G17 X-Y plane setting

1 Plane selection
G18 X-Z plane setting
G19 Y-Z plane setting
2 Direction G02 Clockwise direction (CW)

G03 Counterclockwise direction

(CCW)
3 End position G90 Two axes of End coordinate of arc

X, Y, Z

G91 Two axes of Vector value from start point to

X, Y, Z end point
4 Distance from start point to center of Two axes of Vector value from start of arc to
circle I, J, K center of circle
Radius of arc R Radius of arc
5 Speed of feed (feedrate) F Feedrate along the arc
2.4.4.2 Notice
1. G02, G03 direction
2. I, J, K definition:
3. how to use R:
a. When θ≦180 degree, R is positive.

b. When 180 degree＜θ＜360 degree, R is
c. When θ=360 degree, only use I、J、K.
2.4.4.3 Example
Example Program 1
G90 G00 X5500 Y4000;//positioning to start point of arc

G17 G90 G03 X1500 Y4000 I-3000 J-1000 F200;
//absolute command
(G17 G91 G03 X-4000 Y2000 I-3000 J-1000 F200;
//increment command)

Example Program 2
G90 G00 X0 Y0;

G02 I1000 F100; //interpolate a full circle
2.4.5 G02/G03: HELICAL INTERPOLATION

1.) X-Y plane
X, Y: end position of arc；

Z: end position of straight line；
R: radius of arc；
I, J: center position of arc；
F: speed of tool feed(feed rate)；
2.) Z-X plane

X, Z: end position of arc；

Y: end position of straight line；
R: radius of arc；
I, K: center position of arc；
3.) Y-Z plane
Y, Z: end position of arc；

X: end position of straight line；
R: radius of arc；
J, K: center position of arc；
2.4.5.2 Description
When the 3rd axis which is vertical to arc plane moves, G02/G03 is to be helical interpolation. The choice of helical
interpolation is the same as circular interpolation. Helical interpolation uses G code(G17/G18/G19) to decide which
plane to do circular interpolation.
G17 form: synchronously with arc of X-Y plane.
G18 form: synchronously with arc of Z-X plane.
G19 form: synchronously with arc of Y-Z plane.
2.4.5.3 Notice
N/A
2.4.5.4 Example
PIC:

G17 G03 X0.0 Y1000.0 R1000.0 Z900.0 F600；
// synchronously with arc of X-Y plane (CCW), do helical interpolation with feedrate600mm/min
2.4.6 G04: Dwell
X: specific time (decimal point permitted 0.001～9999.999s)

P: specific time (decimal point not permitted)
2.4.6.2 Description
By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified time. In addition, a dwell can be
specified to make an exact check in the cutting mode.

2.4.6.3 Notice
N/A
Example
G04 X2500;//delay 2.5 sec
G04 X2.5;//delay 2.5 sec
G04 P2500;//delay 2.5 sec
G04 P2.5;//delay 2 sec (decimal point not permitted)
2.4.7 G05: High Speed & High Precision Interpolation
G01 X Y Z F__;
G02 X Y Z R ;
G00 X Y Z ;

G05 P0; // Cancel HSHP interpolation

P: Multiple motion parameters
X, Y, Z: Specific coordinate point
F: Max feedrate (mm/min)
2.4.7.2 Description
G05 provides one default parameter, P10000, and five other parameters, P1~P5, for users. Interpolation commands
execute the mode of smoothing curve by processing program. G90/G91 decides absolute or increment mode.
Feedrate is decided by F code for high speed & high precision interpolation.
Condition:

• On high speed & high precision interpolation (G05 P ) mode, M code and MPG simulation of negative
direction are invalid.
• On high speed & high precision interpolation (G05 P ) mode, if cutter compensation(G40/G41/G42) and tool
length compensation (G43/G44/G49) are used, the program can cancel G05 mode until G40/G41/G42 or G43/
G44/G49 ending. It is not recommended to do that unless necessary.
• On high speed & high precision interpolation (G05 P ) mode, M30 or M99 is needed to be added in the end of
program.
2.4.7.3 Notice
N/A
2.4.7.4 Example
PIC:
G0 X3. Y4. Z0.
G05 P10000 //Start high speed & high precision interpolation
G01 X3.8 Y6.1 F5000.
X4.6 Y7.
X5.4 Y6.1
X6.1 Y4.
X6.9 Y1.9
X7.7 Y1.
X8.5 Y1.9
X9.3 Y4.
X10. Y6.1
G05 P0 // Cancel high speed & high precision interpolation
M30

2.4.8 G05.1 Path Smoothing

G5.1 Q1 E_ ：Start path smoothing function
：
G5.1 Q0 ：Close path smoothing function

Q：Switch to start/Close the smoothing function
E：The maximum allowable path error while smoothing. Use “mm” as the unit.
2.4.8.2 Description
1. If command is inadequate (ex: Q or E unspecified), it will be ineffective.
2. G90 and G91can both be used in conjunction with G05.1.
3. Path smoothing is only effective on command G01 between G5.1 Q1 E and G5.1 Q0.
4. Under G5.1 mode, press single block stop will not necessarily stop the process at the end of the block.
Conditions:
1. Under G61/G63 mode, Commands to start path smoothing (G5.1) are prohibited. Otherwise, system will
issue the alarm.
2. Under G5.1 mode, if G61/G63 is performed, path smoothing will stop. Until system leaves G61/G63 mode,
path smoothing function will be restart automatically.
3. Under G5.1, If command G01 is after tool length compensation command(G43) or coordinate transformation
command(G54), path smoothing will not be performed. Afterwards, G01 command returns to perform path
smoothing.
Notice

N/A
2.4.8.3 Example
PIC:

Program 1:
N001 G05.1 Q1 E0.01 //Start path smoothing function, allowable error: 10um
N002 G90 G01 F2000
N003 X-0.002 Y-0.001 //the following commands perform path smoothing function
N004 X-0.003 Y-0.003
N005 X-0.004 Y-0.005
N006 X-0.005 Y-0.007
N007 X-0.007 Y-0.008
N008 X-0.008 Y-0.009
N009 X-0.011 Y-0.010
N010 X-0.013 Y-0.012
N011 X-0.014 Y-0.013
N012 X-0.015 Y-0.015
N013 X-0.016 Y-0.018
N014 G05.1 Q0 // close path smoothing function
N015 M30 //program ends
Problem 2:

N001 G05.1 Q1 E0.01 //Start path smoothing function, allowable error: 10um
N002 G91 G01 F2000
N003 X-0.002 Y-0.001 //the following commands perform path smoothing function
N004 X-0.001 Y-0.002
N005 X-0.001 Y-0.002
N006 X-0.001 Y-0.002
N007 X-0.002 Y-0.001
N008 X-0.001 Y-0.001
N009 X-0.003 Y-0.001
N010 X-0.002 Y-0.002
N011 X-0.001 Y-0.001
N012 X-0.001 Y-0.002
N013 X-0.001 Y-0.003
N014 G05.1 Q0 // close path smoothing function
N015 M30 //program ends
Problem 3:
G5.1 Q1 E0.1 // Start path smoothing function, allowable error: 100um
G91 G01 F2000 // the following commands perform path smoothing function
X -0.005
：
G43 H3 //G43command
Y -0.005 // this command doesn’t perform path smoothing function
X -0.005 // restart path smoothing function
：
M30 //program ends

Problem 4:
G5.1 Q1 E0.05 // Start path smoothing function, allowable error: 50um
G90 G01 F2000 // the following commands perform path smoothing function
X-0.005 Y0.
：
X-0.1 Y-0.01
G61 //start G61 mode and close path smoothing function
X-0.1 Y-0.02 //the following commands do not perform path smoothing function

：
X0.005 Y0.
G64 //close G61
X0.005 Y0.01 //restart path smoothing function
：
M30 //program ends
2.4.9 G06.2 NURBS Curve Interpolation

G05 P10000;// Start high speed & high precision interpolation
：
G06.2 P K X Y Z R F__;//NURBS curve interpolation
K X Y Z R ;
K X Y Z R ;
K X Y Z R ;
K ;
K ;
K ;
K ;
：
G05 P0;// Cancel high speed & high precision interpolation

P：Order of NURBS curve （ 2 ～ 4 ）, default value is 4 if it is leaved blank.
K：NURBS node value of curve
X、Y、Z：NURBS control-point coordinates
R：NURBS curve weight （ 0.001 ～ 1000 ）, default value is 1.0 if it is leaved blank.
F：The maximum feedrate of NURBS curve (mm/min)，default value is that of previous curve if it is leaved blank.
2.4.9.2 Description
G06.2 cutting command executes NURBS curve interpolation according to the program. G90/G91 determines
whether absolute or incremental mode is used. The cutting feedrate of NURBS curve interpolation is set by “F”
function.
the movement mode can decide by parameter #411
(0: linear, 1: each axle move in max speed independently)

2.4.9.3 Condition
Single block Execution and hand-wheel simulation in negative direction are not supported.
Definition of NURBS curve：
A NURBS curve can be expressed as the formula shown below :
：Order of NURBS curve rank
：node vector of NURBS curve
：weight of NURBS curve
：coordinates of NURBS curve control point
The definition of NURBS basis function is：
2.4.9.4 Example
Program
N001G0 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0
N002G05 P10000 //Start high speed & high precision interpolation
N003G06.2 P3 K0.0 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 R1.0 F5000.
//execute NURBS curve interpolation
N004 K0.0 X0.0 Y5.0 Z0.0 R1.0
N005 K0.0 X5.0 Y5.0 Z0.0 R1.0
N006 K1.0
N007 K1.0
N008 K1.0
N009G05 P0 // high speed & high precision interpolation off

2.4.10 G09/G61: EXACT STOP

G09 X__ Y__ Z__ ;
G61 ;

X, Y, Z: position of exact stop
when cut the corner, because tool moves too fast or servo system delays, tool can not cut the exact shape of corner,
but when you need to cut high precision rectangular, you can use G09 or G61 to make it, it slow down the tool when
approach to corner, when reach to the specified position (in CNC parameter range), it will run the next block. G09
exact stop only effected in one block which has G09; G61 exact stop effected each cutting command (G01~G03) after
G61, until G62 or G63 or G64 is specified.
2.4.10.3 Notice
G01 check window: parameter 421-440
G00 check window: parameter 461-480
2.4.10.4 Example
PIC:

2.4.11 G10: PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT
L10: for tool length(H) geometric compensation value

L11: for tool length(H) wear compensation value
L12: for tool diameter(D) geometric compensation value
L13: for tool diameter(D) wear compensation value

P: tool NO.
R: compensation value(data of tool length or tool diameter)
G10 command: it can directly use program command to enter tool compensation value.

In absolute mode (G90), value of G10 is the new compensation value; in increment mode (G91), value of G10 is the
sum of the value of the moment with the new compensation value.
2.4.11.3 Example
PIC:
2.4.12 G15/G16 POLAR COORDICATES COMMAND MODE
X: polar coordinate radius

Y: polar coordinate angle( “＋” for CW, ”－” for CCW)

start polar coordinate mode in first line, G16 for polar coordinate command start, G15 for polar coordinate
command cancel, it can use polar coordinate mode to enter position(radius and angle), G90/G91 can specify in it.
First address is radius, second address is angle. Absolute or increment is decided by G90 or G91, G90 is absolute,
G91 is increment, in absolute mode, the increase of radius or angle from origin point; in increment mode, angle or
radius total from the last radius or angle.
2.4.12.3 Notice
1. when polar coordinate zero point is the same as working coordinate
2. when polar coordinate zero point is in normal position
2.4.12.4 Example
PIC:

1. Absolute command:
N001 T1 S1000 M03；
//NO.1 tool(diameter10 mmdrill), spindle 1000rpm (CW)
N002 G17 G90 G16；
//X-Y plane, absolute mode, start polar coordinate mode
N003 G99 G81 Z-12.0 R2.0 F600 K0；
//do drilling cycle, depth12mm, feedrate600mm/min, back to R point when finish
N004 X100.0 Y90.0；
//specified a distance100mm, angle 90 degree(first hole)
N005 Y210.0；
//specified a distance100mmand angle 210 degree, from the origin point(second hole)
N006 Y330.0；
//specified a distance100mmand angle 330 degree, from the origin point(third hole)
N007 G15 G80 M05；
//polar coordinate mode cancel, cycle cancel, spindle stop
2. Increment command:
N001 T1 S1000 M03；
// NO.1 tool(diameter10 mmdrill), spindle 1000rpm (CW)
N002 G17 G90 G16；
// X-Y plane, absolute mode, start polar coordinate mode
N003 G99 G81 Z-12.0 R2.0 F600 K0；
// do drilling cycle, depth12mm, feedrate600mm/min, back to R point when finish
N004 X100.0 Y90.0；
//specified a distance100mm, angle 90 degree(first hole)
N005 G91 Y120.0 K2；

//increment command, angle totals 120 degree from last point (second hole)
N006 Y120.0；
//increment command, angle totals 120 degree from last point (third hole)
N007 G15 G80 M05；
// polar coordinate mode cancel, cycle cancel, spindle stop
N008 M30；//program ends
2.4.13 G17/G18/G19: PLANE SELECTION

G17; X-Y plane selection
G18; Z-X plane selection
G19; Y-Z plane selection
when use circular interpolation, tool radius compensation or polar coordinate command, need to use G17, G18, or
G19 to set cutting plane and tell controller the working plane(default G17).
2.4.13.3 Example
Use of G17/18/19 with G02/03

2.4.14 G28: RETURN TO REFERENCE POSITION

G28 X Y Z ；
X, Y, Z: mid-point position (absolute value in G90 mode, increment value in G91 mode)
it can return to reference position or return to origin point, in order not to let the tool crush, it will use G00 mode to
move from present position, it will move to the specified safety mid-point first and then return to origin point or
reference point.
Note
this command usually use in auto tool exchange. For safety, before doing G28, must cancel tool compensation
Example
Problem 1:
G90 G28 X50.0 Y30.0; //AàBàC, mid-point(50,30)

Problem 2:
G28 X0; //only X axis return to reference point
G28 Y0; //only Y axis return to reference point
G28 Z0; //only Z axis return to reference point
2.4.15 G29: RETURN FROM REFERENCE POSITION

G29 X Y Z ;
X, Y, Z: specified coordinate；(absolute value in G90 mode, increment value in G91 mode)
G29 can let tool from reference point through mid-point to specified point after setting G28. Notice that G29 can not
use alone, because G29 does not specify mid-point, G29 use the mid-point from G28, therefore, before do G29 must
do G28 first.
Under G90, the specified point is the absolute coordinate; under G91, it is the increment distance from mid-point to
specified point.
Example
PIC:

1. Absolute command:
N001 G90 G28 X20.0 Y30.0;
//A>B>C, mid-point(20,40), in absolute command mode
N002 M06;//change the tool
N003 G29 X40.0 Y0.0;
// C>B>D, the specified point is absolute coordinate
2. Increment command:
N001 G91 G28 X20.0 Y40.0;
//A>B>C, mid-point(20,40), in increment command mode
N002 M06;//change the tool
N003 G29 X40.0 Y-40.0;
//C>B>D, the specified position is the increment value from mid-point to specified point
2.4.16 G30: 2nd, 3rd and 4th REFERENCE POSTION RETURN

G30 Pn X Y Z ;

X、Y、Z: mid-point coordinates；(absolute value under G90, increment value under G91)
Pn: Specified reference point(parameter #2801 ~ #2860)
P1: mechanical origin point；
P2: second reference point；

P_: default is P2；
for the convenience that change tool and check, we use parameter to set a reference point to suitable position, it
can let tool need not return to mechanical zero point, increase efficiency in changing the tool, the usage of this
command is the same as G28 only expect returned point. Floating reference position return command, usually use
in the position of automatically change the tool differ from the origin point. Movement mode G00.
2.4.16.3 Notice
usually this command use in automatically change the tool, for safety, before do G30, need to cancel the tool
compensation function.
2.4.16.4 Example
PIC:
Program description: presume tool is in A (60,10)

1. to second reference point
G30 P2 X75.0 Y25.0；//A>B> 2nd reference point
2. to third reference point
G30 P3 X15.0 Y10.0；//A>C> 3rd reference point

2.4.17 G31: SKIP FUNCTION

G31 X__ Y__ Z__ F__;

X, Y, Z: specified point
F: feedrate
skip command use in a unknown program point, and it specify that point, when measurement runs into impede,
when machine get skip signal, LADDER C BIT ON, G31 will record the present mechanical position and interrupt
motion of G31, run next block.
2.4.17.3 Example
Example 1: incremental command(G91)
N001 G31 G91 X100.0 F100; //original motion until run into impede
N002 Y100.0;//use contact point to be opposite coordinate, change path to specified position, it does not wait to
the finished of front block

Example 2: absolute command for 1 axes(G90)

N001 G31 G90 X200.0 F100; //original path until running into impede
N002 X200.0 Y100.0; //use zero point to be the relative coordinate to change the path to the specified position, and
it does not wait to the finished of front block.

Example 3: absolute command for 2 axes(G90)

N001 G31 G90 X100.0 F1000; // original path until running into impede
N002 X130.0 Y70.0; // use zero point to be opposite coordinate to change the path to specify position, it does not
wait to the finished of front block
2.4.18 G33: THREAD INTERPOLATION

G33 Z F ;

Z: Absolute command (G90), coordinates of Z axis for end point;
Incremental command (G91), for length of thread in axis direction;
F: the thread of a screw (0.01mm);
When spindle turned, tool feeds in Z axis direction at the same time. After repeating many times, there is inertia lag
of the spindle rotation at thread interpolation finishing. They will produce somewhat incorrect leads at start and
end points of a thread cut. In order to compensate this, thread cutting length should be specified longer than
required, in thread interpolation, limit of spindle speed(R) is:

R: spindle speed(rpm)
Thread lead(F): mm or inch

Feedrate: mm/min or inch/min
2.4.18.3 Note
Max feedrate can be setting by parameter #405.
Acceleration and deceleration time of thread interpolation can be setting by parameter #409.
2.4.18.4 Example
PIC:
Program form:
G33 Z10.0 F1.5 ;
//thread cutting at a pitch of1.5mm, the end is at Z axis10mm
2.4.19 G37: AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT - I

G37 Z_ [R_] [D_] [F_] [P_] ;


Z: Absolute command for end point of Z in program coordinates.

R: Measuring distance, incremental value from Z position. Value of Pr4055 will be used if R is not defined.
D：Probe overtravel distance. Value of Pr4056 will be used if D is not defined.
F: Measuring federate. Value of Pr4057 will be used if F is not defined.
P: Reference point P. Value of Pr4058 will be used if P is not defined. This action of reference point return will not be
executed if Pr4058 is used and is not set 1~4.
1. Return to P reference point with G30. G30 will not be executed if P is not defiend.
2. Rapid move Z to starting point.
3. Move Z to probe starting point with G31
4. Move Z to probe ending point with G31, and proceed with tool length measurement.
5. Automatic tool length measurement complete, the tool length shall be defined to corresponding tool
automatically.
2.4.19.3 Note
1. Start from:
-SUPER/10s/20s：10.116.10C
-11s/21s：2.2.3
2. Please install the probe before the automatic tool measurement. It is recommended to insert the probe
location to reference point P via Pr2801~2860.
3. The override is defined a 100% during automatic tool measurement.
4. The MPG offset of Z will be reset once complete the tool length measurement.
Alarms
5. [MAR-330 Z min. coordinate set error alarm!] shall occur if Z is not defined.
6. [MAR-333 Z start point error alram!] shall occur if Z initial point is lower than Z starting point.
7. [MAR-334 Without issue H code before G code tool length measurement] shall occur if H word is not defined
before automatic tool measurement.
8. [MAR-335 measure position setting error, measure signal has being triggered] shall occur if probe signal
activated during Z axis move from starting point to probe starting point.

9. [MAR-336 measure position setting error, measure signal hasn't being triggered] shall occur if probe signal is
not activated once Z axis reach probe ending point.
Program form:
G30 P2 X75.0 Y25.0; // return to reference point 2
M06 T1; // change to T1
H1; // define the tool length compensation H1
G37 Z-150; // move Z axis to -150.

G37 Z-150; // move Z axis to -150.

G37 P2 Z-200.; // return to reference point 2, move Z to -200.
Program form:
G37 Z-150; // move Z axis to -150.

G37 Z-150; // move Z axis to -150.

G37 P2 Z-200.; // return to reference point 2, move Z to -200.
2.4.20 G37.1: AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT - II

G37 [Z_] [R_] [F_] [P_] [Q_];


Z: Absolute command for end point of Z in mechanical coordinates. Value of Pr4057 will be used if Z is not defined.
R: Measuring distance, incremental value from Z position. Value of Pr4055 will be used if R is not defined.
F: Measuring federate. Value of Pr4057 will be used if F is not defined.
P: Reference point P. Value of Pr4058 will be used if P is not defined. This action of reference point return will not be
executed if Pr4058 is used and set to 0.
Q: Safety point. The control shall retract Z to machine zero if Q is not defined.
1. M90 enable the mist function

2. Return to P reference point with G30. G30 will not be executed if P is not defined.
3. Rapid move Z to starting point.
4. M91 disable the mist function
5. Move Z to defined Z position with G31
6. Retract Z axis for 1mm with G00 once probe signal activated
7. Move Z to defined Z position with G31 F50, and proceed with tool length measurement.
8. Automatic tool length measurement complete, the tool length shall be defined to corresponding tool
automatically.
9. Return Z axis to safety point or machine zero.
2.4.20.3 Note
1. Start from:
-SUPER/10s/20s：10.116.10C
-11s/21s：2.2.3
2. Please install the probe before the automatic tool measurement. It is recommended to insert the probe
location to reference point P via Pr2801~2860.
3. The override is defined a 100% during automatic tool measurement.
4. The MPG offset of Z will be reset once complete the tool length measurement.

Alarms
1. [MAR-330 Z min. coordinate set error alarm!] shall occur if Z is not defined.

2. [MAR-333 Z start point error alram!] shall occur if Z initial point is lower than Z starting point.
3. [MAR-334 Without issue H code before G code tool length measurement] shall occur if H word is not defined
before automatic tool measurement.
4. [MAR-336 measure position setting error, measure signal hasn't being triggered] shall occur if probe signal is
not activated once Z axis reach probe ending point.
Program form:
G37.1 Z-150; // move Z axis to -150.

G37.1 Z-150; // move Z axis to -150.

G37.1 P2 Z-200.; // return to reference point 2, move Z to -200.
2.4.21 G40/G41/G42: CUTTER COMPENSTAION
G40；
G41: cutter compensation left.

G42: cutter compensation right.
G40: cutter compensation cancel.
X, Y: the end coordinate of each axis.
D: code for specifying as the cutter compensation value.
In general, when the tool is moved, if tool center is cutting along the workpiece, and the tool radius is overcut. In
cutter compensation, the tool moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of tool. It can let the shape which is

after process is equal with layout. Therefore we can enter the size of layout, and match this function, to get the right
size of workpiece, we can ignore tool radius in the program.
2.4.21.3 Example
1. Cutter compensation:
2. Direction decision of cutter compensation:
Compensation value Positive Negative
G41 Compensation Compensation
left right

G42 Compensation Compensation
right left
3. cutter compensation of corner interpolartion:

a. n When the corner: 90∘≦α＜180∘
i. straight line > straight line

ii. straight line > arc
iii. arc >straight line
iv. arc > arc
b. When corner α＜90∘

i. straight line > strainght line

ii. straight line > arc
iii. arc > straight line
iv. arc > arc
2.4.21.4 Note
when process a fillister, if the width less than twice of tool, than system will send the alarm because of over cutting.

if under MDI mode, can not use cutter compensation.

G41/G42 and G40 can not be used with G02 and G03 in the same block, only can use with G00 and G01 in the same
block.
when processing the step shape workpiece, if the step higher than workpiece radius ,then system will send alarm
because of over cutting.
Program example

N001 T1 S1000 M03；//tool NO.1(diameter10mm), spindle 1000rpm (CW)
N002 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z10.0；//positioning above programmed zero point
N003 M08；//open cutting liquid
N004 G90 G01 Z-10.0 F600；//linear interpolation to bottom of workpiece, feedrate600mm/min
N005 G42 Y24.0 D01；//cutter compensation left, program zero point>A
N006 G03 X9.0 Y30.0 R10.0；//A>B circular interpolation (CCW)
N007 G02 X30.0 Y9.0 R15.0；//B>C circular interpolation (CW)
N008 G03 X30.0 Y-9.0 R10.0；//C>D circular interpolation (CCW)
N009 G02 X9.0 Y-30.0 R15.0；//D>E circular interpolation (CW)
N010 G03 X-9.0 Y-30.0 R10.0；//E>F circular interpolation (CCW)
N011 G02 X-30.0 Y-9.0 R15.0；//F>G circular interpolation (CW)
N012 G03 X-30.0 Y9.0 R10.0；//G>H circular interpolation (CCW)
N013 G02 X-9.0 Y30.0 R15.0；//H>M circular interpolation (CW)
N014 G03 X0.0 Y24.0 R10.0；//M>A circular interpolation (CCW)
N015 G00 Z10.0；//Z axis rise, return to start point
N016 G40 X0.0 Y0.0；//cutter interpolation cancel, return to start point
N017 M09；//cutting liquid OFF

N018 M05；//spindle stop

2.4.22 G43/G44/G49: TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION
G49；

G43: compensation along positive direction；
G44: compensation along negative direction；
G49: compensation cancel；
Z: Z axis end coordinates；
H: tool number；
when use machine to process each workpieces, there are many tools that we use, and the length of each tool is
different, during programming, after change the tool the difference between tool length will make Z axis direction
have errors, tool length compensation(G43/G44) is used to Z axis position compensation and to correct the
difference between tool length.
2.4.22.3 Compensation Value Setting

(consult “milling machine controller manual”)
First way:
use manual that let the tool go down from machine zero point of Z axis until it touch the surface of workpiece, enter
the distance to tool setup in operation interface and do this for each tools. Set the number of tool in H value of
program command form.
Second way:

choose a tool to be basis, in system operation interface do tool length adjust in work coordinates setting to G54
system, after that we can use it to be the difference between tools of basis tool, we can convert length of
compensation.
2.4.22.4 Notice
Compensation value Positive Negative
G43 Positive direction Negative direction
G44 Negative direction Positive direction
Example

T1 S1000 M03；//use tool NO.1(diameter20mm), spindle 1000rpm(CW)

G42 D01；//tool radius compensation right(D01=10)

G00 X10.0 Y5.0 Z15.0；//positioning above A point
G43 H01；//tool length compensation positive(H01=-10)
G01 Z-10.0；//linear interpolation to bottom of A point
X110.0；//A>B
Y85.0；//B>C
X90.0 Y105.0；//C>D
X50.0；//D>E
G02 X10.0 Y65.0 R40.0；//E>F
G01 Y5.0；//F>A
G00 Z15.0；//positioning return above A point
G40 G49；//compensation cancel
M05；//spindle stop
M30；//program end
2.4.23 G51/G50: SCALING
X, Y, Z: center coordinate value of scaling；

I, J, K: scaling magnification for X axis Y axis and Z axis respectively；
P: scaling magnification for X axis Y axis and Z axis are the same magnification；
G51 let the tool path magnify and reduce at our own choose.
G50: scaling cancel.
2.4.23.3 Example
PIC:

N001 G00 X50.0 Y50.0；//positioning
N002 G51 X125.0 Y90.0 P0.5；//decide center of scaling X125,Y90 scaling magnification value 0.5, do scaling to steps
N003~N009
N003 G01 Y70.0 F1000；//linear interpolation, feedrate1000mm/min
N004 X100.0 Y150.0；
N005 G03 X150.0 I25.0；//circular interpolation, radius25mm；
N006 G01 X200.0 Y70.0；// linear interpolation
N007 Y50.0；
N008 X50.0；
N009 G00 X0.0 Y0.0；//return
N010 G50；//scaling cancel
2.4.24 G51.1/G50.1: PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE

G51.1 X___Y___Z___;
G50.1;//programmable mirror image cancel

X, Y, Z: mirror point (axis) coordinate value.

when cut symmetry shape, we only need one program between left side or right side, and use this function we can
process another side. G51.1 specify point(position) and axis of symmetry for producing a mirror image
if there is only one axis specify mirror image on specified plane, circular、tool length compensation or the direction
of coordinate rotation or direction of compensation, all of those execute reverse.
because of this function use in part coordinates, when counter reset or work coordinates change, center of mirror
image is changed.
G28, G30 inprogrammable mirror image, before the mid-point , programmable mirror image is effective, after the
mid-point, programmable mirror image is not execute.
execute G29 inprogrammable mirror image, that is effective to mirror image of mid-point.
2.4.24.3 Note
Execute mirror image cancel out of the center point, absolute value can not match with mechanical position, as the
below PIC (this status continues until executing G90、G28 or G30). If you specify the center of mirror image again in
the absolute static status, it will be specified to a unable expect position. Please use absolute positioning after
mirror image cancel.
2.4.24.4 Example
Problem 1:

N001 T1 S1000 M03；//use tool NO. 1, 1000rpm(CW)
N002 M98 H100；//execute sub-program
N003 G51.1 X60.0；//execute programmable mirror image that symmery axis X=60
N004 M98 H100；// execute sub-program
N005 G50.1；//programmable mirror image cancel
N006 G51.1 Y55.0；//execute programmable mirror image that symmery axis Y=55
N008 G50.1；// programmable mirror image cancel
N009 M05；//spindle stops

N100；//sub-program list
G00 X60.0 Y55.0；//positioning to specified point
G01 Y75.0；//linear interpolation to O point
X80.0；//O>A
X120.0；//A>B
Y105.0；//B>C
X80.0 Y95.0；//C>D
Y75.0；//D>A
M99；//sub-program ends

Problem 2:
Program description: process a trough that flower shaped

N001 T1 S1000 M03；//tool No.1(diameter10mm), 1000rpm(CW)
N002 G41 D01；//set cutter compensation left of tool No.1(D01 = 5)
N004 G51.1 X0.0；//execute programmable mirror image at symmery axis X=0
N006 G50.1；//programmable mirror image cancel
N007 G51.1 X0.0 Y0.0；// execute programmable mirror image at symmery point X=0, Y=0
N010 G51.1 Y0.0；// execute programmable mirror image at symmery axis Y=0
N013 G40；//cutter compensation cancel

Sub-program
N100；sub-program list
G00 X58.0 Y0.0 Z10.0；//positioning to the above of starting position
G01 Z-10.0；//linear interpolation to bottom of workpiece

G03 X49.36 Y7.9744 R8.0；//circular interpolation(CCW), radius8mm

G03 X40.5415 Y29.2641 R50.0；// circular interpolation(CCW), radius50mm
G00 Z10.0；//positioning to above of end point
M99 ；//sub-program end, continue to execute main program
2.4.25 G52: LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM

G52 X__ Y__ Z__ ；

X、Y、Z: coordinate values
specify a work coordinate system(G54~G59), when workpiece need to set another coordinate system, that
coordinate system is local coordinate system.
G52 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0: cancel the coordinate system
2.4.25.3 Coordinate System :
2.4.25.4 Example
PIC:

N001 T1 S1000 M03；//tool No.1(diameter10mm), spindle 1000rpm (CW)
N002 G54 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0；//specify work coordinate (G54)
N003 G00 X90.0 Y15.0 Z10.0；//positioning to above of specified position
N004 G43 H01；//tool length compensation (tool No.1)
N005 G99 G81 Z-15.0 R2.0 F1000；//execute drilling cycle, stop at R point when return, feedrate 1000mm/min, drill
1st hole
N006 X110.0；//drill 2nd hole
N007 X100.0 Y65.0；//drill 3rd hole

N008 G80；//cancel cycle
N010 G28 X0.0 Y0.0 Z10.0；//reference point return, X0.0,Y0.0,Z10.0 to be center point
N011 T2 M06 S1000 M03；//execute tool exchange(tool No.2 diameter10mm), after finishing, spindle start to turn,
1000rpm(CW)
N012 G52 X30.0 Y30.0 Z0.0；//specify local coordinate zero point to the work coordinate (G54) of
X40.0,Y40.0,Z0.0(geometry center of workpiece)
N013 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z10.0；//positioning to local coordinate X0.0,Y0.0,Z10.0(above the hole)
N014 G01 Z-12.0；//linear interpolation to bottom of the hole
N015 G17 G41 D02；//cutter compensation left (tool No.2)
N016 G91 X20.0；//specify to use increment to interpolation
N017 Y10.0；
N018 X-10.0；
N019 Y10.0；
N020 X-20.0；

N021 Y-10.0；
N022 X-10.0；
N023 Y-20.0；
N024 X10.0；
N025 Y-10.0；
N026 X20.0；
N027 Y10.0；
N028 X10.0；
N029 Y10.0；
N030 G90 G00 Z10.0；//specify to use absolute positioning
N031 G52 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0；//cancel local coordinate
N032 G40 M05；//cancel compensation, spindle stops
2.4.26 G53: MACHINE COORDICATE SYSTEM SELECTION

G53 X___ Y___ Z___；

X: move to specify machine coordinate of X position.
Y: move to specify machine coordinate of Y position.
Z: move to specify machine coordinate of Z position.
Machine origin point is the fixed origin point when factory build the CNC machine, this coordinate system is fixed；
when G53 is specified tool will move to the specified position on machine coordinate, when tool returns to machine
zero point(0,0,0), this point is the origin point of machine coordinate system.
2.4.26.3 Note
1. G53 only effective in specified block；
2. G53 only effective absolute mode(G90), not effective in increment mode(G91)；
3. before specify G53, must cancel related cutter compensation ,tool length compensation or position
compensation；
4. before use G53 to set coordinate system, must set coordinate system on the basement of reference return
position by manual.

2.4.26.4 Example
PIC:
N001 G92 X-200.0 Y-100.0；//specify to basic coordinate system
N002 G54 G90 X100.0 Y200.0；//to specified postion on workpiece coordinate system
N003 G53 X300.0 Y100.0；//to specified position on machine coordinate system
N004 X300.0 Y0；
//because of G53 only effective in one block, this block continue G54 to the specified position on workpiece
coordinate system
N005G52 X300.0 Y200.0；//set local coordinate to specified position on workpiece coordinate system
N006 X0.0 Y0.0；
2.4.27 G54...G59.9: WORKPIECE COORDICATE SELECTION

G54: 1st workpiece coordinate system

:
:
G59: 6th workpiece coordinate system

:
:

X, Y, Z: move to specified position on setting workpiece system；
2.4.27.2 Description:
In general when we operate numerical machine, if there are many workpieces on the machine, we can use
workpiece coordinate system G54 to G59 six G codes G59.1~G59.9 to present 15 different coordinate systems, it is
convenient to specify each workpiece position on machine coordinate, and it is more convenient to our processed.
Use parameter #3229 to「disable workpiece coordinate system」(0: enable; 1: disable).

※G54……G59.9 settings:
“setting workpiece coordinate system” in operation interface, setup G54 …G59.9 by each other. (consult ”milling
machine controller operation manual”)
2.4.27.3 Example

2.4.28 G64: CUTTING MODE

G61 ; // exact-stop examination mode
G62 ; // curved surface cutting mode
G63 ; // tapping mode
G64 ; // curved surface cutting mode
G64;
G64 is similar to G09, G61 inusage, NC use smooth cutting face mode to cut. This mode does not decelerate and
stop between G61 and reverse cutting feed block, the mode will continue to execute next block. G64 can be
canceled by G61, G62, G63.
Command G code range description

name
Exact stop G09 Only effective in block When tool decelerates at the end of path, The
with G09. precision error occurs at the corner when the tool
direction turns. G09 is used to control the
precision error.
Exact stop G61 G61 is effective until we G61 is similar to G09. The difference is G61
set G62, G63, G64. effective until we set G62, G63, or G64. Tool
decelerates at the end of corner. When tool
arrived at the terminal, a feedback signal is sent
to ensure the position is in the setting range. The
next path is executed after the feedback control.
G62 G62 is effective until we Applicable to curved surface cutting. Tool does
set G61, G63, or G64. not decelerate at the end of path (refer to the
speed command curve shown below) and
continue execute next path.
G63 G63 is effective until we Applicable to tapping. To synchronize spindle and

set G61, G62, or G64. feed axis. The relation between spindle and feed
axis is determined by the ratio of spindle rotate
speed and feedrate. During tapping, feed
overrode and feed hold cannot be adjusted.

Cutting mode G64 G64 is effective until we Tool does not decelerate on the end of path, and
set G61、G62、G63. continue to execute next path after to specified
point.
2.4.29 G65: SIMPLE CALL

G65 P L ;

P: number of the program to call；
L: repetition count；
After calling macro, P is called to execute and L__ indicates repeating times. But it is enable only in the block with
G65.
Example
G65 P10 L20 X10.0 Y10.0
//Call sub-program O0010 continuously 20 times, and set X=10.0 and Y=10.0 into sub-program.
2.4.30 G66/G67: MACRO CALL

G66 P L ；macro call
G67 ；macro call cancel

P: number of the program to call；
L: repetition count；
After G66 is called, P is called to execute and L__ indicates repeating times. If there is a moving block, G66 block
will be executed again after moving block ends until using G67 to cancel it.
Example
G91

G66 P10 L2 X10.0 Y10.0 //repeat twice calling sub-program O0010 and set X=10.0 and Y=10.0 into sub-program.
X20.0 //Move to position X=20.0. After moving, call G66 P10 L2 X10.0 Y10.0.
Y20.0 //Move to position Y=20.0. After moving, call G66 P10 L2 X10.0 Y10.0.
G67 //Cancel macro call mode.
2.4.31 G68/G69: COORDINATE ROTATION

(G17) G68 X_ Y_ R_; // start coordinate rotation
(G18) G68 Z_ X_ R_;
(G19) G68 Y_ Z_ R_;
G69; // Disable coordinate rotation

X_, Y_, Z_: absolute coordinate of center of rotation
R_: angle of rotation
After coordinate rotation start, all movement command will rotate with rotation center, so the geometric figure
rotate a angle. Rotation center only effective in absolute command, if all command is increment, the actual
rotation center is the starting point of path.
2.4.31.3 Example
Problem 1:

G54 X0 Y0 F3000.;
G16; // start polar coordinates
G90 G00 X50. Y9.207 R8.; // positioning to starting point
M98 H100; // first process
G68 X0 Y0 R90.; // coordinate rotates 90∘
M98 H100; // second process
M98 H100; // third process
M98 H100; // fourth process
G69; // coordinate rotation cancel
G15; // polar coordinate cancel
M02; // main program end
N100 // orbit sub-program start
G90 G01 X50. Y9.207 R8.;
G03 X50. Y80.793. R50.;
G03 X50. Y99.207 R8.;
M99; // orbit sub-program return

Problem 2:
G54 X0 Y0 F3000.;
G16; // start polar coordinate
G90 G00 X50. Y9.207 R8.; // positioning to starting point
M98 H100; // first process
M98 H100; // second process
M98 H100; // thied process
M98 H100; // fourth process
M98 H100; // fifth process
M98 H100; // sixth process
M98 H100; // seventh process
M98 H100; // eighth process

G69; // coordinate rotates cancel

G15; // polar coordinate cancel
G00 X-80. Y0.
M98 H200; // process first “flower”
G51.1 Y-40.; // symmetry axis Y-40.
M98 H200; // process second “flower”
G50; // mirror image cancel
G90 G81 Z-20. R2. F1000. K0; // start G81 drilling cycle
G134 X0 Y0 I75. J30. K6; // circumference hole cycle
G137.1 X60. Y-60. I20. J-20. P3 K3; // chess type hole cycle
G80; // drilling cycle cancel
M02; // main program end
N100 // orbit sub-program
G90 G01 X50. Y9.207;
G03 X50. Y35.793 R50.;
G03 X50. Y54.207 R8.;
M99; // sub-program return
N200 // sub-program start (flower)
G90 G00 X-70. Y10.;
G91 G03 X-20. R10.;
G03 Y-20. R10.;
G03 X20. R10.;
G03 Y20. R10.;
M99; // sub-program return(flower)
2.4.32 G70/G71: UNIT SETTING OF INCH/METRIC SYSTEM

G70;

G71;
.
G70: inch system

G71: metric system

After change inch/metric system, origin offset value of workpiece coordinate, tool data, system parameter, and
reference point, all of that is still correct. System will deal the change of unit automatically. After change inch/
metric system, item below will change as follow:
• Coordinate, unit of speed
• Increment JOG unit
• MPG JOG unit
Decimal Point Input
When parameter is inputted by decimal point input, will to be the common measurement unit, mm, inch, sec…etc.,
if input by whole number, it will to be the Min unit that system default, mm, ms…etc.
example:
• decimal point: 00.00
• whole number: 0000
2.4.33 G73: HIGH SPEED PECK DRILL CYCLE

G73 X Y Z R Q F K ；

X or Y : hole position data (absolute/increment)
Z:
G91: the distance from the bottom of the hole to point Z (directional)
G90: program position of point Z
R:
G91: the distance from initial level to R point level (directional)
G90: program position of point R
Q : depth of cut for each cutting feed (increment and positive, minus will be ignore)
F : feedrate
K : number of repeats (movement of repeats and action of drilling, G91 increment effective)
X, Y, Z, R can use G90/G91 to decide absolute or increment

1. use G00 to move to specified (X,Y) when performance start
2. use G00 to reach specified R point.
3. use G01 to interpolate a distance Q at the present depth
4. use G00 to return a distance d (CNC parameter 4002)
5. repeat drilling hole until reach the Z point
6. use G00 to return initial point(G98) or programmable R point(G99)
Notes:
1. d distance is defined in CNC parameter No.4002.
2. before using G73, please use M Code let the drill start to turn.
3. if M Code and G73 are specified in the same block ,this M Code only executes in the first time of positioning
in that block, when K is used to specify numbers of times, this M Code is executed for the first only, for the
second hole and subsequent holes, the M Code is not executed.
4. G73 is module G Code , when use G73 once ,it is effectively always ,we only give the (X,Y) in the next line of
program ,then controller will start to drill of (X,Y).
5. this module G code ,use G80 to cancel ,or G00 ,G01,G02,G03 or other cycle this G code will be canceled
automatically.
Condition:
1. Before drilling axis be changed, Canned Cycle must be canceled first.
2. If a Block is not included movement command of any axes (X, Y, Z), then drilling can not be executed.
3. The data that Q and R specified, only be set in the block we execute drilling, it can not be set in the block we
do not execute drilling.
4. G Code group 01 and G73 can not be specified in the same block, or G73 Canned Cycle will be cancel.
5. In Canned Cycle, tool length compensation (G41/G42/G40)will be ignored.

2.4.33.3 Example
F1000. S500;
M03; // start the drill to turn CW
G90;
G00 X0. Y0. Z10.; // positioning to initial point
G17;
G90 G99;
//set the R point, Z point and hole 1, cutting rate 2.0
G73 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. Q2.;
X15.; // hole 2
Y15.; // hole 3
G98 X5.; // hole 4, and return to initial point
X10. Y10. Z-20.; // hole 5, and set new Z point be -20
G80;
M05; // stop drill
M02;
2.4.34 G74: LEFT HAND TAPPING CYCLE

G74 X Y Z R P F K ；

X_ or Y_: coordinates of holes (absolute/increment)
Z_:
R_:
P_: dwell time (s)
F_: feedrate
K_: number of repeats (repeat movement and drilling, G91 is effective)
X, Y, Z, R: use G90/91 to decide absolute or increment

1. use G00 to move to specified(X,Y) when start to perform
2. use G00 to specified point R.
3. use G01 to reach the bottom of the hole ,point Z
4. dwell P(s) then reverse the drill
5. use G01 raise to point R
6. dwell P(s) then reverse the drill
7. use G00 to raise to initial point (G98) or programmable point R(G99)
tapping pitch / feed rate reduce:

• G94: F (mm/min) =S (RPM) * P (mm/rev)
• G95: F (mm/rev) = P (mm/rev)
• G74: when performing, feedrate(F), spindle RPM(S), they are not controlled by turning switch(fixed at 100%)
Notes:
1. before G74, use M Code let drill start to rotate CCW
in that block
3. when K is used to specify numbers of times, this M Code is executed for the first only, for the second hole and
subsequent holes, the M Code is not executed. G74 is module G Code ,it is always effective when we use
once ,we only specify (X,Y) in next line of program ,controller will execute drilling at (X,Y)
4. this module G code ,use G80 to cancel ,when program run into G00 , G01, G02 , G03 or other cycle ,this
module G code will be canceled automatically,
5. because there is a little time when spindle CW to CCW in tapping ,please use P add dwell in G code



Condition:
1. before drilling axis be changed, Canned Cycle must be canceled first.
2. if the Block does not include movement command of any axes (X, Y, Z), then drilling will not be executed.
3. data that R specified only be set in blocks of executing drilling, it can not be set in blocks of no executing
drilling.
4. G code 01 group and G74 can be specified in the same block, or G74 Canned Cycle will be canceled.
5. in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation(G41/G42/G40) will be ignored.
2.4.34.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
M04; // start drill to rotate CCW
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole 1 coordinate values, dwell 2 s
G74 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. P2.;
X15.; // hole 2
Y15.; // hole 3
G98 X5.; // hole 4, and set to return to initial point
X10. Y10. Z-20.; // hole 5, and set new point Z to be -20.
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.35 G76: FINE BORING CYCLE

G76 X Y Z R Q P F K ；

X_ or Y_: hole position data (absolute/increment position)
Z_:
R_:


Q_: shift amount at the bottom of the hole (positive, negative will be ignored)
P_: dwell time at the bottom of the hole (s)
F_: feedrate
K_: number of repeats (repeat moving and drilling ,G91 is effective)
X, Y, Z, R is absolute or increment mode, decided by G90/G91
Oriented Spindle Stop(OSS)
1. use G00 to move tool to specified (X, Y) point, when performance start
2. use G00 reach the specified R point(not include spindle positioning)
3. use G01 reach point Z at the bottom of the hole, dwell P(s) and spindle positioning and stop the drill
4. shift Q distance
5. use G00 raise to initial point (G98) or programmable point R (G99)
6. shift Q distance in reverse direction
7. drill start
Alarm:
• Q is a Modal Value that requests in G76 cycle, we must specify this Q value carefully, because it also use in
G73/G83.

• OSS(Oriented Spindle Stop) direction is decided by parameter No. 4020:
Parameter 4020 OSSdirection
0 +X
1 -X
2 +Y
3 -Y
Note:
1. before G76, use M Code let drill start to rotate CW.
in that block
subsequent holes, the M Code is not executed.
4. G76 is module G Code ,it is always effective when we use once ,we only specify (X,Y) in next line of
program ,controller will execute drilling at (X,Y)
5. this module G code ,use G80 to cancel ,when program run into G00, G01, G02 , G03 or other cycle ,this
module G code will be canceled automatically.
Condition:
3. Q must be specified a positive value. If Q is negative value ,it will be thought to be a positive value (absolute
value), data that Q and R specified only be set in drilling blocks, it will not be set in not drilling blocks.
4. G Code group 01 and G76 can not be specified in the same block, or G76 Canned Cycle cancel.
5. in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation (G41/G42/G40)will be ignore.
2.4.35.3 Example
F1000. S500;
M03; // start drill rotate CW
G90;
G00 X0. Y0. Z10.; // position to initial point
G17;
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole 1, shift amount at bottom of hole2.0, dwell time 5 s
G76 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. Q2. P5.;

X15.; // hole 2
Y15.; // hole 3
X10. Y10. Z-20.; // hole 5, and specify the new point Z to be -20.0
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.36 G81: DRILLING CYCLE

G81 X Y Z R F K ；

Z_:
R_:
F_: feed rate
K_: number of repeats (repeat moving and drilling, G91 is effective)

1. use G00 to positioning to specified (X,Y) when start to perform
2. use G00 to reach specified point R.
3. use G01 to reach point Z the bottom of the hole
4. use G00 to raise to initial point(G98) or program point R(G99)
Note:
1. before G81, use M Code to let drill start to rotate.
in that block,

Condition:
3. data R specified only be set in drilling block, it will not be set in not drilling block.
in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation (G41/G42/G40)will be ignore.
2.4.36.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99; //setting point R、point Z and hole 1
G81 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5.;
X15.; // hole 2
Y15.; // hole 3
X10. Y10. Z-20.; // hole 5, and set new point Z to be -20
G80;
M02;
2.4.37 G82: DRILLING CYCLE OF DWELL ON THE HOLE BOTTOM



X_ or Y_: hole position data (absolute/increment mode)
Z _:
R_:
F_: feed rate
4. dwell P (s)
5. use G00 raise to initial point(G98) or program point R(G99)

Notes:
1. before G82, use M Code to let drill start to rotate.
in that block
subsequent holes, the M Code is not executed
Condition:
1. before drilling axis changes, Canned Cycle must be canceled first.

in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation mode(G41/G42/G40) will be ignored.
2.4.37.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
M03; // start drill to rotate CW
G90 G99;
//specified point R、point Z and hole 1, dwell time 2 s
G82 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. P2.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G98 X5.; // hole4, and return to initial point
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.38 G83: PECK DRILL CYCLE

G83 X Y Z R Q F K ；

Z_:
R_:
Q_: the feed depth (increment and positive value; negative value is neglected)
P_: dwell time at the bottom of the hole(s)
F_: feed rate


4. use G00 raise to point R of workpiece interface.
5. use G00 reach a distance “d” that opposite to the present depth(parameter 4002)
7. use G00 raise to point R of workpiece interface.
8. repeat performing until the bottom of the hole point Z
9. use G00 raise to initial point (G98) or program point R(G99)

Notes:
1. peck drill of returning tool value “d” ,it is specified by CNC parameter No.4002.
2. before using G83, use M Code let the drill to rotate first.
in that block
Condition:
2. if the Block does not include movement command of any axes (X, Y, Z), then drilling will not be executed
3. data Q and data R specified only be set in drilling block, it will not be set in not drilling block.
5. in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation mode (G41/G42/G40) will be ignored.

2.4.38.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99; // specify point R, point Z and hole 1, cutting federate 3.0
G83 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. Q3.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.39 G84: TAPPING DRILLING CYCLE

G84 X Y Z R P Q F K ；

Z_:
R_:
Q_: the feed depth (increment and positive value; negative value is neglected)
F_: feed rate
X, Y, Z, R is absolute or increment mode, decided by G90/G91.

Type I: None argument Q
Description
2. use G00 to reach specified point R
4. dwell P(s) and reverse the drill
5. use G01 to raise to point R
6. dwell P(s) and reverse the drill
TYPEⅡ: High Speed Peck Tapping (Custom Parameter No.4001= 1)
Description:
2. use G00 to reach specified point R

4. After dwell P(s), use G01 to reach a distance “d” that opposite to the present depth (set by parameter 4002).
5. After dwell P(s), use G01 to interpolate a distance Q at the present depth.
6. After dwell P(s), use G01 to reach a distance “d” that opposite to the present depth (set by parameter 4002).
7. Repeat the above action until reaching the bottom of the hole, point Z.
8. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then use G01 to rise to point R (G99).
9. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then G00 to rise to initial point (G98).
TYPEⅢ: General Peck Tapping (Custom Parameter No.4001= 0)
Description:
1. Use G00 to positioning to specified (X, Y) when start to perform.
2. Use G00 to reach specified point R.
3. Use G01 to interpolate a distance Q at the present depth.
4. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then use G01 to reach point R.
5. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then use G01 to interpolate a distance “Q” relative to the depth of present
hole.
6. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then use G01 to reach point R.
7. Repeat the above action until reaching the bottom of the hole, point Z.
8. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then use G01 to rise to point R (G99).
9. Dwell P(s) and reverse the tap. Then use G00 to rise to initial point (G98).
tapping pitch/perform speed, reduce :

• G94: perform speed(F mm/min) =spindle rotate rate(S RPM) * pitch(P mm/rev)
• G95: perform speed(F mm/rev) = pitch(P mm/rev)
• G84: when performing, perform speed(F) spindle rotate rate(S), they are not controlled by turning switch(fix
100%)
Notes:
1. before using G84, use M Code to let the drill rotate CCW
in that block

3. when the K is used to specify numbers of repeats, this M Code is executed in the first hole only. G84 is
module G Code ,it is always effective when we use once ,we only specify (X,Y) in next line of
program ,controller will execute drilling at (X,Y)
4. this module G Code ,will be canceled when G80 command ,or we command G00 ,G01,G02,G03 or other cycle
G code ,this module G code will be canceled automatically
5. because there is a period of time that spindle from CW to CCW at tapping , please command P to dwell a
period of time

Condition:
2.4.39.2 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole1
G84 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.40 G85: DRILLING CYCLE

G85 X Y Z R F K ；

Z_:

R_:
F_: feed rate
3. use G01 to reach point Z the bottom of the hole,
4. G01 command to raise to point R
5. G00 command to raise to initial point(G98) or program point R(G99)

Notes:
1. before G85 command, use M Code to let the spindle rotate.
in that block.
Condition:

2.4.40.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole 1
G85 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.41 G86: HIGH SPEED DRILLING CYCLE

G86 X Y Z R F K ；

X or Y : hole position data (absolute/increment mode)
Z:
R:
P : dwell time at the bottom of the hole (s)
F : feed rate
K : number of repeats (repeat moving and drilling, G91 is effective)

4. use G00 to raise to initial point (G98) or program point R(G99)

Notes:
1. before using G86, use M Code to let the drill to rotate.
in that block
Condition:
in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation mode (G41/G42/G40) will be ignored.
2.4.41.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99;

//specify point R、point Z and hole 1

G86 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.42 G87: FINE BORING CYCLE OF BACK SIDE

G87 X Y Z R Q P F K ；

Z_:
R_:
Q_: shift amount at the bottom of the hole (positive, negative will be ignored)
F_: feedrate

Oriented Spindle Stop(OSS) PIC
2. afterOSSstops ,use the direction that parameter 4020 specify ,and shift amount a Q distance in reverse
direction
3. use G00 to reach specified point R, shift amount a Q distance,
4. drill rotate CW.
5. G01 command to raise to point Z
6. after dwell P(s) and shift amount a Q distance in reverse direction
7. G00 command to raise to initial point
8. after drill start and shift amount a Q distance.

2.4.42.3 ※Alarm:
• Q is a Modal Value that request in G87 cycle. This Q value must be specified carefully because it is also used
in G73/G83 cycle.
• OSS(Oriented Spindle Stop) direction is decided by parameter No. 4020:
Parameter 4020 OSSdirection

0 +X
1 -X
2 +Y
3 -Y
4 +Z
5 -Z

Notes:
1. before G87 command, use M Code to let the spindle rotate.
2. if M Code and G87 are specified in the same block , this M Code only executes in the first time of positioning
in that block

Condition:
3. Q must be specified to a positive value. If Q were a negative value, it will be specified to positive value
(absolute value), data Q and data R specified only be set in drilling block, it will not be set in not drilling
block.
2.4.42.4 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole 1, shift amount 5.0, dwell time 4.0s
G87 X5. Y5. Z10. R-30. Q5. P4.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3

G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.43 G88: FINE BORING CYCLE OF HALF AUTOMATION


Z_:
R_:
F_: feedrate
※ for positioning by manual.


4. drill stops after dwell P(s),
5. make the tool out of workpiece in manual mode and reset
6. use G01 to move to point R
8. drill rotate CW.
Notes:
1. before G88 command, use M Code to let drill start to rotate first.
2. if M Code and G88 specify in the same block ,this M Code only executes once when the first time positioning
in that block

Condition:
2.4.43.3 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole1, dwell 2.0s
G88 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. P3.;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;

2.4.44 G89: BORING CYCLE OF DWELL ON THE HOLE BOTTOM

G89 X Y Z R P F K ;

Z_:
R_:
F_: feedrate
4. dwell P (s)
5. use G01 to raise to point R
6. use G00 to raise to initial point (G98) or program point R(G99)


2.4.44.3 Notes:
1. before G89 command, use M Code to let the drill start to rotate.
in that block
2.4.44.4 Condition:
in Canned Cycle, tool length compensation mode (G41/G42/G40)will be ignored.
2.4.44.5 Example
F1000. S500;
G90;
G17;
G90 G99;
//specify point R、point Z and hole1, dwell 2.5s
G89 X5. Y5. Z-10. R-5. P2.5;
X15.; // hole2
Y15.; // hole3
G80;
M05; // drill stops
M02;
2.4.45 G90/G91: ABSOLUTE/INCREMENT COMMEND

G90;
G91;


Description:
G90: absolute command.
G91: incremental command.
1. first way(absolute): G90 G00 X90.0 Y40.0；
//use the different distance from specified point to program zero point, to linear interpolation to specified
point
2. second way(increment): G91 G00 X70.0 Y20.0；
//use the different distance from specified point to starting point, to linear interpolation to specified point
2.4.46 G92: SETTING OF WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM

G92 X Y Z ;
X、Y、Z: set the position that work coordinate system(G92) in programmable coordinate system
When we design the program, we must set another program coordinate zero point, we can use G92 to set a new
coordinate system at this time, this command is set a new zero point of coordinate system when the tool is in any
position, after setting tool will start to perform at this point, absolute command is computed by this new
coordinate system.

Format: G92 X20.0 Y15.0 Z20.0；
2.4.47 G94/G95: FEED UNIT SETTING

G94 F ;

G95 F ;
this command set the unit of feedrate of F function (tool move distance per unit time or move distance per
revolution)；G94 is feed value per minute, unit: mm/min, inch/min, G95 is feed value per revolution, unit: mm/rev,
inch/rev..

2.4.48 G96/G97: CONSTANT LINEAR VELOCITY CONTROL ON SURFACE

G96 S ；constant linear velocity control on surface: ON
G97 S ；constant linear velocity control on surface: OFF
G96 specify the surface speed (relative speed between the tool and workpiece), G97 command can cancel G96
command, it also can specify spindle speed；in performance, use the tool in different radius, but we need surface
speed in a fixed value, we can use G96 S to control surface speed；if you do not mind how big is the diameter of
tool when perform, and we fix the spindle speed, we can use G97 S to control spindle speed, follow the formula:

V: surface speed, it can use G96 to specify to fixed value, unit M/MIN or FEET/MIN.
D: diameter of tool, unit mm
N: spindle speed, it can use G97 to specify to fixed value, unit RPM.
2.4.48.3 Example 1
spindle surface speed fixed:
G92 S2000; //use G92 to restrict spindle max revolution
G96 S130 M03; //for interpolation speed is130 m/min
Notes: G92 always used with G96, it restricts max revolution of spindle, example is tool NO.2 diameter10mm, then:


Through G92 the spindle max revolution is 2000rpm, in order to prevent spindle revolution too big、centrifugal too
big, workpiece is not tight with the machine, so some accident will happen；so we use G92 to match G96 insome
times

2.4.48.4 Example 2
spindle revolution fixed: G97 S1300 M03；
//for spindle keep 1300 rev/min
2.4.49 G134: CIRCUMFERENCE HOLE CYCLE

G134 X Y I J K ；

X, Y: center position of circumference hole, effective by G90/G91.
I: radius of circle(r), unit is specified by G70/G71, must in positive value.
J: angle of initial drilling hole.
K: number of holes. Range 1~9999, can not be zero. It is specified positive when CCW, negative when CW.
Use the point between X axis and angle ,start to make the circle in n parts, n holes. The point is on the circle that
center is specified (X,Y) and the radius is r.
2.4.49.3 Example
PIC:

G92 X500.0 Y100.0；//set absolute zero point coordinate system
G91 G81 Z-10.0 R5.0 K0 F200；
//execute drilling cycle, feedrate200mm/min, depth10 mm, and return to initial point when finish
G134 X200.0 Y100.0 I100.0 J20.0 K6；
//execute circumference hole cycle, X=200mm,Y=100mmdrill the first hole, radius100mm, starting angle 20∘, 6 holes
G80；//cancel cycle
G90 G0 X0.0 Y0.0；//return to the system zero point
2.4.50 G135: ANGULAR STRAIGHT HOLE CYCLE

G135 X Y I J K ；

X, Y: starting position, effective by G90/G91.
I: interval, unit is specified by G70/G71, if it is negative then use starting point to be the center and drill holes in
symmetry direction.
J: angle of horizontal, CCW is positive.
K: number of holes, include starting point, range 1~9999.
2.4.50.2 Example
Use the interval to drill n holes in the direction that X axis and a angle, the starting point is specified (X, Y)

G91；//use increment mode
G81 Z-10.0 R5.0 K0 F100；
//execute drill cycle, feedrate100mm/min, depth of each hole10 mm, return to starting point when finish
G135 X200.0 Y100.0 I100.0 J30.0 K5；
//execute angular straight hole cycle, X=200mm,Y=100mm be starting position, interval 100mm, angle with
horizontal 30∘, 5 holes
2.4.51 G136: ARC TYPE HOLE CYCLE

G136 X Y I J P K ；

X, Y: center coordinate of arc, effective by G90/91.
I: radius of arc, unit is specified by G70/G71, present in positive value.
J: angle of the first drilling hole, positive in CCW.
P: interval of angle, positive in CCW.
K: number of holes.
Use the point make between X axis and a angle to be starting point ,and drill a hole every angular. The hole is
drilling in the arc that specified (X,Y) is center and “r” is radius.
2.4.51.3 Example
PIC:

G91；//use incremental mode
G81 Z-10.0 R5.0 K0 F100；
//execute drilling cycle, cutting feedrate100mm/min, depth of each holes10 mm, and return the initial point
G136 X300.0 Y100.0 I300.0 J10.0 P15000 K6；
//execute arc type hole cycle, X=300mm,Y=100mmto be the center of the arc, radius300mm, starting angle value10∘,
interval angle15∘, 6 holes
2.4.52 G137.1: CHESS TYPE HOLE CYCLE

G137.1 X Y I P J K ；

X, Y: coordinates of starting point, effective by G90/91.
I: X axis interval, unit is decided by G70/G71, if the interval value is positive ,then go through positive direction from
starting point, if it is negative ,then go through negative direction.
P: interval of X axis direction, range 1~9999.
J: interval of Y axis direction
K: number of Y axis direction, range 1~9999.
The starting point is specified (X,Y), we get the interval at horizontal direction of X axis, and drill nx chess type holes.
We get the interval at horizontal direction of Y axis, and drill ny chess type holes.

2.4.52.3 Example
PIC:
G91；//use incremental mode
G81 Z-10.0 R5.0 K0 F20；
//execute drilling cycle, cutting feedrate20mm/min, depth of each hole10 mm, then return to initial point
G137.1 X300.0 Y-100.0 I50.0 P10 J100.0 K8；
//execute chess type hole cycle, X =300mm,Y =-100mmto be strating point, X axis interval is50mm, number of the
hole is 10, Y axis interval is100mm, number of the hole is 8

2.5 6 Series Mill Operation Manual

4. Date
5. Time
6. Data input
7. Display(Hint)
8. Status
9. Mode
10. Alarm
11. Function Key

2.5.1.3 Coordinate
• Command
• F1 Coordinate
• Function

Coordinate Display
F(Feedrate)

Run Time
Part counter
T(Tool No.)
Switch Coordinate
• Command
• Function
Half Coordinate
• Command
• Function
object.

• Example
Zero Rel. Coord.

• Command
• Function
• Example

• Command
• Function
• Example

2.5.1.4 Program
• Command
• F2 Program
• Function
purpose.
Execute
• Command
• Function
• Note
Delete Line
• Command
• Function

Search/Replace
• Command
• Function
Find Next
• Command
• Function
• Find next.
Replace
• Command
• Function

Replace All
• Command
• Function
Modify Setting
• Command
• Function
File Manager
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager
• Function

New File
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F1 New File
• Function
• Note
• The length of file name cannot be longer than 32 characters(include file extension)
Copy File
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F2 Copy File
• Function
• Note
• The length of file name cannot be longer than 32 characters(include file extension)
Delete File
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F3 Delete File
• Function
• Press F3「Delete File」, checkbox will show up in front of the NC file within the「File Manager」monitor
• Delete All: Delete all file within the data storage device.
• Note
File Transfer
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F4 File Transfer
• Function
• Transmit data between controller and outer device.

File Import
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F4 File Transfer→F1 File Import
• Function
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
device and press【Enter】, then the left column will change and show the data structure of selected
device.
controller.
File Export
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F4 File Transfer→F2 File Export
• Function
• Export files within controller to outer device.
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2

desire device and press 【Enter】, then the left column will change and show the data structure of
selected device.
Execute
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 File Manager→F5 Execute
• Function
• Note
Simulation
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Simulation
• Function
• Simulation setting can be modified by F5「simulate Setting」.

Step
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F1 Step
• Function
Continue
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F2 Continue
• Function
Zoom
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F3 Zoom
• Function
• Press F3「Zoom」,there will be a block show up. Use【↑】【↓】【←】【→】to move the window up, down, left
and right.
Graph Reset
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F4 Graph Reset
• Function

Simu. Setting
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Simulation→F5 Simu. Setting
• Function
• Simulation Parameter
1. Color
• Provide 16 different colors(Setting 0~15).
2. Path Color
3. Cursor Color
4. RGB Value
• Except the 16 default color, user can define the color themself.
5. Draw Mode
• XYZ • YX
• XY • ZY
• YZ • XZ
• ZX
6. Setting quadrant

• First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
7. Simulate Mode
• Simulation
• System will scan the whole program and detect the simulation boundary, and
then simulation will execute. No need to define the simulate boundary.
• Direct Draw
• When user go to the 『Monitor』page, cursor will show up but simulation will not
execute automatically.
• Not Simulation
• Under XYZ draw mode, by setting this parameter, simulation will show up with 3D.
• Vertical
• Horizontal
9. Scope
• Minimum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
• Maximum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis

Can Cycle
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F1 Can Cycle
• Function
• Because Syntec system provides many G codes and different G code has each function. When editing
the program, this function can help user to edit G code easily.
Insert Cycle
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F1 Can Cycle→F1 Insert Cycle
• Function
cursor.
Edit Cycle
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F1 Can Cycle→F2 Edit Cycle
• Function

Block Copy
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy
• Function
Start Line
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F1 Start Line
• Function
End Line
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F2 End Line
• Function
Block Cut
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F3 Block Cut
• Function

Block Copy
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F4 Block Copy
• Function
Block Paste
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F2 Block Copy→F5 Block Paste
• Function
Operation Method
• • Move the cursor to the desire line and press「Start Line」and function key「End Line」enable.
1. a. →Function key 「End Line」disable.
b. →Function key 「Block Copy」enable.
c. →Function key 「Block Cut」enable.
d. →If 「Block Cut」being use, the whole block that had been highlight will be cut off.
e. →Function key 「Block Copy」/「Block Cut」disable.
f. →Function key 「Block Paste」enable.
• Move the cursor to the desire location and press 「Block Paste」, the content that had been cut or
copied will paste at the cursor location.
• Note

Teach
• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach
• Function
Rapid Teach
• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F1 Rapid Teach
• Function
program.
Line Cut Teach

• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F2 Line Cut Teach
• Function
• Add the current absolute coordinate as the input value of 「G01 Linear Cutting」function in current
program.
Arc Cut Teach

• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F3 Arc Cut Teach
• Function

program.
Cancel Arc Middle

• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F4 Cancel Arc Middle
• Function
Point Teach
• Command
• F2 Program→Next→F3 Teach→F5 Point Teach
• Function
input into the cursor location.
• Command
• Function

Workpiece Cord.
• Command
• Function
• Note
Mach. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example

Rel. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example
Aux. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example
Inc. Input
• Command
• Function
coordinate again.
• Example
• Key in 10.000

Middle Func.
• Command
• Function
Manual
• Function

Auto
• Function
direction.
moving.
piece.
Coord.

• Command
• Function
number.
• Example
• Key in 10,000

Tool Set
• Command
• Function
• Function of Parameter
• 【PageUp】【PageDown】to switch the page.
• Measure method
• Press 「Z」 and then press 「Enter」.
• The value where the cursor is will be set as current Z coord relative coord value.
• Note


• Command
• Function
Tool No
• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F2 Tool Set→F4 Tool No.
• Function
Tool Life Manag.

• Command
• Function
• Refer the chapter 3.3.3.6.
Tool Tip Measurement

• Command
• F3 Offset/Setting→F3 Tool Tip Measurement
• Function
• User can key in different tool No. tip position into workpiece coordinate for the tool length offset
setting, with tool alignment equipment.
• Detail Description please refer the chapter 3.3.3.3.

• Command
• Function

2.5.1.6 Monitor
• Command:
• F4 Monitor
• Function


• Distance to go
• Feed rate
• Spindle

• Function
• Description
1. G Code
2. Run Time Accum
3. Run Time

4. Percentage ratio
• G00 percentage
• G01 percentage
5. Total Acum Par
6. Part Count
7. Start Block
8. Tool Data
• T
• 4 numbers

• Description
3. Spindle speed
• Feed rate
processing block.
• Total AcumPar
• Part count
• Required part

Simulation Area
• Description
Open File to Edit

• Command:
• Function
• Note:
Simulation Switch
• Command:
• Description
MDI Input
• Command:
• Description
• Operation:
• Select MDI mode
• Note:
Parameter Set
• Command:
• Function
Tool Wear Set

• Command:
• Description

• Note
set.

1. Command:
2. Description

• Command:
• F4 Monitor->Next-> F1 Start MPG Coordinate
• Description
Work Record
• Command:
• F4 Monitor-> Next->F2 Work Record
• Description

• Command:
• F4 Monitor-> Next->F3 Clear Acum Cycle Time
• Description
Graph Adjust
• Command:
• F4 Monitor-> Next->F4 Graph Adjust
• Description
• Operation
• Please refer to 1.4.5 「simulation」.
2.5.1.7 Maintain
• Command:
• F5 Maintain
• Description

Alarm
• Command:
• Description
Pending alarm
• Command:
• Description
History alarm
• Command:
• F5 Maintain->F1 Alarm-> F2 History Alarm
• Description
• Note:
Save Alarm
• Command:
• F5 Maintain->F1 Alarm-> F3 Save alarm
• Description


Network Setting
• Command:
• F5 Maintain->F2 Network setting
• Description
• IP Address
• Sunet Mask
• PC name
• Dir name

Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• Description
• Related infor.
• Timeout(ms)
Start Server
• Command:
• Description

Fast Diagnostic
• Command:
• F5 Maintain->F3 Fast diagnostic
• Description

System Data
• Command:
• Description

Axes Data
• Command:
• Description

PLC Param Setting
• Command:
• F5 Maintain-> F4 PLC param setting
• Description
specific functions.
• Operation

System Setting
• Command:
• F5 Maintain -> F5 System setting
• Description
• Operation

System Time Setting

• YYYY: year
• MM: month
• DD: day
• HH: hours
• MM: minute
• SS: second


Backup System
• Command:
• F5 Maintain -> Next-> F1 Backup System
• Description
About
• Command:
• F5 Maintain -> Next-> F5 About
• Description

2.5.2.2 Text Key Description
Not Ready
Ready
Busy
Pause
B-stop
Manual Function

Machining Process
Workpiece Cord set
• Command:
• F3 Offset/Setting -> F1 Workpiece Cord Set
• Use and 、 move the cursor to the coord you want to key in。
• Can use the Mach. Coord. Teach to insert the value.
• Can use the Rel. Coord. Teach to insert the value.
• Can use the Aux. Coord. Teach to insert the value
Middle Func.
• Function:
• Operation:
In the 5 buttons system, user can use this function by press F3 Offset/Setting ->F1 Workpeice Cord. ->F5

Middle Func.
Manual 4Pts Center

• Function
• In the WorklPiece Cord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 [Aux. Coord.
Teach] insert the Aux. Coord value then this system will set the value accordind to the Aux Coord.

Manual 3Pts Center
• Operation:
and Py2.
and Py3.
R.
• In the WorklPiece Cord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 [Aux. Coord.
Teach] insert the Aux. Coord value then this system will set the value accordind to the Aux Coord.

OUTAutoCenter
• Operation:
workpiece
R.
• In the WorkPiece Cord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 [Aux. Coord.
Teach] insert the Aux. Coord value then this system will set the value according to the Aux Coord.

INAutoCenter
• Operation:
plane
Tool Prepare
Specifying Machining Program
Simu. Setting

Machining Test
Machining Monitor
Alarm Processing
Network Setting
1. On the interface screen, press down"F5 Maintain" => "F2 Network Setting" to access IP address setting.
2. IP Address Setting: select "Specify an IP Address" when the PC connects with controller directly. And select
"Obtain an IP Address via DHCP" if using network connection via Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
3. IP Address: if you select "Specify an IP Address", enter the free IP address
4. Subnet Mask: Enter the IP address for subnet mask (the same with PC subnet mask).
5. PC Name: Enter the full computer name of your PC.
6. Dir Name: Enter the sharing folder name (the same name with PC sharing folder )
7. User Name: Enter GUEST
8. Press「F1 OK」, and then reboot controller to finish installation.

PC Setting
File Import
File Export
2.5.4 Appendix
Hsinchu Jiangsu-Suzhou
SYNTEC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd.
(Headquarters) D 1-8,Teng Fei New Industrial Zone, 5# Xing Han
No. 21 Industry E. Rd. 4, Hsinchu Science Park, Street, Suzhou Industrial Park, China
Hsinchu City 30077, Taiwan, ROC TEL：+86-512-69008860
TEL：+886-3-6663553 FAX：0512-69560818
FAX：+886-3-6663505
E-Mail：
sales@syntecclub.com.twcust23omerservice@syntecc
lub.com.tw24
Taichung Taichung
Taichung County 420, Taiwan Taiwan
TEL：+886-4-25337731 TEL：+886-4-23102626
FAX：+886-4-25349224 FAX：+886-4-23102636
23 mailto:sales@syntecclub.com.twcust
24 mailto:omerservice@syntecclub.com.tw

No.218, Denan Rd., Rende Dist., Tainan City 71756, Development CO.,LTD
TEL：+886-6-2796707 Province, to take off the new Su Industrial Square D,
FAX：+886-6-2796705 2nd Floor 01-08 unit
TEL：0512-69560828
FAX：0512-69560818
Branch Room 12-07,No.262,416 Alley,Zhaohui
Room1202 Unit2 Buiding1, Edifice DiKai , Jincheng Road,Jiangdong District,Ningbo City.
Road, Beigan Street,Xiaoshan District , Hangzhou TEL：+86-574-87750305
City,Zhejiang Province, China FAX：+86-574-87750306
TEL：+86-571-82751187
FAX：+-86-571-82751186
TEL：0576- 86138372 City,Guangdong Province, China
FAX：0576-86119106 TEL：+86-20-34583040
FAX：+86-20-34583220
Guangdong-Dongguan Shaanxi-Xi'an
SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Dongguan The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co.,
Branch Ltd. Xi'an Office
District Chang an Road, Yanta District, Xi'an, Shaanxi
TEL：+86-769-81660318 TEL：029-88287423
FAX：+86-769-81660328 FAX：029-88287423
Baoji offices Room 1112, Unit A, Jiahui Global Plaza, No.548,
Room 2401, Building 1, Xinjian Road, Weibin District, Beiyuan Street, Tianqiao District, Jinan, China
Baoji TEL：+86-53185907208
TEL：18700712118 FAX：+86-53185905708

SuZhou SYNTEC Equipment CO.,Ltd. Xiamen Branch The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co.,
No. 100,B Chuang Chang Fang 3F East,Jin Fu Ltd. Tianjin Branch
Road,Tong An District,Xiamen City, Fujian Province, Haiyi International 3-1416, No.2, Rongyuan Road,
China Huayuan Industries Park, Binhai Hi-and-New Tech
TEL：+86-592-7191901 Park, Tianjin
FAX：+86-592-7220536 TEL：+86-22-87134111
FAX：022-87134111
The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co., The Suzhou new generation of CNC Equipment Co.,
Ltd. Luoyang Company Ltd. Chongqing Branch
Henan TEL：023-67913296
TEL：0379-65110352 FAX：023-67634382
FAX：0379-65110352
Room 505, Unit 3, Building 12,Wuyi Luzhou Guan Chu Room2003-2006,A#Guangguguoji,456 #Luoyu
Yuan, No.99, Tianyuan Middle Road, Road,Donghukaifaqu,Wuhan City, China
Jiangning District, Nanjing TEL：027-87638876
TEL：0512-69008860-300 FAX：027-87204137
Liaoning-Shenyang Anhui-Hefei
No.3 A 1-12-3, South Wenhui Street, Shenhe District, Room 704, Building 13,Wanzhen Xiaoyao Garden Ⅳ,
Shenyang, Liaoning Taihu East Road, Hefei
TEL：15002491395 TEL：15951989576
FAX：18698806526
Thailand Malaysia
SIAM RADERMEN Co., Ltd. SURE FIRST ENTERPRISE (M) SDN BHD.
52/4,MOO 5,THEPARAK RD. 47000 NO 19.JALAN TSB 6,TAMAN INDUSTRI SUNGAI
(KM11.5)BANGPLEEYAI,BANGPLEE, SAMUTPRAKRAN BULOH.47000 SELANGOR DARUL.EHSAN
10540 TEL：+603-61577632
TEL：+66-27553536 FAX：+603-61574632
FAX：+66-27575476
E-Mail：lee_cheahow@yahoo.com25

Lebanon / Damascus France

Kesmeyan Group Co. INTEGRATION CNC
Lebanon Beirut, Jdeideh - Ammaieh - Kessmeyan 6, Rue l'arché de Copigny, 76630 BAILLY, FRANCE
Group Build.DamascusTEL: +963 11 6731602Mob.: TEL：+33 2 35 06 07 83
+963 988 211407E-Mail : info@rockwell.tw26 FAX：+33 2 35 06 07 83
TEL：+961-76-883778 http://www.integrationcnc.fr/
FAX：+961-1-901807 E-Mail：vaque.j@online.fr28
E-Mail：kesmeyan@rockwell.tw27
Turkey ISTANBUL/TURKEY
KASIKCIOGLU ELEKTROMEKANIK OTOMASYON AKSIS MAKINA
Besevler K.S.S. 17 BLOK NO:72 Nilufer/BURSA/ Yeni doğan mahallesi karakaş Sk. Emintaş Erciyes
TURKYIE Sanayi Sitesi no:12/206
TEL：+90-224-4434684 TEL：+90 212 613 87 83
FAX：+90-224-4434685 FAX：+90 212 613 87 85
E-Mail：murat@kasikcioglu.com29 http://www.aksismakina.com30
E-Mail：info@aksismakina.com31
26 mailto:info@rockwell.tw

2.6 11 Series Mill Operation Manual

4. Date
5. Time
6. Data input
7. Display(Hint)
8. Status
9. Mode
10. Alarm
11. Function Key


2.6.1.3 Coordinate
• Command
• F1 Coordinate
• Function
Coordinate Display
F(Feedrate)


Run Time
Part counter
T(Tool No.)
Switch Coordinate
• Command
• Function
Half Coordinate
• Command
• Function
object.
• Example
Zero Rel. Coord.

• Command
• Function
• Example


• Command
• Function
• Example
2.6.1.4 Program
• Command
• F2 Program
• Function
purpose.

Execute
• Command
• Function
• Note
Delete Line
• Command
• Function
Search/Replace
• Command
• Function

Find Next
• Command
• Function
• Find next.
Replace
• Command
• Function
Replace All
• Command
• Function
Modify Setting
• Command
• Function

Can Cycle
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 Can Cycle
• Function
Insert Cycle
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 Can Cycle→F1 Insert Cycle
• Function
cursor.
Edit Cycle
• Command
• F2 Program→F4 Can Cycle→F2 Edit Cycle
• Function

Block Copy
• Path
• F2 Program→F5 Block Copy
• Function
Start Line
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Block Copy→F1 Start Line
• Function
End Line
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Block Copy→F2 End Line
• Function
Block Cut
• Command

• F2 Program→F5 Block Copy→F3 Block Cut

• Function
Block Copy
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Block Copy→F4 Block Copy
• Function
Block Paste
• Command
• F2 Program→F5 Block Copy→F5 Block Paste
• Function
• Note

Teach
• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach
• Function
Rapid Teach
• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F1 Rapid Teach
• Function
program.
Line Cut Teach

• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F2 Line Cut Teach
• Function
Arc Cut Teach

• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F3 Arc Cut Teach

• Function
program.
Cancel Arc Middle

• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F4 Cancel Arc Middle
• Function
Point Teach
• Command
• F2 Program→F6 Teach→F5 Point Teach
• Function

Simulation
• Command
• F2 Program→F7 Simulation
• Function
Step
• Command
• F2 Program→F7 Simulation→F1 Step
• Function
Continue
• Command
• F2 Program→F7 Simulation→F2 Continue
• Function

Zoom
• Command
• F2 Program→F7 Simulation→F3 Zoom
• Function
and right.
Graph Reset
• Command
• F2 Program→F7 Simulation→F4 Graph Reset
• Function
Simu. Setting
• Command
• F2 Program→F7 Simulation→F5 Simu. Setting
• Function
1. Color

2. Path Color
3. Cursor Color
4. RGB Value
5. Draw Mode
• XYZ • YX
• XY • ZY
• YZ • XZ
• ZX
6. Setting quadrant
• First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
7. Simulate Mode
• Simulation
• Direct Draw
automatically.
• Not Simulation
• Vertical
• Horizontal
9. Scope
• Minimum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
• Maximum
• X-Axis

• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
File Manager
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager
• Function
New File
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F1 New File
• Function
• Note

Copy File
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F2 Copy File
• Function
• Note
Delete File
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F3 Delete File
• Function
• Note
File Import
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F4 File Import
• Function
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2


of selected device.
controller.
File Export
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F5 File Export
• Function
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
Execute
• Command
• F2 Program→F8 File Manager→F8 Execute
• Function
• Note

• Command
• Function

Workpiece Cord.
• Command
• Function
• Note
Mach. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example

Rel. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example
Aux. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example
Inc. Input
• Command
• Function
coordinate again.
• Example
• Key in 10.000

Middle Func.
• Command
• Function
Manual
• Function

Auto
• Function
direction.
moving.
piece.
Coord.

• Command
• Function
number.
• Example
• Key in 10,000

Tool Set
• Command
• Function
• Measure method
coordinate value.

• Note

• Command
• Function
Tool No.
• Command
• Function
Tool Life Manag.

• Command
• Function
Tool Tip Measure

• Function

• Command
• Function

2.6.1.6 Monitor
• Command:
• F4 Monitor
• Function


• Distance to go
• Feed rate
• Spindle

• Function
• Description
1. G Code
2. Run Time Accum
3. Run Time

4. Percentage ratio
• G00 percentage
• G01 percentage
5. Total Acum Par
6. Part Count
7. Start Block
8. Tool Data
• T
• 4 numbers

• Description
3. Spindle speed
• Feed rate
processing block.
• Total AcumPar
• Part count
• Required part

Simulation Area
• Description
Open File to Edit

• Command:
• Function
• Note:
Simulation Switch
• Command:
• Description
MDI Input
• Command:
• Description
• Operation:
• Select MDI mode
• Note:
Parameter Set
• Command:
• Function
Tool Wear Set

• Command:
• Description

• Note
set.

1. Command:
2. Description
Work Record
• Command:
• F4 Monitor-> F7 Work Record
• Description

• Command:
• F4 Monitor-> F8 Clear Acum Cycle Time
• Function
Graph Adjust
• Command:
• F4 Monitor-> Next->F1 Graph Adjust
• Description
• Operation
2.6.1.7 Maintain
• Command:
• F8 Maintain
• Description

Alarm
• Command:
• Description
Pending Alarm
• Command:
• Description
History Alarm
• Command:
• Description
• Note:
Save Alarm
• Command:
• Description

Network Setting
• Command:
• Description
• IP Address
• Sunet Mask
• PC name
• Dir name

Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• Description
• Related infor.
• Timeout(ms)
Start Server
• Command:
• Description

Fast Diagnostic
• Command:
• Description

System Data
• Command:
• Description

Axes Data
• Command:
• Function

PLC Param Setting
• Command:
• Description
specific functions.
• Operation

System Setting
• Command:
• Description
• Operation

System Time Setting

• YYYY: year
• MM: month
• DD: day
• HH: hours
• MM: minute
• SS: second


Backup System
• Command:
• F8 Maintain -> F6 Backup System
• Description
About
• Command:
• Function

Not Ready
Ready
Busy
Pause
B-stop
Manual Function

Machining Process
Workpiece Cord set
Middle Func.
Tool Prepare
Specifying Machining Program
Simu. Setting
Machining Test
Machining Monitor
Alarm Processing

Network Setting
PC Setting
File Import
File Export
2.6.4 Appendix

3 EndUser_Wood
3.1 60 Wood Series Operation Manual

4. Date
5. Time
6. Data input
7. Display(Hint)
8. Status
9. Mode
10. Alarm
11. Function Key
EndUser_Wood – 808


3.1.1.3 Coordinate
• Command
• F1 Coordinate
• Function
Coordinate Display
F(Feedrate)


Run Time
Part counter
T(Tool No.)
Switch Coordinate
• Command
• Function
Half Coordinate
• Command
• Function
object.
• Example
Zero Rel. Coord.

• Command
• Function
• Example


• Command
• Function
• Example
3.1.1.4 Program
• Command
• F2 Program
• Function
purpose.

Execute
• Command
• Function
• Note
Delete Line
• Command
• Function
Search/Replace
• Command
• Function

Find Next
• Command
• Function
• Find next.
Replace
• Command
• Function
Replace All
• Command
• Function
Modify Setting
• Command
• Function

Can Cycle
• Command
• Function
Insert Cycle
• Command
• Function
cursor.
Edit Cycle
• Command
• Function

Block Copy
• Path
• Function
Start Line
• Command
• Function
End Line
• Command

• Function
Block Cut
• Command
• Function
Block Copy
• Command
• Function
Block Paste
• Command
• Function
• Note

Teach
• Command
• Function
Rapid Teach
• Command
• Function
program.
Line Cut Teach

• Command
• Function

Arc Cut Teach

• Command
• Function
program.
Cancel Arc Middle

• Command
• Function
Point Teach
• Command
• Function

Simulation
• Command
• Function
Step
• Command
• Function
Continue
• Command


• Function
Zoom
• Command
• Function
and right.
Graph Reset
• Command
• Function
Simu. Setting
• Command


• Function
1. Color
2. Path Color
3. Cursor Color
4. RGB Value
5. Draw Mode
• XYZ • YX
• XY • ZY
• YZ • XZ
• ZX
6. Setting quadrant
• First
• Second
• Third
• Fourth
7. Simulate Mode
• Simulation
• Direct Draw
automatically.
• Not Simulation
• Vertical
• Horizontal
9. Scope


• Minimum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
• Maximum
• X-Axis
• Y-Axis
• Z-Axis
File Manager
• Command
• Function
New File
• Command

• Function
• Note
Copy File
• Command
• Function
• Note
Delete File
• Command
• Function
• Note
File Import
• Command
• Function

• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2
of selected device.
controller.
File Export
• Command
• Function
• USBDisk
• DiskA
• Network
• USBDisk2

Execute
• Command
• Function
• Note
Choose DNC File

• Command
• 5 Buttons type: F2 Program→F4 File Manager→Next→F6 Execute
• Function
• Execute program stored in external devices, such as USB/Network.
• Use【↑】【↓】to select file, and then press「Confirm」the selected file to be executed.
• Title of selected file will be showed : DNC + file name
• Note
• Valid from - 6MDs/6s：2.2.0(10.116.10) 11s：2.2.1(10.116.10A) 21s：2.2.0(10.116.10) 20s：10.116.24
• When a file reading fail, the control will retry 100 times before pop up a error message
• A DNC program must use M30 as the end of program
• USB DNC function does not support MACRO function
• USB DNC function supports O888800, O999900, and Pr3851=0 functions (after 2.2.5)
• When M98, G65, or G66 is used, the subprogram must be stored in controller

• Command
• Function

Workpiece Cord.
• Command
• Function
• Note
Mach. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example

Rel. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example
Aux. Coord. Teach

• Command
• Function
• Example
Inc. Input
• Command
• Function
coordinate again.
• Example
• Key in 10.000

Middle Func.
• Command
• Function
Manual
• Function

Auto
• Function
direction.
moving.
piece.
Coord.

• Command
• Function
number.
• Example
• Key in 10,000
Tool Set


• Command
• Function
• Measure method
coordinate value.

• Note

• Command
• Function
Tool No.
• Command
• Function
Tool Life Manag.

• Command
• Function
Tool Tip Measure

• Function

• Command
• Function

3.1.1.6 Monitor
• Command:
• F4 Monitor
• Function


• Distance to go
• Feed rate
• Spindle

• Function
• Description
1. G Code
2. Run Time Accum
3. Run Time

4. Percentage ratio
• G00 percentage
• G01 percentage
5. Total Acum Par
6. Part Count
7. Start Block
8. Tool Data
• T
• 4 numbers

• Description
3. Spindle speed
• Feed rate
processing block.
• Total AcumPar
• Part count
• Required part

Simulation Area
• Description
Open File to Edit

• Command:
• Function
• Note:
Simulation Switch
• Command:
• Description
MDI Input
• Command:
• Description
• Operation:
• Select MDI mode
• Note:
Parameter Set
• Command:
• Function
Tool Wear Set

• Command:
• Description

• Note
set.

1. Command:
2. Description
Work Record
• Command:
• Description

• Command:
• Function
Graph Adjust
• Command:
• Description
• Operation
3.1.1.7 Maintain
• Command:
• F8 Maintain
• Description

Alarm
• Command:
• Description
Pending Alarm
• Command:
• Description
History Alarm
• Command:
• Description
• Note:
Save Alarm
• Command:
• Description

Network Setting
• Command:
• Description
• IP Address
• Sunet Mask
• PC name
• Dir name

Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• Description
• Related infor.
• Timeout(ms)
Start Server
• Command:
• Description

Fast Diagnostic
• Command:
• Description

System Data
• Command:
• Description

Axes Data
• Command:
• Function

PLC Param Setting
• Command:
• Description
specific functions.
• Operation

System Setting
• Command:
• Description
• Operation

System Time Setting

• YYYY: year
• MM: month
• DD: day
• HH: hours
• MM: minute
• SS: second


Backup System
• Command:
• Description
About
• Command:
• Function

• POWER ON


• POWER OFF
• Turn off controller's power
• Emergency Stop
guaranteed.
• Home Mode

• JOG Mode (Rapid JOG)
• Operators can use JOG to control axis movement with 「X+/X-/Y+/Y-/Z+/Z-」 on panel.
• Operators can use JOG to control axis movement.

• MPG Mode
• User can use MPG (Manual Pulse Generator) mode to control axis movement.
• AUTO Mode

• MDI Mode

• MPG Simulation
• Enable this function under 「AUTO」 and 「MDI」 Mode, the percentage of moving speed is depend on
the MPG turning speed . This function used to check NC file.
• Single Block
• Enable this function under 「AUTO」 and 「MDI」 Mode, after finished one block action hold on the 「B-
STOP」 mode. To continue, users need to do the 「Cycle start」 action again. This function used to
check NC file.

• Optional Stop
• Users can use this function to decide whether CNC is stop or not when encounter with 「M01」within
NC (Numerical Control) program, while executing NC program.
• Optional Skip
• Users can use this function to decide whether program skips or not when program is encountered
with 「/」 sign in NC file.
• Auto Tool Change in clock wise direction
• Auto Tool Change ATC in counter clock wise direction
• Spindle Control
Spindle CW rotation
Spindle stop
Spindle rate deceleration: Spindle speed will decelerate 10%.
Spindle rate 100%: Spindle will rotate with 100%.

Spindle rate acceleration: Spindle speed will accelerate 10%.
• Working LED
• Turn ON/OFF working LED

• G01 Rank

Decrease G01 rate 10% Increase G01rate10% G01 rate100%
• G00 Rank

G00 rate x1 G00 rate x10 G00 rate x100 G00 rate x1000
• Those function key can be regard as G00, MPG or INJOG rank.
• Blowing
• ON/OFF blowing air.

• Cutting coolant system
• Turn ON/OFF working liquid.

• Auto cutting coolant system
• This function will be enable, when encounter with relate coolant on/off M code in NC program.
• Chip conveyor machine move in clockwise direction
• Chip conveyor machine move in counter clockwise direction

• Augment key(User define)
• Machine builder augment key, combine with PLC ladder.

• Direction of linear Axes &Rotation Axes & fast travel key
• Move the axes with fast travel speed key when press the axes and fast travel key at the same time.
： Numerical keys
： Delete key
： Switch keyboard to use subscript key on keyboard
： Space key

： While working with text, use this key to delete characters to the left of the
insertion point.
： For optional skip key input
： End of block
： Change to program edit page.
： Change to monitor page.
： Change to customize teach page. (Disable function key with no customize action)
： Insert word when edit program.

： Delete word when edit program.
： PAGE UP
： PAGE DOWN
Not Ready
Conditions:


Ready
Conditions:
Busy
Conditions:
Feed Hold
• Condition
Status.
• Notice
B-stop
Conditions:
Manual Function
JOG
• Function:
• Condition:


• Operation:
Rapid JOG
• Function:
• Condition:
• Operation:
• Note:

• Function:
distance)
• Condition:
• Operation:
MPG
• Function:
• Condition:
• Operation:
movements as below:

Machining Process
AUTO
• Condition:
• Operation:
finished
Single Block
• Function:
• Condition:
• Operation:
finished
Home
• Operation:
machine too fast

Workpiece Coord set
• Command:
• F3 Offset/Setting -> F1 Workpiece Coord. Set
• Use and 、 move the cursor to the coord. you want to key in。
• Can use the Latch Machine Coord. to insert the value.
• Can use the Relative Machine Coord. to insert the value.
• Can use the Aux. Coord. to insert the value
Middle Func.
• Function:
• Operation:
In the 8 botton system, user can use this function by press F3 Offset/Setting ->F1 Workpeice Cord. ->F6

Middle Func.
Manual 4Pts Center

• Function

Manual 3Pts Center
• Operation:
and Py2.
and Py3.
R.

OUTAutoCenter
• Operation:
workpiece
R.
• In the WorkPiece Cord. Screen, move the cursor to the coord you want to set, press F3 insert the Aux.
Coord value then this system will set the value according to the Aux Coord.

INAutoCenter
• Operation:
plane
Tool Prepare
Tool Set
• Purpose
• We can set the length and the diameter geometry and wear
• Can be used at Manual or Auto mode
• Wear value increment upper limit is 1.0, warning will appear if exceed 1.0.
• Use direction key 【↑】【↓】【←】【→】move the cursor.
• Use【PageUp】【PageDown】switch the page.
• Key in method: Absolute, Increment, Measure method.
• Absolute: for radius and length compensate.
• Increment: for radius wear and length wear.
• Radius compensate + radius wear = real G41/G42 compensate.

• Length compensate +length wear = real G43/G44 compensate.
Manual Measurement of Tool Length

• Purpose
• Describe how to use manual measurement to set tool length and work piece coordinate in order to
set the machining tool.
• Function
• We usually set the tool length and offset in the External Shift if we only use one tool in this machine.
• If we have more than one tool, we need to set every tool length we can use relative length or absolute
length.
• Manual mode.
• Manual Operation method
-Relative method.
• Use manual function moving the reference tool to the Z-coordinate code 0 position of the workpiece
(Ex. surface), set the value at G54.
• Clean all the relative coordinate value.
• Install the measured tool, move the tool to the same position as before (reference surface).
• The tool length is the different between measured tool and reference tool.
• Key in this number to the corresponding tool No.
• If tool break during machining and replace a new tool, we need to change to a new tool. If the Z-cord
0 position already disappear, we can use the standard tool to touch anywhere of the machine and
then use new tool to touch the same position. The relative cord. is tool length.
-Absolute method
• Use manual function moving the measuring tool to a reference point (Ex. Work piece table).
• Measure every tool repeatedly.
• Move the machining tool to the reference position, clean all the relative coordinate.
• Move the tool to the Z-coord code zero position, set it to G54.
• If tool break during machining so we need change a new tool, we must touch the reference position
first, and then the Z coordinate value is tool length.
Tool Tip Measure

• Function
• Measuring different tool No. tip position. Because the trigger position of tool alignment equipment is
fixed, user can use different tool tip position key in the workpiece coordinate system for the
reference of tool length offset. You must check this machine has tool alignment equipment.
• Offset/Setting→Tool Tip Measure

Auto Tool Function

• Function
Z coord. Auto Tool Function is to measure different tool No. by tool alignment equipment. Because the
trigger position of the tool alignment equipment is almost the same. User can key in different tool No. tip
position into workpiece coordinate for the tool length offset setting, please this machine is equipped with
tool alignment equipment.
• Operation description
Offset/Setting→Tool Tip Measure

• One Tool One Workpiece
• Set the Auto Tool number as 1(left-upper corner).

• Set the WorkPiece No. P as the workpiece coordinate.
0 Aux. Coord 1 G54
2 G55 3 G56
4 G57 5 G58

• Set the Feedrate F for the first time alignment and pull back everytime.
Reference as 0.
vaules will be entered in to Ref coord.X and Ref coord.Y.
out warning masseage and stop if the tool is lower than it.

• One Tool One Workpiece is finished
• One Tool Many Workpieces

Reference as 0.

1 G54 2 G55
3 G56 4 G57
5 G58
Z Delta set table

• If you have another workpieces need to set do the previous step again.
• Many Tool Many Workpieces

• Set the Tool No. T for the tool you want to align.
Reference as 0.
press Z Mach. Coord. Teach, you can insert the current Z coord. values into Start Coord. Z.

• If you have another workpieces and tools need to set do the previous step again.
• Finish alignment.
Tool No. Setting

This Chapter will describe how to set the tool No.
• Purpose:
• We need to confirm the relation between Tool No. and real tool in order to change tool correctly.
• Condition:
• Both Auto mode or Manual mode are OK..
• Tool Set→Tool No.
• You will see the table about Tool No. and Tool MG.
• MG5—T = 7 means we install tool No.7 at Tool case No.5
• This table will renew during change a new tool.

• Time to Modify
• First initialized when it is made from factory.
• Need to confirm the MG No. and T No. Manually when it is disordered.

• Purpose:
Record the status of all cutting tool on machine, make users know whether cutting tool reached to Max. Life,
avoid machining in case cutting tool is broken. This function needs a related PLC setting. In case, customer

• Condition
• Both auto and manual can be used.
• Operation
• Description
• Turret
• Group
the second one, when the second one is lock or「Tool life」is end, will use the third one, and so
on.
• Tool information (Status)
number of time.

• When lifetime of tool is greater than lifetime prediction, alarm will be show up.
(0)Without management: Set values are not effective.
(1) Without use: Lifetime of tool is zero.
(2) Usable:0< Tool Life Time <lifetime prediction
(3) End prediction: Lifetime prediction < Tool Lifetime < Maximum Lifetime
(4) End of Life: Maximum Lifetime < Tool Lifetime
(5)ware of tool

• Condition
• Operation
• Confirmation:
Simu. Setting
program.
• Condition
• Operation
press F7-Simulation
-Simulation screen
checking purpose.

Machining Test
MPG Simulation
• Condition
• Operation
• Confirm
Single Block
• Condition
• Operation

• Condition
• Confirmation
• Note

• R606 must be 1
• Time to disable
• Limit
to MPG simulation.
Break Point
• Condition
• Under Auto mode
• Execute.
Machining Monitor
Part Count Manager

• Description
1. Total accum part
3. Part count
reset

• Description

status
Alarm Processing
Emergency Stop
Alarm Display
Pending Alarm
History Alarm
reason.
• Command:
Save Alarm
• Operation
• File Name

Network Setting
• Command:
• Description
• IP Address
• Sunet Mask
• PC name
• Dir name


Set Kernel Server
• Command:
• Description
• Related infor.
• Timeout(ms)
Start Server
• Command:
• Description

PC Setting
XP OS

here"

change my files".



5. TCP/IP setting

[TCP/IP]"


VISTA OS


d. Click on "add"
3. Security setting


5. TCP/IP Setting


setting)


Win 7 OS


sharing….."





3. TCP/IP Setting


File Import
• Operation
File Export
• Operation
• Note:

3.1.4 Appendix

Fax：+886-3-6663505 TEL：+86-512-69008860
Taichung Taichung
TEL：+886-4-25337731 TEL：+886-4-23102626
FAX：+886-4-25349224 FAX：+886-4-23102636

FAX：+886-6-2796705 TEL：0512-69560828
Address： FAX：0512-69560818
Branch Ningbo City.
TEL：+86-571-82751187 TEL：+86-574-87750305
FAX：+-86-571-82751186 FAX：+86-574-87750306
TEL：0576- 86138372 TEL：+86-20-34583040
FAX：0576-86119106 FAX：+86-20-34583220
Branch Xi'an Office
TEL：+86-769-81660318 TEL：029-88287423
FAX：+86-769-81660328 FAX：029-88287423
TEL：18700712118 FAX：+86-53185905708

FAX：+86-592-7220536 TEL：+86-22-87134111
501
TEL：0379-65110352 TEL：023-67913296
FAX：0379-65110352 FAX：023-67634382
Henan
TEL：0512-69008860-300 TEL：027-87638876
TEL：024-25821398 TEL：15951989576
Shenzhen Thailand
TEL：0755-84584085 FAX：+66-27575476
10540


TEL：+603-61577632 Lebanon Beirut, Jdeideh - Ammaieh - Kessmeyan
FAX：+603-61574632 Group Build.DamascusTEL: +963 11 6731602Mob.: +963
Address： 988 211407E-Mail : info@rockwell.tw
E-Mail：
France Turkey
TEL：+33 2 35 06 07 83 TEL：+90-224-4434684
FAX：+33 2 35 06 07 83 FAX：+90-224-4434685
vaque.j@online.fr35 Address：
Address： Besevler K.S.S. 17 BLOK NO:72 Nilufer/BURSA/TURKYIE
6, Rue l'arché de Copigny, 76630 BAILLY, FRANCE
ISTANBUL/TURKEY
AKSIS MAKINA
TEL：+90 212 613 87 83
FAX：+90 212 613 87 85
E-Mail：
Address：

Operator - Programmer - S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator - Programmer - S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator & Programmer's Manual

机床产品/Machine Tool Products

Exported on 08/15/2018

1.1.12 History Alarm.................................................................................................................................................84

1.3.2.3 Example .......................................................................................................................................................166

1.3.12 Thread Cutting Cycle (G21).........................................................................................................................189

1.3.25.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................241

1.3.32.3 Action description.......................................................................................................................................266

1.3.39 Coordinate System Setting/Max. Spindle Speed Setting (G92)................................................................288

1.3.44 Spindle Rotate Speed Function : S code command..................................................................................307

1.3.50.1 Description of lathe double program.........................................................................................................321

2 EndUser_Mill ............................................................................................. 399

2.1.1.5 Offset/Setting ..............................................................................................................................................418

2.2.3.13 Broken tool Return Function......................................................................................................................548

2.4.3.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................625

2.4.10.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................640

2.4.19.1 Command Form ..........................................................................................................................................653

2.4.26.4 Example .......................................................................................................................................................675

2.4.36.2 Description ..................................................................................................................................................691

2.4.44.5 Example .......................................................................................................................................................708

1.1 6D-H/7/21/21-H/22/220 Seies_Serial Bus Lathe Operation Manual

1.1.1 Function Key and System configuration

1.1.1.1 Main Screen Sections

• Meanings for Sections on the Display:

1.1.1.2 CNC System Configuration

S (Rotating Speed of Spindle )

Zero Rel. Coord.

Zero All Rel. Coord.

• Press「Clear All Rel. Coord.」function key.

• F2 Program→F2 Delete Line

• Select All: Select all file.

Line Cut Teach

Arc Cut Teach

Cancel Arc Middle

Tool Wear Set

Tool Length Set

Tool Nose Set

User Parameter Setting

Work Piece Cord.

Mach. Coord. Teach

Mach. Coord. Inc. Teach

Monitor Area of Machining Information

Display Area of Machining Setting

Open File to Edit

• F4 Monitor->F1 Open File to Edit

Tool Wear Set

Clear Acum Cycle time

Set Kernel Server

PLC Param Setting

Operator Mode Setting

System Time Setting

Program File Font Size Setting

1.1.2 Series No Setting

1.1.3 Use Time Setting

1.1.4 Option Setting

1.1.5 Op. Info Restore

1.1.5.1 User Login

• login different users can have different permissions

1.1.5.2 User Logout

1.1.5.3 Forget Password

1.1.5.4 Authority Management

1.1.6 Change Password

1.1.7 Set Authority of Default